LP1020 MM E01

LP-1020/LP-1020L
Black-and-White Raster Plotter

LP-1020-MF/LP-1020L-MF
Network Multi-Function Plotter
Maintenance Manual
U00107759201
Seiko I Infotech Inc.

U00107759200 December 2007
U00107759201 April 2008
©Seiko I Infotech 2007, 2008

Reprinting of this manual without permission is prohibited.
The content of this manual may be changed without notice.
is a registered trademark of Seiko Instruments Inc.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox, Inc.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard (U.S.A.)
Foreword
This manual contains the information necessary to conduct the primary maintenance for LP-
1020/LP-1020L Black-and-White Raster Plotter and LP-1020-MF/LP-1020L-MF Network
Multi-Function Plotter (hereinafter called this device) at the site.
The manual is intended for the maintenance personnel who have mastered assembly,
disassembly, and adjustment of the device. The responsible personnel will perform maintenance
operations using necessary tools and measuring instruments.
Before starting the intended maintenance operations, be sure to completely read "Safety
Precautions" and "Operational Precautions" described from the next page so that you can inspect
and maintain the deveice safely and correctly.
Note that the illustrations and LCD displays used in this manual are those drawn for or those
displayed on the LP-1020/LP-1020L Black-and-White Raster Plotter if the operation procedure
and the display information are identical between the LP-1020/LP-1020L Black-and-White
Raster Plotter and the LP-1020-MF/LP-1020L-MF Network Multi-Function Plotter.
i
Safety Precautions
The following symbols are used in this manual to ensure the proper use of the plotter and to
prevent the plotter from being damaged.
Follow the instructions marked with these symbols.
Serious personal injury or death:

WARNING Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this
symbol could result in serious personal injury or death.
Minor personal injury or product and/or peripheral

damage:
CAUTION Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this
symbol could result in minor personal injury or
product and/or peripheral damage.
Example of symbols:
This symbol ( ) denotes items that require special care while executing a
certain procedure or operation.
This symbol ( ) denotes items that are forbidden.

The indication at left means that "Contact is prohibited."
This symbol ( ) denotes items you should follow to prevent accidents or

injury.
ii
Warning
DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH VOLTAGE" label (transfer/
separator) attached as it may result in electric shock.
DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH TEMPERATURE" label
attached as it may result in severe burns.
DO NOT disassemble or remodel the plotter. DO NOT repair the plotter by yourself. Doing so
may cause fire, electric shock or other accidents.
DO NOT throw the toner cartridge or waste toner bottle into fire or place them near heat as they
could explode or catch fire leading to serious accidents and/or bodily injury.
Before replacing a maintenance component, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the power
cable from the power outlet. Failure to observe the instructions may result in electric shock.
DO NOT disconnect or connect the power cable with wet hands. Doing so may lead to electric
shock.
Caution
If the toner accidentally gets into the eye during the maintenance, wash it off with clean running
water instead of rubbing it and consult a doctor immediately. If the toner gets on the skin or
clothing, immediately wash it off with soapy water.
Pay attention not to get injured by a cutter or screwdriver during the maintenance and damage
the device.
In order to ensure the safe operation of the device heed all of the cautions and warnings contained
throughout this manual.
iii
Warning labels
Warning labels are affixed to this device at the locations shown in the following figure.
You should understand what these warning labels say and perform the inspection and
maintenance work.
3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label
4 "Gas spring
expiration date" label
2a "Caution when dealing with

paper jam" label
1 "Caution: high temperature" label
2b "Caution when dealing with paper jam" label
iv
1 "Caution: HIGH TEMPERATURE" label (affixed to the inside of the fixation door)
This label cautions you not touch this area due to high temperature. The fixation
device will become hot. Take care to avoid contact when dealing with paper jams.
2 "Caution when dealing with paper jams" label

This label indicates the direction that jammed paper should be pulled out when paper
is jammed in the fixation device. Follow the directions on the label to remove the
paper.
3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

This label cautions against contact due to high voltage application. As it is dangerous,
never contact this area.
4 "Gas spring expiration date" label

This caution label indicates the date when the gas spring is consumed, and the user
must replace the gas spring before the indicated date expires.
v
Precaution on Maintenance
Before and during the inspection and maintenance of the device, observe the following
precautions.
1 Before the intended inspection and maintenance, hear the condition and/or trouble of this
device from the user. Although the machine is sound, the user may use the toner/paper that
is not supplied by Seiko I Infotech (SIIT) or the data may be error. For this reason,
certainly verify the current situation and determine the cause of trouble, if any.
2 When disassembling the device to, for example, replace a component, you should
examine and know the machine configuration completely so that you can smoothly
reassemble the machine.
3 Ensure sufficient maintenance space.
4 Pay attentimon not to spill the fresh/waste toner. Before the intended inspection and
maintenance, spread a sheet or cloth on the floor to protect the floor mat from soiling.
5 Do not keep the top cover (clamshell) opened for a long period of time. Otherwise, the
exposure drum will be deteriorated due to photo-fatigue. Cover the drum with a black bag
when the clamshell is removed.
6 Do not touch the photodrum surface with bare hands. Otherwise, the drum will be
degraded. If you touch the surface, completely wipe it with a clean cloth such as Cotton
ciegal. The poor image quality brought from the bare-hand contact can be removed by
outputting about fifteen sheets of paper.
7 Do not open the top cover with the photodrum removed. Otherwise, the cleaner will
topple and the waste toner is spilled to soil the machine interior.
8 Do not get any ferromagnetic material such as bolt and washer close to the developing
sleeve. If the part is attracted by the magnet roll, be sure to remove it to prevent the drum
from being damaged.
9 Do not run the developing sleeve in the reverse direction.
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword i
Safety Precautions ii
Warning labels iv
Precaution on Maintenance vi
Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure 1-1

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure 1-1
1.2 Necessary Tools 1-3
1.3 External View and Nomenclatures 1-3

1.3.1 LP-1020 / LP-1020L 1-3
1.3.2 LP-1020-MF / LP-1020L-MF 1-6
1.4 Maintenance Space 1-9
1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware 1-11

1.5.1 Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card 1-11
1.5.2 Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card 1-13
1.5.3 Other Version Upgrade Operations 1-13
1.5.4 Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade 1-15
1.5.5 Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card 1-19
1.5.6 Explanation of Maintenance CF Card 1-21
1.5.7 Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center 1-21
1.5.8 Version Upgrade by Web Browser 1-23
1.5.9 Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol 1-25
1.6 How To Enable the Color Scan Option 1-26

1.6.1 Procedure to enable the Color Scan option 1-26
1.6.2 Application notes on Color Scan CF card 1-27
1.6.3 If the Color Scan option fails to be enabled 1-27
1.6.4 Replacing the hard disk unit (HDD) 1-28
1.6.5 Replacing the MRC2 board 1-28
CONTENTS-1
Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode 2-1
2.1 Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation 2-2
2.1.1 Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode 2-2
2.1.2 Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel 2-3
2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu 2-4

2.2.1 Operation for Select and
Enter Operation the Maintenance Code 2-5
2.3 Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus 2-6

2.3.1 Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance) 2-6
2.3.2 Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information) 2-9
2.3.3 Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING"
(part cleaning information) 2-14
2.3.4 Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG"
(Unrecoverable Error Log) 2-18
2.3.5 Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log) 2-22
2.3.6 Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor) 2-25
2.3.7 Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor) 2-28
2.3.8 Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator) 2-30
2.3.9 Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test) 2-34
2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) 2-39
2.3.11 Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment) 2-44
2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) 2-53
2.3.13 Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM) 2-63
2.3.14 Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER"
(User-defined engine parameter) 2-66
2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width) 2-70
2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG"
(Process Cartridge Consumption Log) 2-74
2.4 Message 2-76
CONTENTS-2
Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode 3-1
3.1 Enter to Maintenance Person Mode 3-1
3.1.1 LP-1020 / LP-1020L 3-1
3.1.2 LP-1020-MF / LP-1020L-MF 3-2
3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus 3-3
3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web 3-6
3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions 3-6
Chapter 4 Regular Inspection 4-1

4.1 Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure 4-2
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error) 5-1

5.1 Type of Error Messages 5-1
5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error 5-2
5.3 Operator Notice Warning 5-4
5.4 Warning 5-6

5.4.1 Communication Error 5-6
5.4.2 PDL Warning 5-12
5.4.3 Engine Warning 5-14
5.4.4 Main Warning 5-15
5.4.5 Scan PDL Warning 5-15
5.4.6 SNMP Warning 5-16
CONTENTS-3
5.5 Service Call Error 5-18
5.5.1 Engine Error 5-18
5.5.2 System Error 5-18
5.5.3 Controller Error 5-19
5.6 Error Log 5-25

5.6.1 Classification of Error/Warning 5-25
5.6.2 Format of Message 5-25
5.6.3 Log Registration Format 5-25
5.6.4 Error Log Print Item 5-26
5.6.5 Type of Error Log 5-26
5.7 Error Log Classification List 5-28
5.8 Job Log 5-29

5.8.1 Job Log Print Item 5-29
5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board) 5-31
5.10 Serial Number Unset 5-32
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure) 6-1

6.1 How to Read This Manual 6-1
6.1.1 Overview of Engine Troubleshooting 6-1
6.1.2 Terminology 6-2
6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting 6-5

6.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description 6-5
6.2.2 Paper Jam Error Codes and Description 6-6

6.3.1 "Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting 6-7
6.3.2 "Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting 6-15
6.3.3 Troubleshooting by symptom 6-27
CONTENTS-4
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Scanner) 7-1
7.1.1 Outline of Engine Troubleshooting 7-1
7.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Code List 7-2
7.3 Level 2 Troubleshooting 7-3

7.3.1 "Unrecoverable Error Code" Troubleshooting 7-3
7.3.2 Troubleshooting on Symptom 7-3
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure) 8-1

8.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Method 8-1
8.1.1 Type of Engine Test Patterns 8-2
8.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure 8-4

8.2.1 Plotting Specification and Measuring Method 8-4
8.2.2 Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure 8-6
8.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure 8-7
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting (Scanner Print Quality Failure) 9-1

9.1 Troubleshooting for Print Quality Failure 9-1
CONTENTS-5
Chapter 10 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly of Plotter) 10-1
10.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly 10-1
10.1.2 Covers 10-2
10.2 Replacing the Parts 10-3

10.2.1 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board) 10-3
10.2.2 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board) 10-9
10.2.3 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board) 10-10
10.2.4 Replacing the Controller Fan 10-11
10.2.5 Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor 10-12
10.2.6 Replacing the Cutter Unit 10-13
10.2.7 Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit 10-19
10.2.8 Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit 10-20
10.2.9 Replacing the Power Switch 10-21
10.2.10 Replacing the Filter 10-22
10.2.11 Replace the waste toner bottle switch and
the waste toner sensor 10-23
10.2.12 Replacing the Fixation Unit 10-24
10.2.13 Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY 10-30
10.2.14 Replacing the Main Motor 10-33
10.2.15 Replacing the Transport (suction). 10-34
10.2.16 Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit 10-36
10.2.17 Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan) 10-37
10.2.18 Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation 10-38
10.2.19 Replacing the Fan on Fuser 10-39
10.2.20 Replacing the Charger Fan 10-40
10.2.21 Replacing the Process Unit 10-42
10.2.22 Replacing the LED Head 10-43
10.2.23 Replacing the Transfer Separator 10-47
10.2.24 Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY
(charge elimination LED) 10-48
10.2.25 Replacing the Developer 10-49
10.2.26 Replacing the Developer DV Spacer 10-53
10.2.27 Replacing the Developer Blade 10-54
10.2.28 Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch) 10-56
CONTENTS-6
10.2.29 Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch) 10-57
10.2.30 Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor 10-58
10.2.31 Replacing the Manual Feed Sensor 10-59
10.2.32 Replacing the Control Panel 10-60
10.2.33 Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02) 10-61
10.2.34 Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit
(PS11, PS12, PS21, and PS22) 10-63
10.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring 10-64
10.2.36 Replacing the heat roller 10-80
10.2.37 Replacing the backup roller 10-83
10.2.38 Replacing the BELT (TRANS) 10-85
10.2.39 Replacing the GEAR (DRUM/21Z/20.4) 10-88
10.2.40 Replacing the Nail (Fu•Out) ASSY 10-90
10.2.41 Replacing the Separator (BUR) ASSY 10-93
10.2.42 Replacing the TIMING-BELT(FIRST) 10-96
10.2.43 Replacing the WIRE (TC/DC) 10-100
10.2.44 Replacing the Photo Sensor 1 (PS07) 10-102
10.2.45 Replacing the Photo Sensor 2 (PS06) 10-103
10.2.46 Replacing the MAGNET ROLL of the developer 10-105
10.2.47 Cleaning Primary Wire 10-108
10.2.48 Exchanging Primary Wire 10-111
10.2.49 Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade 10-115
10.2.50 Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum 10-119
Chapter 11 Replacing the Part (Disassembly/Assembly of Scanner) 11-1

11.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly 11-1
11.1.2 Name of Scanner Covers 11-2
11.2 Replacing the Part 11-3

11.2.1 Replacing the Scanner Cover 11-3
11.2.2 Replacing the Control Panel 11-4
11.2.3 Replacing the Scanner Motor 11-5
11.2.4 Replacing the CIS Unit 11-8
11.2.5 Replacing the GUIDE (SHADING) 11-15
CONTENTS-7
11.2.6 Replacing the ROLLER(SC/REGIST)ASSY /
ROLLER(SC/EXIT)ASSY 11-17
11.2.7 Replacing the MSC2 Board 11-25
11.2.8 Replacing the GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY 11-26
Chapter 12 Adjustment (Plotter) 12-1

12.1 Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit 12-1
12.1.1 Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current 12-2
12.1.2 Developer AC Bias 12-3
12.1.3 Developer DC Bias 12-4
12.1.4 Transfer Load Current 12-5
12.1.5 Separator AC Bias 12-6
12.2 Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit 12-7
12.3 Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head 12-8
12.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items 12-9

12.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure 12-10
12.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack 12-11
12.4.3 Adjusting the Cut Squareness 12-14
12.4.4 Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy 12-15
12.4.5 Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy 12-17
12.4.6 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration 12-19
12.4.7 Adjusting the Center Registration 12-21
12.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space 12-24
12.6 Adjusting the LED Head Joint 12-25
CONTENTS-8
Chapter 13 Adjustment (Scanner) 13-1
13.1 Items Required for Adjustment 13-1
13.2 Outline of Adjustment Work 13-2
13.3 PC for Adjustment 13-3

13.3.1 Conditions of PC for Adjustment 13-3
13.3.2 Scanner Maintenance Tool (ScanMainte.exe) 13-3
13.3.3 Scanner Adjustment Tool (MFTool.exe) 13-4
13.4 Originals for Adjustment and Evaluation 13-5

13.4.1 Original for Feed Adjustment (for Motor Speed Adjustment) 13-5
13.4.2 Original for Connection Adjustment
(for CIS Connection Adjustment) 13-5
13.4.3 Original for Evaluation (Copy/Scan Standard Chart) 13-6
13.5 Preparation for Adjustment 13-7

13.5.1 Connecting the Device 13-7
13.5.2 Starting Respective Tools 13-7
13.5.3 Example of Screen Layout 13-9
13.5.4 Printing the Scanner Parameters 13-9
13.6 Shading Offset Adjustment Procedure 13-10
13.7 Original Feed Speed Adjustment/Connection Adjustment in Main and

Sub Scan Directions 13-15
13.7.1 Original Feed Speed Adjustment (Motor Speed) 13-15
13.7.2 Connection Adjustment in Main and Sub Scan Directions
(CIS Connection) 13-27
13.8 Registration Adjustment Procedure 13-39

13.8.1 Description for registration adjustment parameter 13-39
13.8.2 Adjusting the Side Registration 13-40
13.8.3 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration Value 13-40
13.8.4 Adjusting the Bottom Edge Registration Value 13-41
CONTENTS-9
13.9 Checking Adjustment Results 13-42
13.9.1 Checking the Copy Results of Original Type = Text/Line 13-42
13.9.2 Checking the Copy Results of Original Type = Text/Photo 13-46
13.10 Scanner Adjustment Results Memorandumg 13-48
Chapter 14 Operational Description (Plotter) 14-1

14.1 Features 14-2
14.2 Engine Specifications 14-3
14.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part 14-4
14.4 Basic Operation (Overall Operation) 14-5

14.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration 14-5
14.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration 14-6
14.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram 14-8
14.4.4 Outline of Operations 14-9
14.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation 14-11

14.5.1 Primary Charging 14-11
14.5.2 Photosensitive Drum 14-12
14.5.3 Exposure 14-13
14.5.4 Development 14-14
14.5.5 Transfer 14-15
14.5.6 Separation 14-16
14.5.7 Cleaning 14-16
14.5.8 Charge Elimination 14-17
14.5.9 Fusing 14-17
14.6 Operation of Drive and Feed Systems 14-19

14.6.1 Drive System 14-19
14.6.2 Paper feed system 14-19
CONTENTS-10
14.7 Control System 14-21
14.7.1 Process Control 14-21
14.7.2 Paper Feed Control 14-21
14.8 Controller 14-22

14.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications 14-22
14.8.2 Hardware Configuration 14-23
14.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart 14-24
Chapter 15 Operational Description (Scanner) 15-1

15.1 Features 15-1
15.2 Scanner Specifications 15-1
15.3 Basic Operation 15-4

15.3.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration 15-4
15.3.2 Outline of Machine Configuration 15-5
15.3.3 Circuit Diagram 15-6
15.3.4 Brief Description of Operation 15-7
15.4 Scanner Controller (MSC2 Board) 15-9

15.5 CIS Unit (ISI3 Board and CIS) 15-10

CONTENTS-11
Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication A-1
A.1 Setting the DIP Switches A-1
A.1.1 Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4) A-1
A.1.2 Setting DIP Switch SW2 on MEC Board A-2
A.1.3 Setting DIP Switch SW3 on MEC Board A-2
A.2 LED Indication A-3
A.2.1 LED indication on MEC board A-3
A.3 Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board A-6
Appendix B RFU Board Setup B-1

B.1 Setup of DIP Switch B-1
B.1.1 DIP Switch on the RFU Board B-1
Appendix C MRC2 Board Setup C-1

C.1 Setup of DIP Switches C-1
C.1.1 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7) C-1
C.1.2 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2) C-1
C.1.3 DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board C-2
C.1.4 DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board C-2
Appendix D MSC2 Board Setup and LED Indication D-1

D.1 Setup of DIP Switches D-1
D.1.1 DIP Switch on MSC2 Board (SW4) D-1
D.1.2 DIP Switch on MSC2 Board (SW5) D-1
D.2 LED Indication D-2

D.2.1 LED Indication of MSC2 Board D-2
CONTENTS-12
Appendix E ISI3 Board Setup and LED Indication E-1
E.1 Setup of DIP Switches E-1
E.1.1 DIP Switch on ISI Board (SW4) E-1
E.1.2 DIP Switch on ISI Board (SW5) E-1
E.2 LED Indication E-1
Appendix F Menu Structure F-1

F.1 LP-1020 / LP-1020L Menu Structure F-3
F.2 LP-1020-MF / LP-1020L-MF Menu Structure F-20
Appendix G Electrical Connection Diagram (Plotter) G-1
Appendix H Electrical Connection Diagram (Scanner) H-1
CONTENTS-13
Tables
Table 1-1 Necessary Tool List 1-2
Table 1-2 Other Version Upgrade List 1-13
Table 1-3 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List 1-17
Table 1-4 Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List 1-17
Table 1-5 Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List 1-19
Table 1-6 Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List 1-19
Table 2-1 Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List 2-4
Table 2-2 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes 2-21
Table 2-3 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes 2-24
Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List 2-55
Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List 4-2

Table 4-2 Regular Inspection Item List (Scanner) 4-3
Table 5-1 If a Job has been Left at Powering on 5-5

Table 5-2 Ethernet Warning List 5-6
Table 5-3 Mail Warning List 5-6
Table 5-4 USB Warning List 5-7
Table 5-5 Delivery Interface Warning List 5-7
Table 5-6 File (TWAIN) Interface Warning List 5-10
Table 5-7 PlotDataToFile Warning List 5-10
Table 5-8 PDL Warning List 5-12
Table 5-9 Copy PDL Warning (Operator Intervention) 5-14
Table 5-10 Engine Control Warning List 5-14
Table 5-11 List of Main Warnings 5-15
Table 5-12 Scan PDL Warning List 5-15
Table 5-13 SNMP Warning List 5-16
Table 5-14 PDL Module Error List 5-19
Table 5-15 Engine Control Module Error List 5-19
Table 5-16 Operation Module Error List 5-20
Table 5-17 Main Module Error List 5-20
Table 5-18 Setup Error List 5-21
Table 5-19 Panel Control Module Error List 5-21
CONTENTS-14
Table 5-20 Spool Module Error List 5-22
Table 5-21 Copy PDL Module Error List 5-22
Table 5-22 Scan PDL Module Error List 5-23
Table 5-23 Up-path Spooler Module Error List 5-23
Table 5-24 Copy and Sort Module Error List 5-24
Table 5-25 Error Log Print Item 5-26
Table 5-26 Error Log Classification List 5-28
Table 5-27 Job Log Print Item 5-29
Table 6-1 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes 6-5

Table 6-2 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes 6-6
Table 7-1 Unrecoverable Error Code List 7-2
Table 8-1 Engine Test Pattern List 8-3

Table 8-2 Image Quality Defects List 8-7
Table 12-1 Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value 12-8
Table 12-2 Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure 12-9
Table 14-1 Symbol Table 14-7
Table 15-1 Specifications of Scanner 15-1

Table 15-2 Outline of Copy Function 15-2
Table 15-3 Outline of Scanner Delivery Function 15-3
Table 15-4 Symbol List 15-5
CONTENTS-15
Figures
Figure 1-1 Maintenance Work Procedure Flow 1-1

Figure 1-2 External View and Nomenclatures (Front) 1-3
Figure 1-3 External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear) 1-4
Figure 1-4 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior) 1-4
Figure 1-5 External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel)
Figure 1-6 External View and Nomenclatures (Front) 1-6
Figure 1-7 External View and Nomenclatures (Rear and Right) 1-7
Figure 1-8 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior) 1-7
Figure 1-9 External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel) 1-8
Figure 1-10 Maintenance Space 1-9
Figure 1-11 Card Slot on Device 1-11
Figure 1-12 Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade 1-19
Figure 1-13 Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card 1-21
Figure 1-14 Extract File Configuration 1-21
Figure 10-1 Nomenclatures of Covers 10-3
Figure 11-1 Nomenclatures of Scanner Covers 11-2
Figure 13-1 Items Required for Adjustment 13-1
Figure 14-1 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part 14-4

Figure 14-2 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration 14-5
Figure 14-3 Overview of Device Configuration Drawing 14-6
Figure 14-4 Configuration Block Diagram 14-8
Figure 14-5 Controller Block Diagram 14-23
Figure 14-6 Data Processing Flowchart 14-24
Figure 15-1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration 15-4

Figure 15-2 Outline of Machine Configuration 15-5
Figure 15-3 Circuit Diagram 15-6
Figure 15-4 Scanner Controller Block Diagram 15-9
Figure 15-5 CIS Unit Block Diagram 15-10
CONTENTS-16
Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure
Chapter 1 describes the primary maintenance work procedure, necessary tools, and names of
components of this device.
Specifically, Section 1.5 describes how to upgrade the system firmware and Section 1.6
describes how to enable the Color Scan option on the LP-1020-MF/LP-1020L-MF Network
Multi-Function Plotter.
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure
The maintenance work is classified into the regular checking maintenance based on the
Maintenance Agreement and the maintenance if a trouble occurs.
The work procedure flows of respective cases are shown in Figure 1-1.
Start
Regular check/In
Regular checking case of a trouble Maintenance if a
maintenance trouble occurs
Grasp the situations (problems, complaints, Check the contents of trouble and the
etc.) of the device. situations if a trouble occurs.
Check and clean the parts (See Chapter 4) Perform the troubleshooting.
Replace parts as necessary (See Chapter · If controller is error (See Chapter 5)
10, 11) or adjust (See Chapter 12, 13). · If engine is error (See Chapter 6)
· If image quality is poor (See Chapter 8, 9)
Check by plotting that no problem occurs. Replace a faulty part (See Chapter 10, 11)
Adjust the replaced part or make adjustment
as necessary (See Chapter 12, 13)
End
Check that the trouble is removed.
End
Figure 1-1 Maintenance Work Procedure Flow
1-1
1.2 Necessary Tools
Table 1-1 lists tools and measuring instruments necessary for the maintenance.
Table 1-1 Necessary Tool List
Name Quantity Remarks
- To write various types of information

CF card 1 pc
- To save system files
No. 2 magnetized screwdriver
(stem length: 100 mm and 200 mm)
Phillips screwdriver 1pc each
No. 3 magnetized screwdriver
Stubby screwdriver (stem length: 38 mm)
Box screwdriver 1pc 5.5-mm hexagonal bit type
Flat blade screwdriver 1pc For removing E-rings.
Voltage adjustment screwdriver 1pc CERAMIC ALIGNER SCREWDRIVER DA-58/+
C snap ring tool 1 pc
Hexagonal wrench 1pc each 1.5 mm, 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm
Radio pliers 1pc
Nippers 1pc For cutting Insulock tie.
Insulock tie ——
Scale 1pc
Cutter 1pc
Digital multi-meter 1pc For measuring each various power measures. (30900-0926)
Cleaning kit 1 set For cleaning the interior (Ethanol and cotton swabs )
Vacuum cleaner 1 pc For cleaning the interior (For toner and handy type)
Tweezers 1pc For cleaning and/or replace wires.
Waste —— ———
Cotton ciegal —— For cleaning the drum. (30790-0103)
Heat roller cleaner —— For cleaning fixation roller (heat) and roller (backup).
Contact grease FLOIL FG-60H —— For greasing lubricates fixation ring (bias).
OPC cleaner —— For cleaning the OPC photosensitive drum.
1-2
1.3 External View and Nomenclatures
1.3.1 LP-1020 / LP-1020L
Figures 1-2 to 1-5 respectively show the external view and nomenclatures of the device.
1 Roll 1 drawer (door 1)

3 Manual feed drawer (door 4)
4 Paper unfeeding outlet
5 Top door (door 6)
6 Fixation door (door 7)
7 Manual paper feed holder (door 8)
8 Manual feed inlet
9 Toner cover
0 Control panel
A Waste toner bottle door
Figure 1-2 External View and Nomenclatures (Front)
1-3
For 120 V AC
For 230 V AC
1 Main power switch

2 Power cord
3 Parallel interface connector
4 USB interface connector
5 Ethernet interface connector
6 Cutter door (door 5)
7 Cutter inside door (door 9)
8 Cutter door lower small window (door 10)
Figure 1-3 External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear)
1 Paper feed knob

2 Paper flange
Figure 1-4 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior)
1-4
2LCD
The status of this device, as well as a
menu to set the device functions
appear on a 20- digit, 2-line display.
1LEDs
The device status is indicated
by LEDs on, flashing, and off.
3Keys
Use these keys to set device
functions.
1-5
1.3.2 LP-1020-MF / LP-1020L-MF
Figures 1-6 to 1-9 respectively show the external view and nomenclatures of the device.
⑨
⑩
⑪
①

3 Manual feed drawer (door 4)
4 Paper unfeeding outlet
5 Upper door (door 6)
⑤ 6 Fixation door (door 7)
7 Manual paper feeding holder (door 8)
8 Manual feed inlet
9 Control panel
0 Original eject guide
A Waste toner door
⑥ B Scanner cover
C Stopper
⑫
⑬
To remove the scanner cover,

raise and unlock this stopper.
Figure 1-6 External View and Nomenclatures (Front)
1-6
For 120 V AC
For 230 V AC
1Main power switch

2Power cord
3Parallel interface connector
4Ethernet interface connector
5USB interface connector
6Cutter door (door 5)
7Cutter inside door (door 9)
8Cutter door lower small door (door 10)
9Toner cover
Figure 1-7 External View and Nomenclatures (Rear and Right)
1Paper feed knob

2Paper flange
Figure 1-8 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior)
1-7
1 2 3 4 5
WARNING LIGHT POWER

MENU COPY PRINT MEMORY RESET
POWER
SAVING DELIVERY FILE REPRINT STOP
SCAN STOP
ORIGINAL ORIGINAL BACKGROUND
SIZE TYPE REMOVAL DENSITY SCALE x1
WASTE PAPER
TONER TONER AUTO TEXT/LINE FEED
PROCESS DARK
MANUAL FEED FIXED SCALE
FIXED-SIZE
TEXT/PHOTO ORIGINAL
PORTRAIT
FIXED-SIZE
PHOTO NORMAL IMAGE START
LANDSCAPE ZOOM QUALITY
SYNCHRO BLUE PRINT SORT

NON-PROPORTIONAL
LIGHT SCALE
FUNCTION
DATA ERROR
6 7 8 9 10
1 Warning lamp
2 Mode select keys
3 LCD
4 MEMORY (registration memory), REPRINT (reprint), RESET (reset), and STOP (stop) keys
5 Power switch
6 Status indicators
7 Parameter setup keys
8 Arrow, Enter, and Cancel keys
9 Ten keypads
0 SCAN STOP and START keys
1-8
1.4 Maintenance Space
Figure 1-10 shows the spaces necessary to maintain the device.
600
300
300 1154 600

700 700
552
2052
1652
900
800
2054
2554
Installation space
(Dimension of height : 2000 mm)
Maintenance space
(Unit: mm)
Figure 1-10 Maintenance Space
1-9
1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware
This section describes how to version upgrade the system firmware of the device. The device is
equipped with multiple firmware items. It is possible to version upgrade items collectively.
1.5.1 Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card
The version upgrade CF card is used to upgrade all firmware versions collectively. (This card is
common to plotter and MF models.)
<Version-upgrade applies to the following firmware:>

- Controller firmware
- Engine firmware
- Scanner firmware (used in MF model)
<Procedures>
1 Turn on the device and execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list.
2 Turn off the device.
3 Insert the version upgrade CF card into the controller CF card slot. Check DIP
switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.)
DIP switch for version upgrade.

Version upgrade: bit 1=OFF, 2=OFF Card slot
OFF 1 2
Figure 1-11 Card Slot on Device
1-10
4 Turn on the device.

In the version upgrade process, the old firmware version is automatically erased and
the new version is written in the device. After the start is booted correctly, the first
screen appears on the LCD and the process is initiated.
LCD displayed
S Y S T EM COP Y
Note 1: Description of XXXXXXX

S Y S T EM COP Y
COP Y I NG X X X X X X ( N o t e 1 ) During the version upgrade,
"ENGINE" is displayed for
engine firmware.
"SCANNER" is displayed for
S Y S T E M CO P Y scanner firmware.
S - ERA S I NG X X X ( N o t e 2) "SYSTEM" is displayed for
controller firmware.
Note 2: The down-counter for
copying or erasing the
S Y S T EM COP Y controller firmware is
WR I T I N G X X X displayed.
S Y S T EM COP Y
Normal termination
COP Y F I N I SHED
5 Press the Power key for several seconds to turn it off.

6 Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot.
7 Turn on the device to reboot the system.
8 Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the system firmware is
correctly version-upgraded.
Note: For the MF model, the scanner firmware is not rewritten if its version is
same as that registered to the device.
Note: If the engine firmware version is the same as or older than the one registered
to the device, the overwrite process is not executed.
Note: The version-upgrade of the controller firmware is executed unconditionally.
1-11
1.5.2 Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card
The maintenance CF card can version upgrade individual firmware items one by one. The
version-upgrade using this card is executed by the control panel operation.
(1) LP-1020 version upgrading operation (maintenance open)
<Procedures>
2 Insert the maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot.
Check DIP switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.)
4 Access the FUNCTION menu, specify the target firmware item, and upgrade its
version.
system.bin: Total system (controller firmware + engine firmware)
Pxxxxx.bin: RIP controller firmware (xxxxxx: version)
Exxxxx.bin: Engine firmware (xxxxxx: version)
Sxxxxx.bin: Scanner firmware (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)
Control panel (example of controller firmware version upgrade )
# V ERS I ON U PGR ADE

＞
* s y s t em . b i n
s y s t em ( 0 1 A )
*E1_01 . b i n
eng i ne ( 1 . 01 )
*E1_01 . b i n
OK?
*E1_01 . b i n
COP Y I NG ENG I NE
*E1_01 . b i n
COP Y F I N I SHE D
1-12

6 Pull out the maintenance person CF card from the controller CF card slot.
1.5.3 Other Version Upgrade Operations
If addition to the utilization of version upgrade and maintenance CF cards, it is possible to

upgrade firmware versions as shown in Table 1-2 by using version upgrade DIP switches of the
device. Once DIP switches are set, procedures are the same as normal batch version upgrade
process.
* In this version upgrade, only the control firmware version, including BOOT ROM, can be upgraded.
Table 1-2 Other Version Upgrade List
DSW1 DSW2 Description

Upgrades all firmware versions in the device
OFF OFF
collectively. (Normal version upgrade operation)
ON OFF Upgrades only the controller firmware version.
Upgrades only controller firmware and BOOT ROM
OFF ON
versions.
Rewrites only the complete controller data, including
ON ON
BOOT ROM. (Setup area is initialized.)
(Note 1) After the version-upgrade, be sure to return DIP switches 1 and 2 to OFF position.
(Note 2) Batch version up of each firmware mentioned above cannot be executed with the CF card for maintenance.
(DSW1, 2 = OFF, OFF)
<Procedures>
2 Insert the version-upgrade or maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot.
Move DIP switches 1 and 2 to necessary positions according to the purpose (see Table
1-2.)
* Correct system file must exist in the /sys holder of each card.
The version upgrade is automatically initiated. During the process, the LCD changes
the display as shown below.
1-13
LCD displayed
S T AR T I NG VE R - U P
LOAD I NG S Y S T EM
COP Y I NG S Y S T EM
S Y S CO P Y S T A R T
S - ERA S I NG x x x
WR I T I N G xx x
Normal termination (DSW1, 2=ON, OFF)
COP Y F I N I SHED
Normal termination (DSW1, 2=OFF, ON)
COP Y F I N I SHED - B T
Normal termination (DSW1, 2=ON, ON)
COP Y F I N I SHED - A L

5 Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot.
7 Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the target firmware is
correctly version-upgraded.
1-14
1.5.4 Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade
If an error message appears during the CF card version upgrade take actions according to Table
1-3.
E CFCARD nn n n
nnnn: Error code
E T ECHCARD nnnn
nnnn: Error code
1-15
Table 1-3 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List
(1/2)
Error code Error name and description Measure (for maintenance person)
Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
Erasing the flash memory chip is
0001 recurs or the device is not booted, replace the
unsuccessful.
MRC2 board.
Erasing the flash memory sector is
0002 recurs or the device is not booted, replace the
unsuccessful.
MRC2 board.
0003 Flash memory write timeout occurs. recurs or the device is not booted, replace the
MRC2 board.
0004 Flash memory write verify error occurs. recurs or the device is not booted, replace the
MRC2 board.
The system image in the CF card is not Version upgrade the firmware again using the
0050 compatible with the device. (Magic correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,
number unmatch) replace the MRC2 board.
Version upgrade the firmware again using the
The system image in the CF card does not
0051 correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,
contain kernel.
replace the MRC2 board.
The system image in the CF card is correct version upgrade CF card that contains
0053
partially destroyed. (CRC error) correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the
MRC2 board.
The system image in the CF card is not correct version upgrade CF card that contains
0054
compatible with the device. correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the
MRC2 board.
The system image in the CF card is not
correct version upgrade CF card that contains
0055 compatible with the device. (The image
correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the
size is too large.
MRC2 board.
The file in the CF card does not contain correct version upgrade CF card that contains
0056
system image. (System comparison error) correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the
MRC2 board.
The version upgrade process is terminated Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
0100
due to short device memory capacity. recurs, replace the MRC2 board.
With the DSW1 and DSW2 on the board of this
device set in OFF and ON positions respectively (or
DSW1: ON, DSW2: ON), and use the CF card that
contains correct system image to version upgrade
The version upgrade firmware of the
0101 the firmware again.
device is faulty.
If the error recurs or the device is not booted,
(Note: The CF card must contain controller system
file (file name: system.bin).)
Set DIP switches 1 and 2 on the board to ON and
OFF positions, respectively, and version upgrade
The system image is not written to the the firmware again. If the error recurs or the device
0052
flash memory of the MRC2 board. is not booted, replace the MRC2 board.
1-16
Table 1-3 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List

(2/2)
With the DSW1 and DSW2 on the board of this
device set in OFF and ON positions respectively (or
DSW1: ON, DSW2: ON), version upgrade the
The version-upgrade of BOOT ROM is
0200 firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is
unsuccessful.
not booted, replace the MRC2 board.
Edit the cardid.dat file in the CF card correctly. To
The card recognition file (cardid.dat) in the
0080 this end, write the following string to the file.
CF card age is not correct.
SYSTEM:LSP:1.00
Turn off the device remove the CF card once and
reinsert it, turn on the machine, and version-
0081 CF card read error occurs.
upgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs,
Turn off the device remove the CF card once and
reinsert it, turn on the machine, and version-
0082 CF card system image open error occurs.
upgrade the firmware again.
If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.
Turn off the device insert the CF card into the slot
0083 The CF card is not inserted into the slot. correctly, turn on the machine, and version upgrade
the firmware again.
Turn off the device insert the CF card into the slot
correctly, turn on the machine, and version upgrade
0084 CF card is not correctly mounted.
the firmware again.
If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.
Table 1-4 Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List
An unrecoverable error occurs on the Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
0171
engine side. recurs, replace the MEC board.
Version upgrade is executed using any other
017B correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,
file than engine firmware file.
replace the MRC board.
Contents of engine flash memory cannot Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
017C
be erased. recurs, replace the MEC board.
W r i t e t o e n g i n e f l a s h m e m o r y i s Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
017D
unsuccessful. recurs, replace the MEC board.
017E Engine firmware checksum error occurs. correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,
replace the MRC board.
1-17
Table 1-5 Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List
0009 Version up is disabled on the scanner side
recurs, replace the MSC2 board.
Communication error occurred between Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
001D
controller and scanner during version up. recurs, replace the MSC2 board.
101D Writing to the scanner flash memory failed
0101 The scanner flash memory was destroyed.
Table 1-6 Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List
CF card does not exist, or it is not Insert CF card correctly.
1001
recognized
1002 CF card type is incorrect Insert correct CF card (TECHCARD)
1003 Corresponding file is not found in CF card Insert CF card in which the system files are stored.
Check if the system files are destroyed, and insert
1004 Corresponding file in CF card is illegal.
CF card that stores correct system files.
Correct folder does not exist, or files are not Store system files in correct folder, or insert CF
1100
recognized correctly. card already checked for correction operation.
1-18
1.5.5 Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card
The version upgrade CF card contains the total system file where all firmware items of the device
are assembled into a single package. For this reason, it is possible to upgrade all firmware
versions collectively.
(1) Directory configuration in card
The version upgrade CF card supports two directories, each of which contains the information
file as shown below.
1 sys directory
The version upgrade total system file (system.bin) exists in the / sys directory. The size of this
system file is about 3 MB and only one system file is contained in it. If the / sys director does
not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when the version-upgrade CF card
is used.
2 cardid directory
The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the version upgrade card exsists in the
\cardid directory. If the ID code of the version upgrade card does not exist in the \cardid
directory, the version-upgrade card is not recognized. The ID code consists of "SYSTEM,"
"machine name," and "version."
Example: SYSTEM:LSP:1.00
1 2
sys cardid
Figure 1-12 Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade
1-19
1.5.6 Explanation of Maintenance CF Card
The maintenance CF card is used to upgrade individually each firmware installed the device.
Multiple firmware files can be registered in the sys directory.
(1) Configuration of card directories
The maintenance CF card supports two directories, each of which contains information files or
file as shown below.
1 sys directory
The following version upgrade system files exists in the sys directory.
Total system file: system.bin

RIP controller firmware: Pxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version)
Engine firmware: Exxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version)
Scanner firmware: Sxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)
If the /sys directory does not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when
the maintenance CF card is used.
2 cardid directory
The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the maintenance card exsists in the /cardid
directory.
If the ID code of the maintenance card does not exist in the /cardid directory, the maintenance
card is not recognized. The ID code consists of "TECH," "machine name," and "version."
(Here, "version" shows that of the total system file.)
Example: TECH:LSP:1.00
1 2
sys cardid
Figure 1-13 Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card
1-20
1.5.7 Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center
Version upgrade and maintenance CF cards respectively contain information directories that
maintain IDs, firmware versions, and system images. The file that contains these information
directories in the compressed form is provided to individual service centers so that CF cards can
be created in each office. (To execute the online version-upgrade, use the system.bin file on the
sys directory.)
(1) How to create the version-upgrade CF card
<Procedures>
1 Prepare a CF card writer. (Commercially available product is acceptable.)
2 Prepare the card formatted in FAT16 or FAT32. (FAT16 is recommended. Formatted
cards are commercially available.)
3 Prepare and extract the data compressed file discussed above. Directories and files are
loaded to the PC. (See Figure 1-14.)
4 Using the card writer, copy /sys and /cardid directories to the CF card. If the fresh CF
card is used, it is not necessary to format it with the PC.
- Cardid and sys directories must always be copied to the CF card.
/LP1020-01A
/sys /cardid
Figure 1-14 Extract File Configuration
1-21
1.5.8 Version Upgrade by Web Browser
Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version
upgrade by the Web browser from the host computer.
As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use
the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory.
The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade using the "system.bin" file.
<Procedures>
1 Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin)
2 Using the "remote-control startup procedures" described in the User's guide allows the
browser to display the plotter's Web screen.
3 Click "Maintenance" in the left menu list to open the Maintenance window.
1-22
4 On the left menu list, enter the following maintenance password into the Password box
and click [Login].
CSCCSUDR (8 half-size characters)
5 Clicking Special Maintenance, the third menu on the Maintenance window, will open
the Special Maintenance window. There is no task on this window. Click Next.
6 Use the View button at the center of the System Change window to select the prepared
RIP system. Click Send to Printer. It takes several seconds until the next screen
appears after the data transfer is started. The initiation of data transfer is indicated on
the operation panel of the device.
7 Check the system version on the System Change window and, if it is OK, click
System Change. (The run time is about 3 to 4 minutes.)
8 When the next screen appears, the version upgrade procedures through the browser are
completed. Upon completion of version upgrade procedures, the device is rebooted
automatically.
Note: If the plotter is turned off during the system firmware version-upgrade
process, contents of the flash memory are broken and resultantly the device
cannot be booted correctly. If this is your case, it is necessary to write the
system firmware from the CF card to the flash memory and upgrade system
firmware versions from the host computer again. Pay special attention when
the machine is away from the computer.
Note: Use the Netscape Communicator 4.5 or later or Internet Explorer 4.5 or
later.
(1) Error
Following errors may be displayed on the host computer.
■ The downloaded file did not pass the header check.

Cause: An error occurred during the download.
Type of error: File format error
■ The plotter acknowledged NG against the version-upgrade request.

Cause: An error occurred during the download.
Type of error: The version upgrade rejection error
■ An error occurred during the CRC check.

Cause: The system file is damaged.
Corrective action: Download the system file again and retry the CRC check. When the error
recurs, consult the supplier.
1-23
1.5.9 Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol
Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version
upgrade by the FTP protocol from the host computer.
As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use
the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory.
The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade the "system.bin" file.
<Procedures>
1 Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin)
2 Enter the plotter IP address to log in the device.
3 Enter the user name. Furthermore, enter the password "downloading."
4 Use the "put" command to send the system file of the network controller firmware to
the plotter.
* Example of operation on Personal computer.
> ftp <lp-1020 lp address> ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Enter the plotter IP address. (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Name: downloading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
User name prepared for downloading the system
(down loading)
Password: downloading ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Enter the same string as the user name
(i.e. "downloading").
ftp>bin ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Change the binary mode.
ftp>put <System file F/W file name> ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Enter the system file name (system.bin).
ftp>quit ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Completed ftp protocol.
>
5 Upon completion of version-upgrade, use the "quit" command to quit the "ftp"
command. This device is automatically rebooted.
(1) Error
Following errors may be displayed on the host computer.
■ When the plotter is occupied by other user, the following error message appears.
421 Service not available, closing control connection (XXXX).
XXXX: 0001 -- Either netd, centroD, or testD is working.
0002 -- The device is not in idle state (i.e. the plotter is under operation.)
■ When the version-upgrade process is failed, the following error message appears.
553 Requested action not taken (XXXX).
XXXX: 001 -- The file is not normally formatted.
002 -- CRC check error (before writing to the flash memory)
003 -- CRC check error (after writing to the flash memory)
004 -- Flash write error
005 -- The file is transferred in the ASCII mode.
**** -- Either error code listed on pages 1-13 and 1-14 is displayed.
1-24
Note: If the device is turned off during the system version-upgrade, the contents of
the flash memory are damaged to prevent the machine from correct bootup.
If this is your case, it is necessary to write the system program in the IC card
and resend the upgraded version from the host computer to the device.
(2) LCD display on the device side during online version-upgrade
The following appears on the LCD of the device during the online version upgrade through the
Web browser or FTP protocol.
Remo t e Cop y Note: The display shown in the

left figure lasts (for about one
minute) when upgrading the
engine firmware (and the scanner
firmware for MF model).
Remo t e Co p y
S Y S COP Y S T AR T
Remo t e Co p y
S - E RA S I NG X X X
Remo t e Co p y
WR I T I N G X X X
Remo t e Co p y
COP Y F I N I SH ED
Press the Power key for several seconds to

turn it off.
1-25
1.6 How To Enable the Color Scan Option
Only the Black-and-White Raster Scan option is enabled on the LP-1020-MF/LP-1020L-MF

Network Multi-Function Plotter by the factory default. To enable the Color Scan option, the
maintenance person must complete the following Color Scan option enabling procedure.
1.6.1 Procedure to enable the Color Scan option
1 Install the device by following the standard system installation procedure so that the device
can start up normally.
2 Turn OFF the device power supply.
3 Insert the Color Scan CF card into the device slot, and turn ON the device power supply.
4 After the device starts up, select the maintenance person mode by entering the correct
password, and enter the key cords, that are unique to each device, in the following SYSTEM
SETTING columns:
KEY CODE1
KEY CODE2
KEY CODE3
Carefully enter these three key codes as the total number of key codes 1 to 3 is 48 digits and an
input mistake may be made.
5 Correctly entering the key cords can exit the menu. Then the device will reboot automatically.
6 After the device reboots, print the menu and make sure that the Color Scan option is enabled.
If the Color Scan option is already enabled, the scanner firmware version is printed in the
CONFIGURATION field of the menu as follows:
Scanner version > 5.08_C
If the Color Scan option is enabled, letter “C” is added after the version number (5.08).
Scanner version > 5.08
If the Color Scan option is disabled, letter “C” is not added after the version number (5.08).
Note: Always check the enabled or disabled Color Scan option by using the
menu printing. You cannot check the enabled Color Scan option by simply
reading the scanner firmware version with the Web function.
1-26
1.6.2 Application notes on Color Scan CF card
The Color Scan CF card must be used as follows:

• Once the Color Scan CF card is installed , continue to use it without removing from the
device. Never install or remove the card when the device is being powered. If done, the card
or the device may fail.
• To avoid the failure, do not connect the Color Scan CF card to a PC or any other unit except
for this device.
• When you upgrade the firmware of this device using the CF card, first turn OFF the device
power supply. Remove the Color Scan CF card from the device. Then, mount the firmware
upgrading CF card, and upgrade the firmware of this device. After the firmware updating is
completed, turn OFF the device power supply again. Remove the firmware updating CF
card, and insert the Color Scan CF card instead. Then, reboot the device.
You need not enable the Color Scan option again after the firmware updating. However,
print the menu and make sure that the Color Scan option is enabled for confirmation.
1.6.3 If the Color Scan option fails to be enabled
The Color Scan option can be enabled under the following conditions:
• The RIP firmware version of this device is “01A” or later.
• The scanner firmware version of this device is “5.08” or later.
• A hard disk unit (HDD) has been installed, and it has already been formatted.
• The Color Scan option is already enabled. Also, the key codes have been entered correctly.•
The Color Scan CF card has been mounted on this device.
If the Color Scan option fails to be enabled, check the above points again.
Remember that the Color Scan option is not disabled (failed to use) even if any of the following
operations are repeated on the device where this option is already enabled.
• INITIAL SET (System)
• FACTORY SET (System)
• Formatting of hard disk unit (HDD) (Function)
• Formatting of NVRAM (Function)
• Firmware upgrading (by Web, CF card, or FTP)
1-27
1.6.4 Replacing the hard disk unit (HDD)
When replacing the hard disk unit (HDD) on this device, be sure to format the HDD (by selecting
the FORMAT HDD function in the maintenance person mode).
Note: If you do not format the hard disk unit after its replacement, the Color
Scan option may not be used.
1.6.5 Replacing the MRC2 board
When replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 board of this device, first remove the EEPROM module
from the MRC2 board. Then, replace the MRC2 board, and replace the EEPROM module of the
new MRC2 board with the one you have removed.
Note: If you skip this module replacement step and simply replace the MRC2
board, the Color Scan option cannot be used.
1-28
Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode
The engine maintenance mode is used in the periodic inspection or troubleshooting.
Chapter 2 describes the engine maintenance mode function and operation.
2-1
2.1 Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation
To troubleshoot the device, it is necessary to enter the engine maintenance mode. The engine
maintenance mode should be operated using the keys on the control panel while checking
screens displayed on the LCD. In the engine maintenance mode, only six keys, [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ENTER], and [CANCEL], are used. Other keys are not used.
2.1.1 Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode
To enter the engine maintenance mode, use the following procedures:
1 Turn on the device while holding down [ ] and[ ] keys on the operation panel. The screen
appears on the LCD as shown below.
ENG I NE F / W
( 1 . 10 ) 2007 - 09 - 20
Engine firmware version Engine firmware creation date (year/month/day)
On the second line, engine firmware version and engine firmware creation date (year/
month/day) are displayed.
2 When the following message appears after several seconds,
I NPUT P A S S WO R D
Press [ ] and [ ] keys in order and then press the [ENTER] key.
Hint: No matter whether keys are pressed in correct or incorrect order, the buzzer
will sound.
3 After correct keys are pressed, the screen changes as follows.
ENG I NE
MA I N T E N A NCE MO D E
Hint: When necessary keys are not pressed or keys are pressed in incorrect
order, the ENGINE MAINTENANCE MODE screen will not appear. In this
case, turn off the device once and retry the procedures from Step (1).
4 After several seconds, the "MAINTENANCE CODE 01" screen appears as shown below.
<01> O D OM E T E R
2-2
2.1.2 Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel
In the engine maintenance mode, toggle and select the desired numerical value or string, which is
sandwiched by angle brackets on the LCD, with keys on the control panel.
The device supports "select" and "set" modes for the display. When the numerical value is
marked by an underscore, the "set" mode is active.
(1) "Select" and "select and enter"
Selection refers to the operation where the angle-bracketed numerical value or string is changed
to/from another one with the [ ] or [ ] key. "Select and enter" refers to the operation where the
[ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the selection.
(2) "Set" and "set and enter"
Setup refers to the operation where the digit marked by the underscore in the angle brackets is
increased or decreased with the [ ] or [ ] key or the underscore is moved with the [ ] or [ ]
key. "Set and enter" refers to the operation where the [ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the
setting.
mm < 7 0 2 >
(3) Maintenance code and subcode
First, select and enter a maintenance code. Then, select or set a subcode.
1 Select the angle-bracketed maintenance code, mm using [ ] or [ ] keys.
< mm > "Maintenance code, mm, display."
2 After the [ENTER] key is pressed to select- enter the code, the angle-bracketed subcode, ss,
appears next to it. In this condition, check the contents and perform the maintenance.
mm < s s > "Maintenance code, mm, subcode, ss, display."
3 After the subcode is select and enter or set and enter, the maintenance code and subcode are
connected with a hyphen (-). In this condition, select the desired parameter and perform the
maintenance.
mm - s s
2-3
2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu
Table 2-1 shown below lists valid maintenance codes and maintenance and diagnostic menu
selections.
Table 2-1 Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List
Maintenance Refer
Display Function
code item
01 <01> ODOMETER Displays the total print distance. 2.3.1
Displays the print distance counted until the
replacement of a part, as well as allowable
02 <02> LIFE next print distance. 2.3.2
Clears the print distance counted until the
replacement of a part.
Displays the print distance counted until the
cleaning of a part, as well as allowable next
03 <03> CLEANING print distance. 2.3.3
Clears the print distance counted until the
cleaning of parts.
Displays the unrecoverable error
04 <04> ERROR LOG 2.3.4
information.
05 <05> JAM LOG Displays the paper jam error information. 2.3.5
Displays the status of sensors and switches.
06 <06> SENSOR Controls the buzzer sound so that you can 2.3.6
identify the change in status.
Displays the status of thermistors and
07 <07> THERMISTOR 2.3.7
halogen lamp.
Displays the status of motors, clutches, and
08 <08> ACTUATOR fans. 2.3.8
Runs these devices independently.
Executes complex operations to adjust the
voltage and current of the high-voltage
09 <09> TEST 2.3.9
power unit, and prints the paper to adjust the
nip pressure.
Selects any of 18 test patterns supported by
10 <10> PRINT 2.3.10
the engine and prints the selected pattern.
Executes the adjustment printout required as
a result of change in engine control
11 <11> REGULATE 2.3.11
parameters such as front edge and side
registrations.
Changes the engine control parameters in
12 <12> PARAMETER 2.3.12
RAM value.
Saves the engine control parameters RAM
13 <13> NVRAM value to NVRAM. 2.3.13
Initializes NVRAM.
Changes the RAM value of user-defined
14 <14> USER PARAMETER 2.3.14
parameters.
15 <15> ROLL WIDTH Changes the print width of the paper roll. 2.3.15
16 <16> PROCESS LOG Displays the process cartridge information. 2.3.16
2-4
2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter Operation the Maintenance Code
Display maintenance code 01 according to the procedures described in Section 2.1.1 "Entering
the Engine Maintenance Mode." Select the maintenance code using [ ] or [ ] key, and press
the [ENTER] key to select and enter the code.
"MAINTENANCE CODE
01 DISPLAY"
<01> O D OM E T E R
(To Section 2.3.1)
"MAINTENANCE CODE
02 DISPLAY"
<02> L I FE (To Section 2.3.2)
"MAINTENANCE CODE
15 DISPLAY"
<15> RO L L WI DTH
(To Section 2.3.15)
"MAINTENANCE CODE
16 DISPLAY"
<16> PROC E S S L OG
(To Section 2.3.16)
When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, you can return to
the MAINTENANCE CODE 01 screen without using the [ ] or [ ] key.
When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine firmware
version described in Section 2.3.1 1 is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key,
the maintenance code selection window reappears.
When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine board version
is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key, the maintenance code selection
window reappears.
2-5
2.3 Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus
Maintenance and diagnostic menus classified with maintenance codes are furthermore divided
into detailed subcoded categories. This section describes various operations based on
maintenance codes and subcodes.
2.3.1 Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance)
(1) Function
This code displays the total print distance (in meter) and total print count.
Metric display (Engine control parameter 862 is 0.)

Maintenance
Subcode Display Function
code
01<01> Total
01 Displays the total print distance.
12345 m
01<02> Roll-1
02 Displays the total print distance of roll 1.
10000 m
01<03> Roll-2
20000 m
01
01<04> Roll-3
300 m
01<05> Sheet
05 Displays the total print distance of manual feed.
45 m
01<06> Total Count
06 Displays the total print count.
5678
Feet display (Engine control parameter 862 is 1.)
Maintenance
code
01<01> Total
01 Displays the total print distance.
40502 ft
01<02> Roll-1
32808 ft
01<03> Roll-2
6562 ft
01
01<04> Roll-3
984 ft
01<05> Sheet
05 Displays the total print distance of manual feed.
148 ft
01<06> Total Count
06 Displays the total print count.
5678
Whenever one drawing is normally plotted, the total print distance and print count are increased.
If an error such as paper jam occurs or the process is terminated during the printout of drawing,
the total distance and count are not increased since the drawing is incomplete.
For about 400-mm (approx. 15.7 inch) long blank space that is fed while "DOOR OPEN CUT" or
"TOP EDGE CUT TIMER" is being enabled, the total print distance is increased but the total
print count maintains the current value.
2-6
In the total print count, the increment is 1 for manual feeding. For the paper roll, the increment is
determined by the length and width of the roll necessary to print one drawing, as shown in the
table below.
Length Count-up value

A3 width equivalent paper A1 width equivalent paper
roll roll
594 mm, 594 mm,
Up to Up to Up to 610 mm, 610 mm,
(mm) (inch) (lines) 620 mm, 620 mm,
700 mm, 700 mm,
707 mm, 707 mm,
22 inch, 24 inch 22 inch, 24 inch
460 18.1 10867 1 2
920 36.2 21733 2 3

1380 54.3 32599 3 4
1840 72.4 43465 4 6
2300 90.6 54332 5 8
2760 108.7 65198 6 9
3220 126.8 76064 7 10
3680 144.9 86930 8 12
4140 163.0 97797 9 13
4600 181.1 108663 10 15
5060 199.2 119529 11 18
5520 217.3 130395 13 19
5980 235.4 141261 14 21
6440 253.5 152128 15 22
6900 271.7 162994 16 24
7360 289.8 173860 17 25
7820 307.9 184726 18 27
8280 326.0 195593 19 28
8740 344.1 206459 20 30
9200 362.2 217325 21 31
9660 380.3 228191 22 33
10120 398.4 239058 24 36
A3 (297 mm×420 mm), 11 inch×17 inch, 12 inch×18 inch: 1 count-up

A1 (594 mm×841 mm), 22 inch×34 inch, 24 inch×36 inch: 3 count-up
2-7
Length Count-up value
A0-size-in-width equivalent
A2-size-in-width paper roll
equivalent paper roll 841 mm,
420 mm, 880 mm,
Up to Up to Up to
440 mm, 900 mm,
(mm) (inch) (lines)
450 mm, 910 mm,
500 mm, 914 mm,
17 inch, 18 inch 30 inch,
34 inch, 36 inch
320 12.6 7560 1 2
640 25.2 15119 2 3
960 37.8 22678 3 4
1280 50.4 30237 4 5
1600 63.0 37796 5 6
1920 75.6 45355 6 8
2240 88.2 52914 7 9
2560 100.8 60473 8 10
2880 113.4 68033 9 11
3200 126.0 75592 10 13
3520 138.6 83151 11 14
3840 151.2 90710 12 15
4160 163.8 98269 14 17
4480 176.4 105828 15 19
4800 189.0 113387 16 20
5120 201.6 120946 17 21
5440 214.2 128505 18 23
5760 226.8 136065 19 24
6080 239.4 143624 20 25
6400 252.0 151183 21 26
6720 264.6 158742 22 27
7040 277.2 166301 23 29
7360 289.8 173860 24 30
7680 302.4 181419 25 31
8000 315.0 188978 26 33
8320 327.6 196537 28 34
8640 340.2 204097 29 35
8960 352.8 211656 30 37
9280 365.4 219215 31 39
9600 378.0 226774 32 40
9920 390.6 234333 33 41
10240 403.2 241892 34 43
A2 (420 mm×594 mm), 17 inch×22 inch), 18 inch×24 inch: 2 count-up

A0 (841 mm×1189 mm), 34 inch×44 inch), 36 inch×48 inch: 5 count-up
2-8
(2) Operation for displaying the total print distance
1 If maintenance code 01 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and
Enter the Maintenance Code," the total print distance of the maintenance code 01, subcode
01 is displayed initially.
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 01" display comes back.
2.3.2 Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information)
<01> O D OM E T E R "MAINTENANCE CODE 01 DISPLAY"
01<01> To t a l
12345 m
01<02> Ro l l - 1
10000 m
01<03> Ro l l - 2
2000 m
01<04> Ro l l - 3
300 m
01< 0 5 > Shee t

45 m
01<06> To t a l Co un t
12345
2-9
(1) Function
As the part replacement information, the print distance after part replacement and the
replacement criteria are displayed.
Also, the print distance after part replacement can be cleared to "0" by selecting and entering a
subcode. However, for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0."
Note: The print distance must be cleared when a part was replaced.

Maintenance Replace
Subcode Display Replacement part name
code criteria
02<01> TH01, 02, 04
01 Thermistor 100 km
12345 m/ 100km
02<02> TC Wire
02 Charge wire (2) 20 km
12345 m/ 20km
02<03> DC Wire
03 Charge wire (3) 20 km
12345 m/ 20km
02<04> Ozone Filter
04 Ozone filter 50 km
12345 m/ 50km
02<05> Heat Roll
05 Finger (Fuser) Assy 100 km
12345 m/ 100km
02<06> Pressure Roll
06 Roller (Heat) 100 km
12345 m/ 100km
02<07> Mag. Blade
07 Roller (Backup) 100 km
12345 m/ 100km
02<08> -
02 08 Blade (DV) Assy 100 km
12345 m/ 100km
02<09> -
09 Spare No criteria
12345 m/ 0km
02<10> -
12345 m/ 0km
02<11> -
12345 m/ 0km
02<12> -
12345 m/ 0km
02<13> -
12345 m/ 0km
02<14> -
12345 m/ 0km
02<15> -
12345 m/ 0km
02<01> TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 Part name

1 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 Km
Print distance after part replacement Part replacement criterion
2-10

Maintenance Replace
Subcode Display Replacement part name
code criteria
02<01> TH01, 02, 04
01 Thermistor 328084 feet
40502 ft/ 328084ft
02<02> TC Wire
02 Charge wire (2) 65617 feet
40502 ft/ 65617ft
02<03> DC Wire
03 Charge wire (3) 65617 feet
40502 ft/ 65617ft
02<04> Ozone Filter
04 Ozone filter 164042 feet
40502 ft/ 164042ft
02<05> Heat Roll
05 Finger (Fuser) Assy 328084 feet
40502 ft/ 328084ft
06 Roller (Heat) 328084 feet
40502 ft/ 328084ft
02<07> Mag. Blade
07 Roller (Backup) 328084 feet
40502 ft/ 328084ft
02<08> -
02 08 Blade (DV) Assy 328084 feet
40502 ft/ 328084ft
02<09> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
02<10> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
02<11> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
02<12> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
02<13> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
02<14> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
02<15> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
0 2 < 0 1 > TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 Part name

4 0 5 0 2 f t / 32 8 0 8 4 f t
Print distance after part replacement Part replacement criterion
2-11
(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information
Enter the Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of maintenance code 02,
subcode 01 is displayed initially.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, "maintenance code 02" display comes back.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as
shown on the next page.
<02> L I FE "MAINTENANCE CODE 02 DISPLAY"
02<01> TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4 (To next page)

1 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 Km
02<02> TC Wi r e
12345 m/ 20 Km
02<14> -
12345 m/ 0 Km ( key is inactive
for spare parts)
02<15> -
12345 m/ 0 Km ( key is inactive
for spare parts)
2-12
(3) Operation for clearing part replacement information
The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part
was replaced, taking an example of subcode 01.
1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is
displayed if the replaced part is selected and entered.
2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part
replacement is cleared to "0."
3 The "maintenance code 02, subcode 01" display comes back, and the print distance "0" after
part replacement is displayed.
4 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 02,
subcode 01" display comes back without clearing the print distance.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 02, SUBCODE

02<01> TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
1 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 Km 01 DISPLAY"
(Return to previous page)

(Continued from previous page)
0 2 < 0 1 > TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
( C l e a r OK ? )
02<01> TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
0 m / 1 0 0 Km
Print distance after replacement becomes "0."
2-13
2.3.3 Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING" (part cleaning information)
(1) Function
As the part cleaning information, the print distance after part cleaning and the cleaning criteria
are displayed.
Also, the print distance after part cleaning can be cleared to "0" by selecting a subcode. However,
for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0."
Note: The print distance must be cleared when a part was cleaned.

Maintenance Location or part name to be Cleaning
Subcode Display
code cleaned criteria
03<01> TH01, 02, 04
01 Thermistor 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
03<02> TC Wire
02 Change wire (2) 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
03<03> DC Wire
03 Change wire (3) 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
03<04> SLA
04 SLA 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
03<05> Tracking Roll
05 Roller (1) 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
03<06> Heat Roll
06 Roller (Heat) 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
07 Roller (Backup) 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
03<08> Regist Roll
08 Roller (Height) 10 km
12345 m/ 10 km
03<09> Cutter Roll
09 Roller (Cutway) 10 km
12345 m/ 10 km
03<10> PF. Roll
03 10 Roller (Paper feed 1, 2) 10 km
12345 m/ 10 km
03<11> Spacer DV
11 Spacer (CV) 5 km
12345 m/ 5 km
03<12> Fuser Finger
12 Finger (Fuser) ASSY 10 km
12345 m/ 10 km
03<13> -
13 Spare No criterion
12345 m/ 0 km
03<14> -
12345 m/ 0 km
03<15> -
12345 m/ 0 km
03<16> -
12345 m/ 0 km
03<17> -
12345 m/ 0 km
03<18> -
12345 m/ 0 km
03<19> -
12345 m/ 0 km
03<02> TC W i r e Part name

1 2 3 4 5m / 5 Km
Print distance after part cleaning Part cleaning criterion
2-14

Maintenance Location or part name to be Cleaning
Subcode Display
code cleaned criteria
03<01> TH01, 02, 04
01 Thermistor 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
03<02> TC Wire
02 Change wire (2) 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
03<03> DC Wire
03 Change wire (3) 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
03<04> SLA
04 SLA 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
03<05> Tracking Roll
05 Roller (1) 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
03<06> Heat Roll
06 Roller (Heat) 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
07 Roller (Backup) 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
03<08> Regist Roll
08 Roller (Height) 32808 feet
40502 ft/ 32808ft
03<09> Cutter Roll
09 Roller (Cutway) 32808 feet
40502 ft/ 32808ft
03<10> PF. Roll
03 10 Roller (Paper feed 1, 2) 32808 feet
40502 ft/ 32808ft
03<11> Spacer DV
11 Spacer (CV) 16404 feet
40502 ft/ 16404ft
03<12> Fuser Finger
12 Finger (Fuser) ASSY 32808 feet
40502 ft/ 32808ft
03<13> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
03<14> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
03<15> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
03<16> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
03<17> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
03<18> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
03<19> -
40502 ft/ 0ft
0 3 < 0 2 > TC W i r e Part name

40502 f t / 16404 ft
Print distance after part cleaning Part cleaning criterion
2-15
(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information
Enter a Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of the maintenance code 03,
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 03" display comes back.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as
shown on the next page.
<03> C L E AN I NG "MAINTENANCE CODE 03 DISPLAY"
03<01> TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
(To next page)
12345 m/ 5 Km
03<02> TC Wi r e
12345 m/ 5 Km
03<18> - ( key is inactive

12345 m/ 0 Km
for spare parts)
03<19> - ( key is inactive

12345 m/ 0 Km
for spare parts)
2-16
(3) Operation for clearing part cleaning information
The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part
was cleaned, taking an example of subcode 02.
1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is
displayed if the cleaned part is selected and entered.
2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part
cleaning is cleared to "0." The "maintenance code 03, subcode 02" display comes back, and
the print distance "0" after part cleaning is displayed.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 03,
subcode 02" display comes back without clearing the print distance.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 03 SUB CODE 02

03<02> TC Wi r e DISPLAY"
12345 m/ 5 Km
(Continue of previous page)
03 - 02 TC Wi r e
( C l e a r OK ? )
03<02> TC Wi r e
0 m/ 5 Km
Print distance after part cleaning becomes "0."
2-17
2.3.4 Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)
(1) Function
This code displays up to ten latest unrecoverable errors.

Maintenance
code
04<01> [2032] R1N A2 Displays the information on the latest unrecoverable

01
03-06 (09:30) 12340 m error.
Displays the information on the second latest
02
unrecoverable error.
01
: : :
Displays the information on the tenth latest

04<10> [ ]
10 unrecoverable error. (If there is no error log, the
error code is left blank.)
An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and
total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows:
Error code
04<01> [ 2032 ] R1N A2 Information on paper used when error

03 - 06 (09 : 30 ) 1 2 3 4 0m occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width
equivalent to A2)
Date of error occurrence Total print distance
Month/day/hour/minute when error
(March 6, 9H30M) occurred
Note: Note: If engine control parameter 862 is 1, the total print distance is shown
in the foot system, rather than metric system, when the error occurred.
04<01> [ 2032 ] R1N A2

03 - 06 (09 : 30 ) 40486 f
2-18
Meaning of six-character "paper information"
1st and 2nd characters

Meaning
(Paper supply source)
R1 Roll 1
R2 Roll 2
SH Manual feed
Paper supply source is not identified.
3rd and 4th characters

Meaning
(Type of paper)
N Normal pape
T1 Tracing paper (tracing paper mode 1)
T2 Tracing paper (tracing paper mode 2)
F Film
Paper type is not identified.
5th and 6th characters

Meaning
(paper width)
A0 width equivalent roll paper (841 mm)
Roll paper having the following width:
A0
36 inch, 34 inch, 30 inch, 914 mm,
910 mm, 900 mm, and 880 mm
A1
24 inch, 22 inch, 707 mm, 770 mm,
620 mm, and 610 mm
A2
18 inch, 17 inch, 500 mm, 450 mm, and
440 mm
A3 Roll paper having the following width:
12 inch, 11 inch, 310 mm
Paper supply source is not identified.
2-19
(2) Operation for displaying unrecoverable error log
Enter a Maintenance Code," the unrecoverable error log of the maintenance code 04,
3 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 04" display comes back.
<04> E RROR L OG "MAINTENANCE CODE 04 DISPLAY"
04<01> [2032 ] R1N A2

03 - 06 (09 : 30 ) 1 2 3 4 0m
04<02> [ 2032 ] R1N A3

03 - 05 (18 : 32 ) 1 2 3 0 0m
04<09> [ ]
04<10> [ ]
2-20
(3) Unrecoverable error codes and description
Table 2-2 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes

Unrecoverable
Description
error codes
2020 BM01 (waster toner bottle vibrating motor) trouble
2021, 2022 HM01 (heat roller pulse motor) trouble
2023 PM01 (process motor) trouble
2024, 202A CM01 (developer pulse motor) trouble
2026, 202B TM01 (paper feed pulse motor) trouble
2027, 202C FM01 (paper feed pulse motor 1) trouble
2028, 202D FM02 (paper feed pulse motor 2) trouble
2029, 202E FM03 (paper feed pulse motor 3) trouble
2030 Power supply failure (50Hz/60Hz evaluation value is abnormal)
2032 High voltage power supply failure (overload occurred in high voltage output)
2033 Power supply failure (interrupt does not occur when the power turns off)
2035 LED head correction data transfer error (time out)
2036 LED head correction data transfer error (header error)
2037 LED head correction data transfer error (footer error)
2081 TH02 (over thermistor) detected overheat of fuser temperature
2082 TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure
Extremely high temperature (cables could be shorted)
2083 TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp
2084 After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH01 did not reach specified temp within specified time
2085 TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted) or
extremely low temp (cables could be disconnected)
2086 TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) exceeded the LED head upper limit temp
2087 TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted)
20C1-20C3 NVRAM checksum error (system parameter)
20C4 NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part replacement)
20C5 NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part cleaning)
20C6 NVRAM checksum error (user-defined engine parameter)
20C8 NVRAM checksum error (unrecoverable error log)
20C9 NVRAM checksum error (paper jam error log)
20CA NVRAM checksum error (process cartridge consumption log)
20D1-20D8 NVRAM checksum error (engine control parameter)
20E0 WDT (watchdog timer) overflow
2D01 NAK was transmitted to the controller 7 times but no command is returned
2D02 Response to the controller was made 7 times but ACK is not returned
2D03 In receiving data from controller, the line error was detected more than 100 times
2D04 Engine status transition was noticed to the controller 7 times but ACK is not returned
2F7C After F/W rewriting error occurred, the flash memory cannot be cleared (F/W cannot be restored)
2F7D After F/W rewriting error occurred, no data can be written to the flash memory (F/W cannot be restored)
2F7E After F/W rewriting error occurred, checksum of F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match (F/W cannot
be restored)
2F7F After F/W rewriting error occurred, F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match the contents of SRAM (F/W
cannot be restored)
2-21
2.3.5 Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log)
(1) Function
This code displays up to ten latest paper jam errors.

Maintenance
Subcode Display Feature
code
05<01> [3702] R1N A3

01 Displays the information on the latest paper jam error.
03-07 (10:58) 12345 m
05<01> [3702] R1N A3 Displays the information on the second latest paper jam
02
03-05 (18:25) 12300 m error.
05
: : :
Displays the information on the tenth latest paper jam

05<10> [ ]
10 error. (If there is no error log, the error code is left
blank.)
An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and
total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows:
Error code
05<01> [3702 ] R1N A3

03 - 07 (10 : 58 ) 1 2 3 4 5m Information on paper used when error
occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width
equivalent to A3)
Date of error occurrence Total print distance when error
Month day hour minute occurred
(March 7, 10H58M)
05<01> [3702 ] R1N A3

03 - 07 (10 : 58 ) 40486 f
The meaning of the six-character "paper information" is the same as that explained in Section
2.3.4 "MAINTENANCE CODE 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)."
2-22
(2) Operation for displaying paper jam error log
Enter a Maintenance Code," the latest paper jam error information of the maintenance
code 05, subcode 01 is displayed initially.
<05> J AM L OG "MAINTENANCE CODE 05 DISPLAY"
05<01> [ 3702 ] R1N A3

03 - 07 ( 10 : 58 ) 1 2 3 4 5m
05<02> [ 3701 ] R1N A3

03 - 05 (18 : 25 ) 1 2 3 0 0m
05<09> [3601 ] R2T1A1

0 2 -1 8 ( 1 5 : 0 3 ) 1 2 0 0 0m
05<10> [ ]
2-23
(3) Paper jam error codes and description
Table 2-3 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes

Doors to open for removing the paper
Paper jam
Description Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3
error codes Manual paper feed
paper feed
3330 Paper is located at PS30 (under cutter) position
Door 5 and then Door 1
3401, 3402 Arrival of paper top edge at PS04 is too early
3403, 3404 Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04
Door 1
When paper roll is rewound, arrival at PS04 is too
3491, 3492
early
When paper roll is rewound, paper exists in PS04
3493, 3494 Door 5 and then Door 1
after preset paper pass time elapsed
3500 Paper is located in PS04 (register) position Door 6
3501, 3502 Arrival of paper top edge at PS05 is too early Door 5
(Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4
3503, 3504 Paper top edge does not arrive at PS05 Door 5 and then Door 1
3591, 3592 Paper trail edge leaves PS05 too early
Paper trail edge does not leave PS05 after preset Door 6
3593, 3594
paper pass time elapsed
Door6
3600 Paper is located in PS04 (suction) position Door 6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9,
Door 4
3601, 3602 Arrival of paper top edge at PS06 is too earl Door6
Door 6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9,
3603, 3604 Paper top edge does not arrive at PS06 Door 4
3693, 3694
Door6
3700 Paper is located in PS07 (fuser) position Door 6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9,
Door 4
3701, 3702 Arrival of paper top edge at PS07 is too early Door6
Door 6 Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9,
3703, 3704 Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04 Door 4
3793, 3794
3042-3047 Trouble when cutter blade moves Door 5
Door1: Roll 1 (top) drawer PS21

Door2: Roll 2 (middle) drawer PS22
Door4: Manual feed drawer CNCT
Door5: Cutter door INT3
Door6: Top cover MS08, INT1
Door7: Fixation door MS06
Door8: Manual paper feeding holder MS07
Door9: Cutter door inside (No open-close detection senor)
Door10: Cutter door lower small door (No open-close detection senor)
Door 1 means either Door 1 or Door 2.

To open the Door 7, the Door 8 must be opened first.
To open the Door 9, the Door 5 must be opened first.
2-24
2.3.6 Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor)
(1) Function
This code displays the status of sensors and switches.

Maintenance
Subcode Display Function Status
code
Enables or disables the buzzer used to ON: Buzzer works.
00 06<00> Beep OFF
identify the status of relevant devices. OFF: Buzzer does not work.
06<01> PS30 Displays the status of the paper width
01
OFF judge sensor. (A0 width or more)
02
03
06<04> PS04 Displays the status of the paper ON: Paper exists.
04
OFF detection sensor (cutter lower). OFF: Paper does not exist.
06<05> PS05 Displays the status of the paper
05
OFF detection sensor (registration).
06
OFF detection sensor (suction).
07
OFF detection sensor (fixation).
06<08> PS11 Displays the status of the roll 1 flange
08 ON: Roll flanges exist.
ON detection sensor.
OFF: Roll flange does not
06<09> PS12 Displays the status of the roll 2 flange
09 exist.
ON detection sensor.
06<11> PS15 Displays the status of the manual feed ON: Paper exists.
11
OFF paper detection sensor. OFF: Paper does not exist.
06<12> PS21 Displays the status of the roll 1 drawer
12
ON open/close detection sensor. (Door 1)
06<13> PS22 Displays the status of the roll 2 drawer ON: Close
13
06 ON open/close detection sensor. (Door 2) OFF: Open
06<15> MS04 Displays the status of the toner door
15
ON open/close switch.
06<16> MS05 Displays the status of the waste toner ON: Bottle exists.
16
ON bottle detection switch. OFF: Bottle does not exist.
06<17> MS06 Displays the status of the fixation door
17
ON open/close switch. (Door 7)
06<18> MS07 Displays the status of the manual feed
18
ON holder open/close switch.
06<19> MS08 Displays the status of the upper door
19
ON (left side) open/close switch. (Door 6)
ON: Close
06<20> INT1 Displays the status of the upper door
20 OFF: Open
ON open/close interlock switch. (Door 6)
06<21> INT3 Displays the status of the cutter door
21
ON open/close interlock switch. (Door 5)
Displays the status of the manual feed
06<22> CNCT
22 drawer open/close connector. (Door
ON
4)
06<23> RE01 Displays the status of the cutter blade
23 ON: Cutter blade exists.
OFF detection (right edge) micro switch.
OFF: Cutter blade does not
06<24> RE02 Displays the status of the cutter blade
24 exist.
ON detection (left edge) micro switch.
06<25> TS01
25 Displays the status of the toner sensor.
ON ON: Toner exists.
06<26> TS02 Displays the status of the waste toner OFF: Toner does not exist.
26
OFF sensor
2-25
(2) Operation for displaying the sensor status
Enter the Maintenance Code," the buzzer set of the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 is
displayed initially.
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each sensor.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed during the setup of buzzer (subcode 00), you can enable or
disable the buzzer whose tone is changed according to the status of sensors and switches, as
described on the next page.
<06> S ENSOR "MAINTENANCE CODE 06 DISPLAY"
06<00> Beep OF F
To next page
06<01> PS3 0
ON
06<25> TS01
ON
06<26> TS02
OFF
2-26
(3) Operation for buzzer enable/disable setting
On the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 screen, you can enable or disable the buzzer whose tone
is changed according to the status of sensors and switches.
1 When subcode 00 is selected and entered, the parameter that shows the setting opposite to the
current valid setting is displayed.
2 Press [ENTER] key. The buzzer setting will change from ON to OFF and vice versa.
3 Press [CANCEL] key. The current setting is maintained.
"MAINE. CODE 06 SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"
06<00> Beep OFF

06 - 00 Beep OFF
<ON >
06<00> Beep ON
Setting changes from OFF to ON.
Hint: After ON is selected, the buzzer sounds in different tone depending on the
status of the sensors or switches selected from SUBCODE 01 through 26.
When the sensor is turned on, the long beep sound is generated. When the
sensor is turned off, the short beep sound is generated.
When the maintenance code 06 “SENSOR” display is closed, this “06”

mode is quitted.
2-27
2.3.7 Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor)
(1) Function
This code displays the status of thermistors and halogen lamp.
Hint: In Subcode 01, 03, and 04, an asterisk (*) shows the status of two halogen
lamps of the fixation device.
While the halogen lamp to heat the central area is being turned on, the
status is indicated with the 10th character. While the halogen lamp to heat
both side areas is being turned on, the status is indicated with the 6th
character.
Maintenance
Subcode Display Function Status
code
TH01: Displays the
07<01> TH01
01 temperature at the center of -
* 123 ˚ C
the fixation.
OVERHEAT:
TH02: Displays whether the
07<02> TH02 Overheat is detected.
02 overheated fixation is
NORMAL NORMAL:
07 detected.
Overheat is not detected.
07<03> TH02 TH03: Displays the
03 -
* * 32 ˚ C temperature of the LED head.
TH04: Displays the
07<04> TH04
04 temperature at the left end of -
* 100 ˚ C
the fixation.
Hint: The lower display limit of temperatures of TH1 and TH4 is 45°C. If there is
any disconnection, 45°C or 51°C is displayed.
2-28
(2) Operation for checking thermistor status
Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 07, subcode 01 is displayed initially.
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each thermistor for checking.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the [maintenance code 07] display comes back.
<07> T H E RM I S T OR "MAINTENANCE CODE 07 DISPLAY"
07<01> TH0 1
* 123 ºC
07<02> TH0 2
NORMA L
07<03> TH0 3
* * 32 º C
07<04> TH0 4
* 10 0 º C
2-29
2.3.8 Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator)
(1) Function
This code displays the status of the system equipment such as high-voltage power unit, motor,
and clutch, and specifies their operations.
Hint: When maintenance code 08 is active, errors such as a door open error are
not detected.
Maintenance Status or operation
code parameter
00 08<00> Actuator Turns off major actuators. OFF: OFF
08<01> CC Displays the status of the charge unit
01
OFF (CC) and specifies its operation.
08<02> DB Displays the status of the developer
02
OFF unit (DB) and specifies its operation.
08<03> TC Displays the status of the transcription ON: ON
03
OFF unit (TC) and specifies its operation. OFF: OFF
08<04> DC Displays the status of the separator
04
OFF (DC) and specifies its operation.
08<05> EL Displays the status of the dischange
05
OFF (EL) and specifies its operation.
08<06> PM01 Displays the status of the process ON: Rotated
06
OFF motor and specifies its operation. OFF: Stopped
08<07> HM01 Displays the status of the heat roller ON: Rotated
07
OFF pulse motor and specifies its operation. OFF: Stopped
ON1: Developing direction
Displays the status of the developer CW-ON
08<08> GM01
08 unit pulse motor and specifies its ON2: Toner stirring direction
OFF
operation. CW-ON
OFF: Stopped
Displays the status of the waste toner
08<09> BM01 ON: Rotated
09 bottle vibration monitor and specifies
OFF OFF: Stopped
its operation.
ON1: Paper feed direction
08 CCW-ON
08<10> TM01 Displays the status of the paper feed
10 ON2: Rewinding direction
OFF pulse motor and specifies its operation.
CW-ON
OFF: Stop
08<11> FM01 Displays the status of the paper feed 1
11
OFF and specifies its operation. ON1: Paper feed direction
CW-ON
08<12> FM02 Displays the status of the paper feed 2
12 ON2: Rewinding direction
OFF and specifies its operation.
CCW-ON
08<13> FM03 Displays the status of the paper feed 3 OFF: Stop
13
OFF and specifies its operation.
Displays the status of the registration
08<14> CL04
14 roller clutch and specifies its
OFF
operation. ON: Engaged
Displays the status of the paper feed OFF: Disengaged
08<15> CL06
15 roller clutch and specifies its
OFF
operation.
08<16> BL01 Displays the status of the suction fan
16
OFF and specifies its operation. ON1: Rotated fast
Displays the status of the fixation ON2: Rotated slowly
08<17> BL02
17 device top center fan and specifies its OFF: Stopped
OFF
operation.
08<18> BL03 Displays the status of the charge unit ON: Rotated
18
OFF fan and specifies its operation. OFF: Stopped
Displays the status of the fixation top ON1: Rotated fast
08<19> BL06
19 b o t h e d g e f a n a n d s p e c i f i e s i t s ON2: Rotated slowly
OFF
operation. OFF: Stopped
2-30
(2) Operation for checking the actuator status
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display current status of each actuator for checking.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation of the actuators can be
specified as shown in (3) or (4) on the following pages.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 08 DISPLAY"

<08> A C T UA T OR
08<00> Ac t ua t o r o f f (To next page )
08<01> CC (To page 2-33)

OF F
08<18> BL03 (To page 2-33)

OF F
08<19> BL06 (To page 2-33)

OF F
2-31
(3) Operation for turning off the actuators
With the maintenance code 08, subcode 00, main actuators can be turned off.
1 If subcode 00 is selected and entered, parameter <OFF> is displayed.
2 Press the [ENTER] key to execute the actuator OFF.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the actuator OFF is not executed.

"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"
08<00> Ac t ua t o r o f f

08 - 00 Ac t ua t o r o f f
<OF F >
Actuator OFF is
executed
08<00> Ac t ua t o r o f f
The actuators changed by the actuator off operation and the statuses immediately after actuator
off operation are as listed below:
Status immediately after
Actuator
"OFF" entry
CC Charger
DB Developer
TC Transcription OFF: OFF
DC Separator
EL Delectrification
PM01 Process motor
HM01 Heat roller pulse motor
GM01 Developer unit pulse motor
BM01 Waste toner bottle vibration motor
OFF: Stopped
TM01 Paper feed pulse motor
FM01 Paper feed pulse motor 1
CUTM Cutter motor OFF: Stopped
CL04 Registration roller clutch
OFF: Disengaged
CL06 Manual feed roller clutch
BL01 Suction fan OFF: Stopped
BL02 Fixation top center fan ON: Rotated
BL03 Charging unit fan OFF: Stopped
BL06 Fixation top both edge fan ON: Rotated
FL01 Fixation halogen lamp (center part)
OFF: Turned off
FL02 Fixation halogen lamp (both edge part)
2-32
(4) Operation for executing actuator operation
The following describes the operation for executing the actuator operation, taking an example of
subcode 01.
1 If the actuator to be operated is selected and entered, the "ON/OFF" parameter is

parenthesized.
2 If the "ON/OFF" parameter is selected and entered, the selected operation is executed. The
display returns to "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" and the "ON/OFF" status changes to
the specified one.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during selection of "ON/OFF" parameter, the "ON/OFF" is
not changed and the "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" display comes back.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 01DISPLAY"

0 8<01 > CC
OFF
(Continued from Page 2-31)

(Return to Page 2-31)
Select and enter "ON/OFF"
parameter
08 - 01 CC
< ON >
08<01> CC
ON
Setting changes from OFF to ON
Note: If the motor rotating direction is changed, select "OFF" once, and then
change the direction.
If "OFF" is selected for the pulse motor, it will stop after deceleration, but
during the deceleration, ON1 or ON2 is displayed.
2-33
2.3.9 Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test)
(1) Function
Performs the test functions below:
Maintenance
Subcode Display Function Refer item
code
Performs the operation to adjust the primary
01 09<01> CC Check
charge current.
Performs the operation to adjust the developer
02 09<02> DB Check
bias.
2.3.9 (3)
Performs the operation to adjust the transfer
03 09<03> TC Check
current.
Performs the operation to adjust the separator
04 09<04> DC Check
bias.
Performs the operation to turn on the lamp
05 09<05> LED-H on
in the LED head.
09 2.3.9 (4)
Performs the operation to blink the lamp in
06 09<06> LED-H blink
the LED head.
Performs the prints test pattern 5 (2 by 2
07 09<07> NIP 5 horizontal pattern) to adjust the fixation nip
pressure.
Performs the prints test pattern 17 (solid
08 09<08> NIP 17 2.3.9 (5)
black) to adjust the fixation nip pressure.
Performs the prints test pattern 20 (2 by 2
09 09<09> NIP 20 vertical pattern) to adjust the fixation nip
pressure.
2-34
(2) Operation for selecting the test item
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation as shown in (3), (4), or
(5) on the following pages can be executed.

<09> TEST
09<01> CC Che c k (To next page)
09<02> DB Che c k (To next page)
09<08> NI P 17 (To page 2-38)
09<09> NI P 20 (To page 2-38)
2-35
(3) Operation for executing operation to adjust the current voltage
This following describes the operation to adjust the current voltage operation taking an example
of subcode 01.
1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter the item. The device enters the test mode to adjust
the selected item. During the test, the machine displays the message showing the execution of
adjustment.
2 After the adjustment, press the [CANCEL] key. The operation stops and the maintenance
code 09, subcode01 display comes back.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is not pressed for 3 minutes after the adjustment, the maintenance
code 09, subcode 01display comes back.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUBCODE

01 DISPLAY"
09<01> CC Ch e c k

09 - 01 CC C h e c k Under testing
( Execu t i on )
When the key is not pressed for 3
minutes, the test run stops.
09 - 01 CC Ch e c k
( S t op )
Several seconds later
09 - 01 CC C h e c k
( End )
2-36
(4) Operation for executing turning on or blinking in the LED head
Subcodes 05 and 06 allow you to respectively turn on and blink the LED head.
The procedures with subcode 06 are shown below:
1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter, the LED head starts blinking and the message
informing the current status appears on the screen.
2 When 10 seconds passed or the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the LED head stops blinking and
the maintenance code 09, subcode 07 display comes back.

06 DISPLAY"
09<06> L ED - H b l i nk
(Return to page 2-33)

(Continued from page 2-33)
09 - 06 L ED - H b l i n k LED head is
( Execu t i on ) blinking.
When the key is not pressed for 10
seconds, the LED head stops blinking.
09 - 06 L ED - H b l i nk
( S t op )
09 - 06 L ED - H bl i nk
( End )
Note: Whether the LED head is lighting or blinking may not be identified
depending on the surrounding environment.
2-37
(5) Operation for executing the nip pressure adjustment print
Subcodes 07,08, and 09 allow you to print test patterns necessary to adjust the nip pressure of the
fixation. Subcode 07 outputs test pattern 5 (2 by 2 horizontal pattern) while Subcode 08 is
outputting test pattern 17(solid black). The procedures in case of SUBCODE 07 are shown
below:
1 Select the "Paper" parameter.

2 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of paper, the maintenance 09,
subcode 10 display come back.
3 Select the paper and press the [ENTER] key, and printout starts.
4 After part of the paper comes out from the fixation, the machine stops unfeeding for about 10
seconds and then the paper is output completely.
5 When the printout is normally finished, the message informing the completion of process
appears and the maintenance 09, subcode 07 display comes back.
6 If an error occurs during the process, the error message appears.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUB CODE 07

09<07> N I P 5 DISPLAY"
(Return to page 2-35) (Continued from page 2-35)
09 - 07 N I P 5
< SH>
09 - 07 NI P 5
<R1>
Test pattern 7 is being 09 - 07 N I P 5

printed
( P r i n t i ng )
09 - 07 N I P 5
( P r i n t End )
Normal
termination
Select and confirm the "Paper" parameter from the table shown below.
Display Description
<SH> Manual feed
<R1> Roll 1
<R2> Roll 2
<R3> Roll 3
2-38
2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print)
(1) Function
This code prints engine test patterns.
This code allows you to select and enter the test pattern connected to the subcode, determine the
parameters such as print length, and execute printout.
Maintenance
Subcode Display Function (test pattern to be printed)
code
01 10<01> Print 1 Pattern 1: Thick vertical stripes
02 10<02> Print 2 Pattern 2: Checker
03 10<03> Print 3 Pattern 3: Thick horizontal stripes
04 10<04> Print 4 Pattern 4: 1 by 3 horizontal
05 10<05> Print 5 Pattern 5: 2 by 2 horizontal
06 10<06> Print 6 Pattern 6: 2 by 14 vertical
07 10<07> Print 7 Pattern 7: 1- dot line, 64- dot square mesh
08 10<08> Print 8 Pattern 8: 1-dot mesh

10
11 10<11> Print 11 Pattern 11: 2 by 2 horizontal, 2-dot shift
12 10<12> Print 12 Pattern 12: (square mesh + black + white)
13 10<13> Print 13 Pattern 13: (square mesh + scale)
14 10<14> Print 14 Pattern 14: (square mesh + 1-dot slant line)
15 10<15> Print 15 Pattern 15: (square mesh + 2-dot slant line)
16 10<16> Print 16 Pattern 16: (square mesh + 1-dot slant line + 2-dot slant line)
17 10<17> Print 17 Pattern 17: Solid black
18 10<18> Print 18 Pattern 18: Solid white
2-39
(2) Operation for selecting the test pattern
1 If the maintenance code 10 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select
and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 10, subcode 01 is displayed
initially.
2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or test pattern.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the desired test pattern is selected and entered, the test pattern
can be printed as described on the next page.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 10 DIAPLAY"

<10> PR I NT
10<01> P r i n t 1 (To next page)
2-40
(3) Operation for executing the print
The following describes the operation for selecting a test pattern and then executing the print,
taking an example of subcode 14.
1 Select the "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.

2 Select the "Print Length" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
3 Set the "Print Count" parameter.
4 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter selection, the "maintenance code 10,
subcode 14" display comes back.
5 Press the [ENTER] key to enter the parameters, and the print will start.
6 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during printing of multiple sheets, the print terminates and
the initial screen comes back.
7 When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial
screen comes back.
8 If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 10, SUBCODE 14 DISPLAY"

10<14> Pr i n t 14
(Return to previous page) (Continued from previous

page)
10 - 14 P r i n t 14
Select "Paper" parameter
<R1N> 2 1 0 mm 1
10 - 14 Pr i n t 14 Select "Print Length"

R2N < 1 6 8 2 mm > 1 parameter
10 - 14 P r i n t 14 Set "Print Count"

R2N 1 6 8 2 mm < 2> parameter
10 - 14 P r i n t 14
During printing
( P r i n t i ng ) (Terminated
in midway)
10 - 14 P r i n t 14 Normal
( P r i n t End ) termination of print
2-41
Select the "Paper" parameter from the table below.
Display Description
<SH > Manual feed
<R1N> Roll 1, normal paper
<R1T> Roll 1, tracing paper
<R1F> Roll 1, film
<R2F> Roll 2, film
<R3F> Roll 3, film
Select the "Print Length" parameter from the table below.
Display Description
< 210 mm> 210 mm (4961 lines)
< 297 mm> 297 mm (7016 lines)
< 420 mm> 420 mm (9921 lines)
< 594 mm> 594 mm (14032 lines)
< 841 mm> 841 mm (19866 lines)
< 1189 mm> 1189 mm (28087 lines)
< 1682 mm> 1682 mm = 841 × 2 (39733 lines)
< 2378 mm> 2378 mm = 1189 × 2 (56174 lines)
< 2523 mm> 2523 mm = 841 × 3 (59599 lines)
< 3000 mm> 3000 mm (70867 lines)
< 4000 mm> 4000 mm (94489 lines)
< 5000 mm> 5000 mm (118111 lines)
< 6000 mm> 6000 mm (141733 lines)
< 7000 mm> 7000 mm (165356 lines)
< 8000 mm> 8000 mm (188978 lines)
< 9000 mm> 9000 mm (212600 lines)
<10000 mm> 10000 mm (236222 lines)
< 8.5"> 8.5 inch = 215.9 mm (5100 lines)
< 9" > 9 inch = 228.6 mm (5400 lines)
< 11" > 11 inch = 279.4 mm (6600 lines)
< 12" > 12 inch = 304.8 mm (7200 lines)
< 17" > 17 inch = 431.8 mm (10200 lines)
< 18" > 18 inch = 457.2 mm (10800 lines)
< 22" > 22 inch = 558.8 mm (13200 lines)
< 24" > 24 inch = 609.6 mm (14400 lines)
< 30" > 30 inch = 762.0 mm (18000 lines)
< 34" > 34 inch = 863.6 mm (20400 lines)
< 36" > 36 inch = 914.4 mm (21600 lines)
< 42" > 42 inch = 1066.8 mm (25200 lines)
< 44" > 44 inch = 1117.6 mm (26400 lines)
< 48" > 48 inch = 1219.2 mm (28800 lines)
2-42
Enter the "Print Sheets" parameter from the table below.
Display Description
< 1> Prints one test pattern.
< 2> Prints two test patterns continuously.
: :
<99> Prints 99 test patterns continuously.
2-43
2.3.11 Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment)
(1) Function
Performs the following adjustments.
Maintenance
Subcode Display Function Refer to
code
Executes printing for adjustment
01 11<01> Front Regist 2.3.11(3)
of top edge registration.
02 11<02> CenterRegist 2.3.11(4)
of center registration.
11
03 11<03> Print Length 2.3.11(5)
of print length.
04 11<04> Cut Length 2.3.11(3)
of cut length.
After the "Paper" parameter is selected and entered in each adjustment, NVRAM and RAM
values of the engine control parameter are displayed as shown below:
11 - 01 F r on t Reg i s t
<A - N1> 220 : 220
"Adjustment" parameter
PAPER parameter Engine control Engine control parameter
parameter of of NVRAM value
NVRAM value
For the number and description of the engine control parameter to be changed, see Section
2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Engine Control Parameter). For Save
method of parameter, see Section 2.3.12 (3) "Changing the parameter value in RAM." For
Save method of adjusted parameter, see Section "2.2.13 (3) Operation for saving the
parameter."
2-44
(2) Operation for selecting adjustment item
Enter the Maintenance Code," the adjustment function of the maintenance code 11,
2 Select a subcode (adjustment function) using [ ] or [ ] key.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the select adjustment item, the print for adjustment can
be executed as shown on the following page.
<11> REGU L A T E "MAINTENANCE CODE 11 DISPLAY"
11<01> F r on t Re g i s t (To next page)
11<02> Ce n t e r Reg i s t (To page 2-49)
11<03> P r i n t Leng t h (To page 2-51)
11<04> Cu t Leng t h (To next page)
2-45
(3) Operation for executing the print to adjust top register or cut length
The operating method of subcode 01 (top register adjustment) and subcode 04 (cut length
adjustment) is the same.
The following describes the operation for executing the print for adjustment, taking an example
of subcode 01 (top register adjustment).
1 Select "paper (length, type, width)" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
2 Set the "adjustment" parameter.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter setting, the "maintenance code 11, subcode
01" display comes back.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed during parameter setting, three-sheet (one-sheet in the case of
manual feed) print starts.
screen comes back.
6 If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 01

11<01> Fr on t Reg i s t DISPLAYED"
(Continued of previous
page)
Select and enter the
<A - N1> 220 : 220
"Paper (Length, Type,
Width)" parameter
A - N1 220 : < 220>
I= I= I=
11 - 01 F r on t Reg i s t Select and enter the

A - N1 220 : < 221> "Adjust" parameter
During printing. 11 - 01 F r on t Re g i s t
in midway)
( P r i n t End ) Normal termination of
print.
2-46
Select the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter from the table below:
Display Description
<X-N0> Prints three sheets of 2523 mm long (print X) A0 width paper roll and normal paper.
<X-T0> Prints three sheets of 2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
<X-F0> Prints three sheets of 2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll film.
<A-N0> Prints three sheets of 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.
<A-T0> Prints three sheets of 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
<A-F0> Prints three sheets of 841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll film.
<B-N0> Prints three sheets of 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.
<B-T0> Prints three sheets of 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
<B-F0> Prints three sheets of 297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll film.
<C-N0> Prints three sheets of 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.
<C-T0> Prints three sheets of 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
<C-F0> Prints three sheets of 210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll film.
< SH > Manual feed
2-47
Length table
mm line inch
2523 (Print X) 59599 99.33
841 (Print A) 19866 33.11
297 (Print B) 7016 11.69
210 (Print C) 4961 8.27
(600 lines=1inch)
For Subcode 04 (adjustment of cut length), the manual loading, <SH>, cannot be selected.
The roll 1 paper feed takes precedence over all others, except for manual feed <SH>. That is:
When the paper is loaded to the roll 1 drawer, this drawer should be used.
When the paper is not loaded to the roll 1 drawer but the paper is loaded to the roll 2 drawer, the
roll 2 drawer should be used.
Note: Be sure to load the paper whose type and width agree with those selected
with the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter.
Print the pattern 13 (mesh + scale).
Hint: For description of the ADJUST parameter, see Section 2.3.12 Engine
Control Parameter. For "Save method of parameter," "see Section 2.3.13
(3) Operation for saving the parameter."
2-48
(4) Operation for executing the print to center register adjustment
The operating method of subcode 02 (center register adjustment).
1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
screen comes back.
11<02> Cen t e r Reg i s t "MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 02 DISPLAY"
(Continued from page 2-43)
(Return to page 2-43)
11 - 02 Cen t e r Reg i s t
<R1> 50 : 50
"Paper" parameter
11 - 02 Cen t e r Reg i s t
R1 50 : < 50>
, , ,
11 - 02 Cen t e r Re g i s t Select and enter the

R1 50 : < 49> "Adjust" parameter
During
11 - 02 Ce n t e r Reg i s t
printing.
in midway)
11 - 02 Cen t e r Re g i s t
( P r i n t End ) Normal termination
of print.
2-49
Select the PAPER parameter from the list shown below:
Display Description
< R1 > Roll 1.
< R2 > Roll 2.
< R3 > Roll 3.
< SH > Manual feed
Print the pattern 13 (mesh + scale) sheet in normal 420 mm long (9921 lines, 16.54 inches) paper.
Hint: For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see Section 2.3.12 Engine
Control Parameter. For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13
2-50
(5) Operation for executing the print to plotting length adjustment
The operating method of subcode 03 (plotting length adjustment).
1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
screen comes back.

11<03> Pr i n t Leng t h DISPLAY"
(Continue of page 2-43)
(Return to page 2-43 )
11 - 03 P r i n t Leng t h
<Ro - X> 1923 : 1923
"Paper" parameter
Ro - X 1923 : <1923>
I= I= I=
11 - 03 P r i n t Leng t h Select and enter the

Ro - X 1923 : <1924> "Adjust" parameter
During 11 - 03 P r i n t Leng t h
printing. ( P r i n t i ng ) (Terminated
in midway)
( P r i n t End ) Normal termination
of print.
2-51
Select and enter the “Paper” parameter from the table below:
Display Description
<RT-C> 210 mm/8.27 in. long (print C) roll paper (tracing paper).
<RF-C> 210 mm/8.27 in. long (print C) roll paper (tracing paper).
<Ro-X> 2523 mm/99.33 in. long (print X) roll paper.
<Ro-A> 841 mm/33.11 in. long (print A) roll paper.
<Ro-B> 297 mm/11.69 in. long (print B) roll paper.
<Ro-C> 210 mm/8.27 in. long (print C) roll paper (plain paper).
< SH > Manual feed
The roll 1 paper feed takes precedence over all others, except for manual feed <SH>. That is:
When the paper is loaded to the roll 1 drawer, this drawer should be used.
When the paper is not loaded to the roll 1 drawer but the paper is loaded to the roll 2 drawer, the
roll 2 drawer should be used.
The normal paper is used and three sheets of test pattern 13 (mesh + scale) are printed.
Hint: For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see "Section 2.3.12 Engine
control parameter." For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13
2-52
2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter)
(1) Function
This code changes RAM values of engine control parameters.
Maintenance
code
12<101> 200 Changes the RAM value of engine control
101
200 parameter 101.
102
50 parameter 102.
12 : : :

863 0 parameter 863.
12<864> (If non operable number is specified, no value is

-
displayed.)
RAM and NVRAM values of the engine control parameter are displayed on second and first
lines, respectively.
12 - 601 430 RAM value of engine

< 4 3 0> control parameter 601
NVRAM value of engine

Subcode
control parameter 601
(engine control parameter number)
Immediately after the device is turned on, the engine control parameter is copied from NVRAM
to RAM. Therefore, if the value saved in RAM has not been changed after powering on, the same
value appears on both first and second lines.
Numbers for the operable engine parameters are as follows:

101 to 156, 201 to 263, 301 to 363, 401 to 463, 501 to 563, 601 to 663, 701 to 763, and 801 to 863
Parameters with any other numbers are not operable.
Note that values for numbers 157 to 163 are indefinite.
Note: Even when the specified parameter is operable, it must not be changed
unreasonably provided that it is not listed in the engine control parameter
lists described on next pages.
Hint: For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for
saving parameter."
2-53
The print length of the paper roll determines the print category as table below. (The length of the
boundary may be changed.)
Print category Print length Typical length

28801 lines (approx. 1219 mm, approx. 48.002 inches)
Print X 1682, 2378, 2523 mm etc.
or more
9874 lines (approx. 418 mm, approx. 16.457 inches) to 420, 594, 841, 1189, mm
Print A
28800 lines 17, 18, 24, 36, 48 inches
6614 lines (approx. 280 mm, approx. 11.023 inches) to 297 mm
Print B
9873 lines 12 inches
4961 lines (approx. 210 mm, approx. 8.268 inches) to 210 mm
Print C
6613 lines 9, 11 inches
When incrementing the top edge registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is
shifted toward the direction opposite to the paper feed direction.
When incrementing the center registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shifted
to the left.
When incrementing the plotting length adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shortened
in the papear feed direction.
When incrementing the cut length adjustment value, the cut length of the paper roll is shortened.
2-54
Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List (1/6)
Engine control parameter Standard Input Unit of

No. Description value range input
501 A0 width Top edge 6
502 paper roll End edge 6
Nromal
503 paper A1/A2/A3 Top edge 5
width
Print X paper roll
506 End edge 3
(28801 Tracing
507 lines or paper A1/A2/A3 Top edge 1
more) width
Film A1/A2/A3
511 Top edge 6
width
513 More than Top edge 5 Top:

bifurcation 0 to 60
514 lines End edge 4
Increased
A0 width
515 Bifurcation lines 15000
Top edge paper roll
Less than End:
516 increase Top edge 6
bifurcation 0 to 60
and end
517 lines End edge 2 Reduced 1Hz
edge
518 reduction More than Top edge 5 Bifurcation
correction bifurcation lines:
9874 to
A1 width 28800
paper roll lines
521 Less than Top edge 1
Print A bifurcation
522 (9874 to Normal lines End edge 1
523 28800 paper More than Top edge 4

lines) bifurcation
A2 width
paper roll
bifurcation
528 More than Top edge 5

bifurcation
A3 width
paper roll
bifurcation
2-55
Engine control parameter Standard Input Unit of

No. Description value range input

bifurcation
A0 width
paper roll
bifurcation

bifurcation
539 Tracing End edge 3
lines
paper A1 width
paper roll
bifurcation
542 lines End edge 2 Top:
543 Top edge 1 0 to 60
A2 width
Increased
Top edge
545 A3 width Top edge 3 End:
increase Print A
546 paper roll End edge 3 0 to 60
and end (9874 to
Reduced 1Hz
547 edge 28800 More than Top edge 7
reduction lines) bifurcation Bifurcation
548 correction lines End edge 5
lines:
A0 width
549 Bifurcation lines 15000 9874 to
paper roll
Less than 28800
550 Top edge 8
bifurcation lines

bifurcation
553 Film lines End edge 1
A1 width
paper roll
bifurcation
0: invalid
563 Top edge increase and end edge reduction correction 1 0.1
1: valid
2-56
Engine control parameter PAPER Standard

Input range Unit of input
No. Description parameter value
601 Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll X-N0 430

602 normal paper, A1 width paper roll X-N1 430
605 tracing paper, A0 width paper roll X-T0 430
609 film, A0 width paper roll X-F0 430
613 Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll A-N0 430
614 normal paper, A1 width paper roll A-N1 430
617 tracing paper, A0 width paper roll A-T0 430
621 film, A0 width paper roll A-F0 430
622 film, A1 width paper roll A-F1 430 1 msec
623 film, A2 width paper roll A-F2 430 Standard value:
(equivalent to 0.8
624 Top edge film, A3 width paper roll A-F3 430 ± 100
mm)
registration
625 Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll B-N0 400 Reference:
adjustment
626 normal paper, A1 width paper roll B-N1 400 1 mm=12.5
value (300-500)
627 normal paper, A2 width paper roll B-N2 400 4 mm=50
To front To rear
628 normal paper, A3 width paper roll B-N3 400 8 mm=100
629 tracing paper, A0 width paper roll B-T0 400
633 film, A0 width paper roll B-F0 400
637 Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll C-N0 400
638 normal paper, A1 width paper roll C-N1 400
641 tracing paper, A0 width paper roll C-T0 400
645 film, A0 width paper roll C-F0 400
649 Manual feed paper SH 430
0: Strike bottle
Waste toner bottle
658 - 0 0, 1 1: Does not strike
(Set 1 when the large capacity waste toner bottle is installed.)
bottle
0: Old type
659 Type of process cartridge - 2 0, 2 2: New type
(Type 2)
0: No
661 NVRAM saving when the power is on - 0 0, 1
1: Yes
0: Does not warn.
662 Process cartridge consumption over warning - 0 0, 1
1: Warns.
1 line
663 Front clip amount - 71 0-255 Reference
3 mm=71
2-57

701 Roll 1 R1 50 8 dots

(equivalent to
0.338666 mm)
702 Roll 2 R2 50
Center registration adjustment 0-100 (equivalent to
value To light To left 0.01233
703 Roll 3 R3 50
inches)
[Reference]
704 Manual feed paper R4 50 1 mm=2.95
708 Head A turn-on delay time Head A (right side) 16

0-65 8 µsec
709 Head C turn-on delay time Head C (left side) 16
710 Line memory write start bank 94 Fixed to 94
711 Head A (right side) 90 87-93
Line memory
712 Head B (center) 0 Fixed to 0
read start bank
713 Head C (left side) 90 87-93
Paper roll (tracing paper),

718 RT-C 1895
print C
719 Paper roll (film), print C RF-C 1895
720 Paper roll, print X Ro-X 1915
Plotting length accuracy 1910 to 1936
721 Paper roll, print A Ro-A 1915
adjustment value Increased Reduced 1 Hz
722 Paper roll, print B Ro-B 1909
Paper roll (plain paper),
723 Ro-C 1985
print C
724 Manual feed paper SH 1915
728 Time conversion value of line quantity [line/sec] 1915 1910-1936 1 line
731 Head A (right side) 29

732 Strobe width Head B (center) 29 15-39
733 Head C (left side) 29
0.0833 µsec
735 Strobe width step Head B (center) 5 2-8
Strobe width step 2 1-6
738 Head B (center) 2 0.0833 µsec
(fine adjustment per drawing)
2-58
Table 2-4 List of Engine Control Parameters (5/6)
Engine control parameter Roll paper Standard Unit of input

Input range
No. Description parameter value value 1
Print X A0 width
740 5940
Tracing paper equivalent roll paper
A1 width
741 5930
equivalent roll paper
A2 width
742 5920
A3 width
743 5910
Print X A0 width
744 5940
Normal paper equivalent roll paper
A1 width
745 5930
A2 width
746 5920
A3 width
747 5910
Print A, B, C A0 width
748 5940
Normal paper equivalent roll paper
A1 width
749 5930 Standard value Changing 10
Heat roller speed equivalent roll paper
+/-50 increments or
adjustment value A2 width - - Faster decrements the
750 5920
equivalent roll paper + Slower speed by 0.14
A3 width mm/sec
751 5910
Print A, B, C A0 width
752 5900
Tracing paper equivalent roll paper
A1 width
753 5890
A2 width
754 5880
A3 width
755 5870
Print X, A, B, C A0 width
756 5940
Film equivalent roll paper
A1 width
757 5930
A2 width
758 5920
A3 width
759 5910
760 Manual feed paper 5930
Heat roller intermittent rotation
Mode 0: "59 seconds stop and 1 second rotatation" are repeated.
Mode 3: For 3 minutes alone immediately after printing 0: Mode 0
762 - 0 0, 3
"10 seconds stop and 10 seconds rotation" are repeated and after 3: Mode 3
that "5959 seconds stop and 1 second rotation" are repeated.
2-59

801 Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll X-N0 300

811 film ,A2 width paper roll X-F2 300
813 Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll A-N0 300
818 tracing paper, A1 width paper roll A-T1 300 1 line
819 tracing paper, A2 width paper roll A-T2 300 (equivalent to
820 tracing paper, A3 width paper roll A-T3 300 0.042333 mm)
821 film, A0 width paper roll A-F0 300 (equivalent to
822 film, A1 width paper roll A-F1 300 0.001667
823 film ,A2 width paper roll A-F2 300 Standard value inches)
824 Cut length film, A3 width paper roll A-F3 300 ± 200 Reference:
adjustment
825 Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll B-N0 300 (100 to 500) 1 mm=23.62
value
826 normal paper, A1 width paper roll B-N1 300 longer shorter 4.23 mm=100
827 normal paper, A2 width paper roll B-N2 300 8.47 mm=200
828 normal paper, A3 width paper roll B-N3 300 0.1667
829 tracing paper, A0 width paper roll B-T0 300 inches=100
830 tracing paper, A1 width paper roll B-T1 300 0.5 inches=300
831 tracing paper, A2 width paper roll B-T2 300 1.0 inches=600
835 film ,A2 width paper roll B-F2 300
837 Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll C-N0 300
847 film ,A2 width paper roll C-F2 300
1 line
Rear edge margin for print X
Reference
850 (When the margin is ensured, the cut length of the paper - 0 0-4500
120 mm=2835
roll will be increased by that margin.)
4.725 inches
0: Without
861 How to stop the slitter cutter motor - 1 0, 1 brake
1: With brake
0: [m] Display
in meter
862 Switching between the display in meter and feet - 0 0, 1
1: [ft] Display
in feet
2-60
(2) Operation for selecting the parameter number
2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or engine control parameter number.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to set and entered the parameter, the RAM value of the
specified engine control parameter can be changed.
5 If non operable parameter number is specified, the [ENTER] key is inactive.
<12> P ARAME T ER "MAINTENANCE CODE 12 DISPLAY"
12<601> 430 (To next page)

430
12<602> 430 (To next page)

430
, , ,
12<864>
The ENTER
key is
inactive.
12<865>
The ENTER
key is
inactive.
2-61
(3) Operation for changing the parameter of the RAM value
Indicate the change operation engine control parameter of the RAM value.
In the example shown below, you should change the RAM value of parameter number 602 from
430 to 420.
1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the RAM value on the second line is marked
with angle brackets.
2 Press the [ ] key to move the underscore to the left (digit).
3 Press the [ ] key to reduce "3" marked with the underscore to "2."
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed (set and entered), the RAM value is changed and the
maintenance code12, subcode 602 display come back.
5 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing
the RAM value.

602 DISPLAYED"
12<602> 4 30
4 30

(Return to previous page )
12 - 602 430
< 4 3 0>
(Move the underscore to the

adjacent left digit)
12 - 602 430
< 4 3 0>
(Reduce "3" to "2")
12 - 602 430
< 4 2 0>
12<602> 4 30
4 20
Change the RAM value (NVRAM value is not

changed)
For the save method of parameter used to make the NVRAM value identical to the RAM value,
see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."
2-62
2.3.13 Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM)
(1) Function
Operates the NVRAM value of engine control parameter.
Maintenance
Subcode Display Function Refer item
code
13<01> RAM——>NVRAM Saves RAM values of engine 2.3.13

01
Save Parameter control parameters to NVRAM. (3)
13
13<02> ROM——>NNVRAM Initializes RAM values of engine 2.3.13
02
Parameter Initialize control parameters (4)
(2) Operation for selecting the NVRAM operation
2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to set and enter the operation for NVRAM, you can
execute the operation.

<13> N VRAM
1 3 < 0 1 > R A M ⎯> N V R A M (To next page)

S a v e P a r ame t e r
13<02> R O M ⎯ > NV R A M (To page 2.65)

P a r ame t e r I n i t i a l i z e
2-63
(3) Operation for saving the parameter
This following describes operation to save the RAM value of an engine control parameter to
NVRAM after it is changed with maintenance code 11 or 12. The value saved to NVRAM will be
loaded to RAM when the device is turned on.
1 Select and enter subcode 01, the confirmation message appears to ask if you really want to
save the engine control parameter.
2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed in response to the message, the RAM value of the engine
control parameter is saved to NVRAM.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the RAM value is not saved to NVRAM.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 13 SUBCODE 01 DISPLAY"

1 3 < 0 1 > R A M ⎯> N V R A M
S a v e P a r ame t e r
(Return to previous page) (Continued from previous page)
13<01> R A M ⎯> N V R A M
( S a v e OK ? )
1 3 < 0 1 > R A M ⎯> N V R A M

( S a v e En d )
The display appears
2 to 3 seconds after The RAM value is saved to NVRAM
2-64
(4) Operation for initializing the NAVRAM
This following describes operation to reset the NVRAM value of the engine control parameter to
the default (ROM value).
1 Select and enter subcode 02, the confirmation message appears.
2 When the ENTER key is pressed in response to the message, the NVRAM value of the engine
control parameter is reset to the ROM value.
3 When the CANCEL key is pressed, the NVRAM value is not reset.

DISPLAY"
1 3 < 0 2 > R O M ⎯> N V R A M
P a r ame t e r I n i t i a l i z e
(Return to page 2-63) (Continued from page 2-63)
13 - 02 R OM ⎯> N V R A M
( I n i t i a l i z e OK ? )
1 3 < 0 2 > R OM ⎯> N V R A M

( I n i t i a l i ze End )
The display appears
2 to 3 seconds after The NVRAM value is reset to the default (ROM value)
Since defaults are optimal to each engine firmware version, some of them may differ from the
standard values shown on the engine control parameter lists.
2-65
2.3.14 Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER" (User-defined engine parameter)
(1) Function
Change the user-defined engine parameters.
Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode. The change will
not affect the controller settings.
Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default.
Maintenance
code
14<01> Densit
01 Displays and changes the "print density."
NORMAL :3
14<02> Power Save
02 Displays and changes the "power save set."
OFF :0
14<03> D.Open Cut
14 03 Displays and changes the "door open cut."
OFF :0
14<04> E.Cut Timer
04 Displays and changes the "top edge cut timer."
OFF :0
14<05> T-paper mode
05 Displays and changes the "tracing paper mode."
MODE1 :1
2-66
(2) Operation for selecting the user-defined engine parameter
2 Select the user-defined engine parameter using [ ] or [ ] key.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, you can change the
specified user defined engine parameter.
< 1 4 >USER P ARAM "MAINTENANCE CODE 14 DISPLAY"
14<01> De n s i t y (To next page)

NORMA L :3
14<02> Powe r Save (To next page)

OF F : 0
14<04> E . Cu t T i me r (To next page)

OF F : 0
14<05> T - p a p e r mo d e (To next page)

MO D E 1 : 1
2-67
(3) Operation for changing the user-defined engine parameter
This following describes operation to change the user-defined engine parameter.

In the example shown below, you should change "Density" from "Normal" to "Thick"
(subcode 01).
1 After the desired parameter is select and entered, the parameter value on the second line is
marked with angle brackets.
2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance
code 14, subcode 01display comes back.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without
changing the parameter.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 14 DISPLAYED"

14<01> Den s i t y
NORMA L : 3

14 - 01 Den s i t y
< NORMA L : 3>
14 - 01 Den s i t y
<RATHER TH I CK : 4>
14 - 01 Den s i t y
< TH I CK :5>
14 - 01 Den s i t y
TH I CK :5
Change the print density to thick.
2-68
Select user-defined engine control parameter values from the table below:
"Print density" setting Description
< THIN :1> 1: Thin
< RATHER THIN :2> 2: Slightly thin
< NORMAL :3> 3: Normal (Default)
<RATHER THICK :4> 4: Slightly thick
< THICK :5> 5: Thick
"Power Save" setting Description
< OFF :0> 0: Does not enter the power save mode. (Default)
<15min-LEVEL1 :1> 1: Enters the level 1 power save mode after 15 minutes.
<90min-LEVEL1 :4 4: Enters the level 1 power save mode after 90 minutes.
<60min-LEVEL2 :7 7: Enters the level 2 power save mode after 60 minutes.
LEVEL1: The fixation temperature is decreased to 100°C. When the temperature reaches 100°C,
halogen lamps are operated (i.e. turn-on or turn-off).
LEVEL2: The halogen lamp is completely turned off.
"Door Open Cut" setting Description
<OFF :0> 0: Off (The door open cut is not executed.) (Default)
< ON :1> 1: On (the door open cut is executed.)
"Top Edge Cut Timer" setting Description
< OFF :0> 0: Off (The edge cut is not executed.) (Default)
< 30min :1> 1: 30 minutes
< 60min :2> 2: 60 minutes (1 hour)
<120min :3> 3: 120 minutes (2 hours)
<240min :4> 4: 240 minutes (4 hours)
< 1min :5> 5: Approx. 1 minute
"Tracing paper Mode" setting Description
<MODE1 :1> 1: Mode 1 (Default)
<MODE2 :2> 2: Mode 2
2-69
2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width)
(1) Function
Change the print width of roll paper.
Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode.
The change will not affect the controller settings.
Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default.
Maintenance
code
Displays and changes the paper roll print
15<01> A0-Roll
01 width that is judged to be equivalent to A0
841mm
paper width.
15<02> A1-Roll
594mm
paper width.
15
15<03> A2-Roll
420mm
paper width.
15<04> A3-Roll
297mm
paper width.
2-70
(2) Operation for selecting the paper roll print width
2 Select the roll width using [ ] or [ ] key.
3 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the user defin engine parameter.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, the print width can be
changed.
<15> RO L L WI DTH "MAINTENANCE CODE 11 DISPLAY"
15<01> A0 - Ro l l (To next page)

8 4 1 mm
15<02> A1 - Ro l l
(To next page)
5 9 4 mm
15<03> A2 - Ro l l
(To next page)
4 2 0 mm
15<04> A3 - Ro l l (To next page)

2 9 7 mm
2-71
(3) Operation for changing the paper roll print width
This following describes operation to change for print width of the paper roll.
In the example shown below, you should change the print width of the paper roll, which is judged
to be equivalent to subcode 01 and A0 paper width, from "841 mm" to "36 inch."
1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the parameter value on the second line is marked
with angle brackets.
2 Press the [ ] or [ ] key until "36 inch" appears on the display.
3 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance
code15, subcode 01 display comes back.
4 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing
the parameter value.

01 DISPLAY"
15<01> A0 - Ro l l
8 4 1 mm

15 - 01 A0 - Ro l l Indicate the default.

< 8 4 1 mm >
15 - 01 A0 - Ro l l
< 8 8 0 mm >
, ,˙˙˙
15 - 01 A0 - Ro l l
< 36 ” >
15 - 01 A0 - Ro l l
36 ”
Change the "841 mm" to "36 inch."
2-72
Select the print width of the paper roll from the table below:
A0 width equivalent paper roll Meaning of value
< 841mm> 841 mm: A0 width (default)
< 880mm> 880 mm
< 900mm> 900 mm
< 910mm> 910 mm
< 914mm> 914 mm
< 30 " > 30 inch = 762.0 mm
< 34 " > 34 inch = 863.6 mm
< 36 " > 36 inch = 914.4 mm
< 594mm> 594 mm :A1 width (default)
< 610mm> 610 mm
< 620mm> 620 mm
< 700mm> 700 mm
< 707mm> 707 mm
< 22 " > 22 inch = 558.8 mm
< 24 " > 24 inch = 609.6 mm
< 310mm> 310 mm
< 11 " > 11 inch = 279.4 mm
< 12 " > 12 inch = 304.8 mm
< 310mm> 310 mm
< 11 " > 11 inch = 279.4 mm
< 12 " > 12 inch = 304.8 mm
2-73
2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG" (Process Cartridge Consumption Log)
(1) Function
This code displays the information on up to ten latest process cartridges replaced in the past.
Maintenance
code
16<01>[0002] Displays the latest process cartridge
01
03-06(09:30) 120 information.
16<02>[0001] Displays the second latest process cartridge
02
03-05(18:32) 5400m information.
16
: : :
Displays the tenth latest process cartridge
10 16<10>[ ] information. (If there is no information, the
error code is left blank.)
The process cartridge information is displayed as follows:
Process cartridge number
16<01> [ 0002 ]
03 - 06 ( 09 : 30 ) 1 2 0m
Final application date and time Process cartridge consumption

Month/day, hour/minute [Distance]
(March 6, 9H30M) (120 m)
16<01> [ 0002 ]
03 - 06 ( 09 : 30 ) 394f
2-74
(2) Operation for displaying the process cartridge consumption log
Enter the Maintenance Code," the process cartridge information of the maintenance code
16, subcode 01 is displayed initially.
2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select desired subcodes to display and check settings one after
another.
<16> PROC E S S L OG "MAINTENANCE CODE16 DISPLAY"
16<01> [ 0002 ]
03 - 06 ( 09 : 30 ) 1 2 0m
16<02> [ 0001 ]
03 - 05 ( 18 : 32 ) 5 4 0 0m
16<09> [ ]
16<10> [ ]
2-75
2.4 Message
The table below lists the messages displayed on the second line of the LCD during operations on
the device such as printing, and their meanings.
Message Description
The machine is warming up.
( Warming up 12345 )
The figure is a countdown time.
( Printing ) During printing
( Print End ) The printout is normally terminated.
( Print Stop ) The machine is executing the print stop process.
( Execution ) The machine is executing the operation.
( End ) The operation is completed.
( Stop ) The machine is executing the operation stop process.
( Door Open ) The door is opened.
Door 8 (manual paper feed holder) is opened. (When manual
( Door8 Open )
feed is not used, door 8 must be closed.)
( Toner Empty ) The toner is run out.
( TonerDoor Open ) The toner inner door is opened.
( WT-Bottle Full ) The waste toner bottle is filled.
( WT-Bottle Off ) The waste toner bottle is not mounted.
( Process Off ) The process cartridge is not mounted.
( Paper End ) The paper is run out.
Paper jam occurred,
( Paper JAM [3400] )
(The figure in the brackets is error code. )
Unrecoverable error occurred.
( ERROR [2038] )
(The figure in the brackets is error code.
Message Description
NVRAM is not initialized. (The time is also not set.)
( Set date&time! )
The initialized pattern is rewritten.
( SW4 DIPSW-1:ON ) Bit 1 of the 8-bit DIP switch (SW5) is set to the ON position.
2-76
Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode
This device supports the maintenance person mode that cannot be defined by users. Chapter 3
describes functions and operations of those menus specific to maintenance people. To access and
use this mode, you must enter the password.
3.1 Enter to Maintenance Person Mode
3.1.1 LP-1020 / LP-1020L
PR I NT READY
Data wait display
1 Press the key to activate the offline mode.
MENU
Setup display
# SETUP
2 Press the keys in the following order.
P A S S WO R D
I N P U T MO D E
3 Enter the password by pressing the keys in the following order.
I NPUT OK
LEVEL 003
The display appears as shown right
and the display enters the
maintenance person mode.
MENU
# SETUP
The above operating sequence is the same as user-defined menus. When the setup is completed
and the key is pressed to return to the data prompt display, the maintenance person mode is
automatically quitted.
3-1
3.1.2 LP-1020-MF / LP-1020L-MF
Menu Mode
Pressing the MENU key (example): MENU
#SETUP
[ En t e r ] t o Se l ec t
I NPUT PASSWORD
2 Enter the password by pressing the keys in the following order.
I NPUT OK
LEVEL 03
Menu Mode
The display appears as shown right and the
MENU
display enters the maintenance person mode. #SETUP
[ En t e r ] t o Se l ec t
The above operating sequence is the same as user-defined menus.

When the setup is completed and any of mode keys (e.g. MENU, COPY, FILE, DELIVELY, and
PRINT) is pressed to change the mode, the maintenance engineer mode is quitted.
3-2
3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus
Maintenance person's special menu supports 16 options as shown below. (1) - (3) are the menu
options in the function menus, (4) - (15), (18) are that of the system menus, and (16) and (17) are
that of the device menu.
HINT: The parameter marked with underscore (_) is a factory default.
(1) HDD FORMAT (FUNCTION)
Function: Performs the formats of internal hard disk.
(2) NVRAM FORMAT (FUNCTION)
Function: Performs the formats of NVRAM.
(3) VERSION UPGRADE (FUNCTION)
Function: Performs version upgrading of the system firmware using the maintenance CF
card.
(4) FACTORY SET (SYSTEM)
Function: Initializes the parameter of user defined item. However, the device serial num-
ber is not initialized.
(5) SERIAL NO (SYSTEM)
Function: Enter the serial number of the plotter.

Parameter: 00000 to 65535 (decimal number)
(6) CUSTOM (POINT PLOT) (SYSTEM - SYSTEM CUSTOM)
Function: This parameter determines whether "POINT PLOT" will be displayed with the
HPGL format parameter.
Parameter: OFF: Not display
ON: Display
Supplementary explanation:
Selecting "ON" for this setting allows modifying setting of the following pa-
rameters with HPGL format parameters.
Designation: POINT PLOT
ON: A single point is plotted. (Default)
OFF: A single point is not plotted.
3-3
(7) CUSTOM (PDTF CHOICE) (SYSTEM - SYSTEM CUSTOM)
Function: Changes the PlotDataToFile option of the DRAWING PARAM..

Parameter: STANDARD: “ON” is not displayed for the PlotDataToFile option of the
PLOT parameter.
EXPANSION: “ON” is displayed for the PlotDataToFile option of the PLOT
parameter.
(8) SNMP TRAP NUM. (SYSTEM - COMM.- PARAM. - ETHRNET - DETAIL ITEM)
Function: Specifies the number of SNMP TRAP tables. The TRAP table refers to the
table accessed from "TRAPnn Manager" to "TRAPnn: PORT."
Parameter: 1 to 20 (Default: 2)
(9) ALTERNATIVE INTERFACE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - USB)
Function: This parameter enables or disables the alternative setup for the USB interface.
The default setting is OFF. This parameter is used together with SIIT's PC
driver. When the user does not want to use SIIT's driver and desires to establish
IEEE1284-compatible communications controlled under the printer device
class, which is defined according to the USB interface, you should select AL-
TERNATIVE INTERFACE.
Parameter : OFF : Invalid
ON : Valid
(10)TIMING MODE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)
Function: Specifies the parallel interface communication conditions (signal timing).

Setting: NORMAL
FAST
SLOW
MANUAL (Displayed the maintenance person defined level mode.)
(11) ACK ON TIME (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)
Function: Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE on time.

Parameter: 1 to 127 (Default: 80)
(12) ACK PULSE (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COM PARAMETER - PARALLEL)
Function: Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE pulse width.

Setting: 1 to 127 (Default: 80)
(13) BUSY OFF TIMING (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)
Function: Specifies BUSY signal off timing.

Parameter: ACK FALL EDGE
ACK RISE EDGE
3-4
(14) SELECT SIGNAL (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)
Function: Specifies whether the SELECT signal is turned on or off.

Parameter: ON: Always turned on (active).
OFF/ON: The setting varies depending on whether the device is in online
or offline state.
(15) AF SIGNAL DIR. (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)
Function: Specifies AF (auto feed) signal direction.

Parameter: INPUT: The AF signal is handled as input.
OUTPUT: The AF signal is handled as output.
(16) Special setting 2 (Device)
Function Used from the Web when adjusting the scanner.

Parameters 00 - FF Default value: 00
(17) Special setting 3 (Device)
Function Selects whether an error of H/W on MRC2 board (PES under run error) is to
detected or not.
(This parameter should normally be set to OFF)
Parameter OFF: Does not detect the error
ON: Detects the error
(18) KEY CODE1, KEY CODE2, KEY CODE3 (System)
Function Sets KEY CODE 1 to 3 that enable the Color Scanner option. This item is
displayed for the LP-1020-MF/LP-1020L-MF model only.
Parameters: 0000000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

Initial value is “0000000000000000”.
To enable the Color Scan option, the maintenance person must set up this device in the specified
procedure. For details, see Section 1.6 of Chapter 1.
3-5
3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web
<Procedure>
1 See the "remote control startup procedure" in the User's Guide and display the plotter's web
screen.
2 Enter password CSCCSUDR (8 upper case characters in half-size) to the password input area
of the menu on the left side of the page and then click [Login].
3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions
If a trouble occurred at a user, using the "Maintenance Information Acquisition" function allows
collecting the information necessary to locate the cause of a controller error.
<Procedure>
1 Log in the maintenance person mode of the Web
2 Click "Maintenance" on the left side of the page to display the maintenance page.
3 Click "3. Maintenance Information" on the "Maintenance " page to display the "Special
maintenance" page.
4 Click [Upload] to save the information file to PC.
5 Return to the "Maintenance" page and click "5. All Ports and PDL Parameters Import/Export"
to display the "Ports & PDL Import/Export" page for All ports and All PDL setting.
6 Click [Export] to save the setup file to PC.
7 When above operations were implemented from a user's PC, finally enter "logout" in the
password field of the menu and click [Login]. Make sure the display above the password field
is changed to Level: "user".
3-6
Chapter 4 Regular Inspection
This chapter describes regular inspection and maintenance.
4-1
4.1 Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure
The regular inspection must be executed every 12 months, as a rule. On the other hand, 6 month
interval is recommended for the preventive maintenance that is necessary to maintain the
acceptable image quality. Table 4-1 below lists regular inspection items and procedures.
Note: Before replacing a part, be sure to contact the user and obtain his/her
approval.
Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List
(1 / 2)
No. Item Operation Cleaning Replacement* Refer to

Execute "MENU PRINT" in the function menu User's
1 Operation check of single plotter —— ——
to check manual
Enter the engine maintenance mode and output
engine test patterns to check and evaluate the
specifications and quality.
Check the plotting specifications
2 (Test pattern) No.15 —— —— 2.3.10
and image quality
(Paper feed position) Upper and lower ports
(Paper size) All sizes
(Number of outputs) 1 sheet, each
When the spring has reached the end of service
3 Inspection of gas spring life (the replacement timing is indicated on the —— —— 10.2.35
warning label (see page v)), replace the part.
Clean the SLA (LED head lens) with a cotton
4 Cleaning of SLA 5 km —— ——
cloth.
Dampen a rag with water and wring it
Cleaning of roller (1) and rollers on
5 sufficiently, and wipe the toner off on each roller 5 km 150 km ——
both sides of head
surface.
Cleaning of charge wires (2) and Use cotton seagull soused in ethanol (ethyl 20 km
6 5 km ——
(3). alcohol) for the cleaning. (Wire)
Wipe the toner off the DEV seat with a dry cotton
7 Cleaning of DEV seat 5 km —— ——
cloth.
Dampen a rag with water and wring it
Cleaning of bottom fore-
8 sufficiently, and wipe the toner off on the bottom 5 km —— ——
transcription guide
fore-transcription guide.
If the parts are heavily soiled, dampen a rag with
Cleaning of pinch and registration
water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the
9 rollers, cutaway rollers, pinch roller 10 km —— ——
toner and paper chips off on each roller surface.
ASSY.
After the cleaning, dry the parts completely.
Check of replacement timing of When the developer unit has reached the end of
10 —— 100 km ——
developer unit service life, replace the part.
When the spacer is heavily soiled, wipe it with a
dry cloth while turning the roller.
11 Cleaning of DV spacer 5 km 100 km ——
Note: Do not touch the magnet roller with bare
hands.
Cleaning the seats of magnet rolls When the toner has been spilled out, wipe off the
12 5 km 100 km ——
R and L toner.
When the cover is heavily soiled, clean the inside
13 Cleaning of DEVT cover 5 km —— ——
wall with a vacuum cleaner.
When the rollers are heavily soiled, dampen a rag
with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe
Cleaning of paper feed, remaining, each roller surface. After the cleaning, dry the
14 10 km —— ——
and rewind rollers parts completely.
Execute the cleaning for both upper and lower
stages of the paper feed unit.
4-2
Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List
(2 / 2)
No. Item Operation Cleaning Replacement* Refer to

Open the rear cover and remove paper chips.
15 Cleaning of slitter cutter Note: Be careful that you will not be injured by 10 km —— ——
the cutter blade.
Cleaning of out fuser separation When the ends of the separation finger are
16 10 km 100 km ——
finger heavily soiled by the toner, wipe it off with a rag.
When the parts have reached the end of service
Inspection of fuser thermistors life, replace them.
17 5 km 100 km ——
(TH01, TH02, TH04) Note: Pay attention not to bend the leaf spring
fixed.
Dampen a cotton cloth with heat roller cleaner
Cleaning of heat and backup and wipe each roller surface.
18 5 km 100 km ——
rollers Note: Wipe the cleaned surfaces with a dry
cloth.
Check the mount condition.
19 Check of belt (TRANS) Note: Pay attention not to break the arm of 5 km 100 km ——
PS06 for the belt
Check whether the user has used the device under
Confirmation of user's operating
20 the specified operating conditions, including —— —— ——
environment
temperature and humidity.
Confirmation of consumable Check whether the user is using the consumable
21 —— —— ——
parts parts specified by Seiko I Infotech.
* Figures in this column are only criteria. The replacement timing depends on the actual operating
environment and cleaning intervals. You can see cleaning and replacement intervals, using
maintenance code 02 and 03 in the engine criteria maintenance mode (see Sections 2.3.2 and
2.3.3).
** Before restarting the device after the completion of necessary inspections, clean the interior of the
machine.
Table 4-2 Regular Inspection Item List (Scanner)
Item Operation
Cleaning of shading guide Dampen a rag with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the seat surface.
If extremely dirty, dampen with a neutral cleaner and wipe the surface.
Pay complete attention that rubbing the guide strongly or prolongedly using
a rag dampened with alcohol may peel off the paint on the surface.
Cleaning of scanner glass Dampen a rag with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the surface.
When foreign materials such as paste strongly adhere to the surface, a rag
dampened with alcohol may be used to wipe them off.
Cleaning of transfer roller Dampen a rag with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the surface.
Dry each roller completely. If extremely dirty, dampen with a neutral cleaner
and wipe the surface.
4-3
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)
This chapter describes troubleshooting where an error occurred in the controller. If a trouble
occurs on the device, the error lamp is turned on. (In case of warning, the lamp is not lit.) In
addition, an error message appears on the LCD. When the error message is displayed, find the
cause and place and remove the trouble. If the error message is not displayed, judge the place
based on the symptom and remove the trouble. Classified errors and codes supported errors are
identified by 4-digit hexadecimal numbers (example: E E56E-01FF).
5.1 Type of Error Messages
Error messages are classified into four categories as shown below according to the type of
trouble.
(1) Operator call error
This error message shows troubles that the operator can handle: for example, replacement of
consumables. Operator call errors are further classified into errors that the operator can handle
and those that our Service Center must handle.
(2) Operator report warning
This error message is the warning information addressed to the operator: for example,
replacement of consumables is oncoming.
(3) Warning
This error message shows incomplete system environment or setup: for example, communication
error or faulty data.
(4) Service call error
This error message shows troubles that are attributable to defective parts, faulty media, or
program error, and must be handled by our Service Center.
5-1
5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error
"Operator call errors" can be handled by the operator. When this type of error occurs, you should
request the user to troubleshoot the machine based on the error message displayed. If the same
symptom recurs frequently, you should remove the trouble according to the instructions
described in "Chapter 6 Maintenance Person."
(For detailed descriptions on troubles relating to door open / close and consumables, see the
user's guide.)
C LOS E DOOR X C l os e Doo r X
x: Door number
Description: The roll X drawer is opened.
Measure: Close the roll X drawer.
One door is displayed.
O P E N DOOR X Open Doo r X

R E MO V E P A P E R Remov e Pape r
Two or more doors are displayed.
O P E N DOOR X , X Open Doo r X,X

R E MO V E P A P E R Remov e Pape r
Description: The paper is jammed in the machine.
Measure: Troubleshoot the machine according to the guidance displayed.
S E T U P I S WR O N G SETUP I S WRONG
# I N I T I AL SET # I N I T I AL SET
[ En t e r ] t o I n i t.
Description: The machine detects the damaged setup area checksum after powering on.
Measure: Press key to display the default setting selection screen.
Using , and , select and execute the type of the default setting.
5-2
E SET THE S /N E SET THE S / N
Description: This error message may appear if the serial number at powering on is not specified.
Measure: Specify the serial number of the device. (see Section 5.10 Serial Number Not Set.)
Scanner operator call error
- Original jam error
Open Scanne r Co v e r t o
Remove O r i g i na l
Description: The original is jammed in the scanner.
Measure: Open the scanner cover, remove the jammed original, and close the scanner
cover.
- Scanner cover open error
C l os e Scanne r Co v e r
Description: The scanner cover is opened.
Measure: Close the scanner cover.
- Scan stop
To cancel scanning the original, press the SCAN STOP key. The following error message
appears on the screen.
Open Scanne r Co v e r t o
Remov e O r i g i na l
Description: The SCAN STOP key is pressed during the original scan.
Measure: Open the scanner cover, remove the original, and close the scanner cover.
5-3
5.3 Operator Notice Warning
W S POO L I N I T I A L I ZED W SPOOL

J O B WA S DE L ETED I N I T I AL I ZED
Description: The saved job has been damaged, and thus the spool area is initialized (When
HDD is installed).
Measure: After 3 seconds, the message changes to "WAIT A MOMENT" and then the
device starts.
W J O B WA S DE L ETED W Job De l e t e
Description: The data is received in the format not supported by the device, and thus the data
was ignored.
Measure: Use the data received in the format supported by this device.
W S POO L ERROR W SPOOL ERROR
Description: The spool area on the HDD has been damaged, and thus the memory spool area
is used (When HDD is installed).
Measure: Replace the HDD
W NV RAM ERROR W NVRAM ERROR
Description: The nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 Board)

is damaged. Usual printing is executable while some functions do not work
correctly. Currently, only the accounting information printout function in the
function menu is affected by this error.
Measure: Execute NVRAM format in the function menu. If the error is not removed,
5-4
De l e t e Job?
D E L E T E J OB ?
Y=En t e r N=Cance l
Y = ENT ER N= CANCE L
Description: This message appears if there is an unprocessed job (jobs standing by for pro-
cessing) at powering on.
Measure: Select whether the job is deleted or not by pressing the key or key.
The operation goes in time out in about 10 seconds unless the key is pressed,
and the device starts with the job save.
Table 5-1 If a Job has been Left at Powering on
Job status Display Transaction

Standing for
DELETE JOB? Job is deleted by designation.
processing
Job is automatically moved to "already
Processing —
processed" job.
Jobs are automatically deleted from the
Processed —
oldest job in order.
W UN - I N I T . NVR AM W UN- I N I T . NVRAM
Description: This message appears if the nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCB-
ASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 board) is not initialized.
Measure: The display of this warning message remains until the key is pressed.
After the key was pressed, the NVRAM is initialized automatically and
the display changes to the language setting specifically for the installing opera-
tion.
5-5
5.4 Warning
5.4.1 Communication Error
A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the
computer and the device.
This type of error can be handled by the system administrator of the user.
Note: A communication error appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next
operation is performed. Consequently, you may not find the that error
occurred. In such a case, retransmit the data to check if the communication
error is displayed on the LCD.
(1) Ethernet interface
W I NTERFACE - LN nnnn
W I NTERFACE - LN nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-2 Ethernet Warning List
Error code Description Measure

0101 Duplication of XPT port number Correct machine settings.
0212 Lack of internal memory
0220 to 022F Protocol data sent from the host is defective If the device is not recovered from this error by
turning the power off and on, take the following
Host disconnects the communication forcibly while a measures:
0250 to 025F
connection is established Check if the protocol matches the specifications
0260 to 026F The device failed communication while communication of computer, or
time out data is transferred Replace the connection cable, or
Check the communication condition from the
1000 to 4FFF Communication connection system error online monitor. (Recommended monitor: Sniffer)
5000 to 7FFF Communication system internal error
(2) Mail interface
W I NTERFACE - ML nnnn
W I NTERFACE -ML nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-3 Mail Warning List

1100 to 11FF SMTP server address is not specified. Specify the SMTP server address.
1200 to 12FF SMTP server is not found.
1300 to 1AFF SMPT server ignored protocol, or SMPT server Check the SMPT server for its address setting
does not respond. and the SMPT server host for its status, setting,
and connection.
1B00 to 1BFF SMPT server ignored the terminating
processing.
5-6
(3) USB interface
W I NTERFACE - US nnn n
W I NTERFACE -US nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-4 USB Warning List

0300 to 04FF Lack of internal memory If the device is not recovered from this error by
turning the power off and on, take the following
2100 to 24FF Protocol data sent from the host is defective
measures:
0100 to 01FF The device failed communication while communication Check if the protocol matches the specifications
time out data is transferred of computer, or
Replace the connection cable, or
1000 to 1FFF Communication connection system error
Check the communication condition from the
2000 to 2FFF Communication system internal error online monitor.
(4) Delivery interface
W I NTERFACE -DL nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-5 Delivery Interface Warning List

(1/2)
1120 TCP is disconnected. - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
1131 IP address of the device is not set - Check that the IP address of the device is set
correctly. correctly.
1133 IP address of the delivery server (host) - Check that the IP address of the delivery server
is not set correctly in the device. Or, the (host) is set correctly.
path control table is not set correctly. - Check that the path control table is set correctly.
1136 TCP connection was reset from the - There will be no problem if the scan data received
delivery server. by the delivery server are normal, but if abnormal,
retry the delivery.
1139 Delivery server is not connected to the - Check that the delivery station (application) has
socket. been started in the delivery server set by this device.
- Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
retry the delivery.
113C Time out of TCP connection to the - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
delivery server. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
113D TCP connection was rejected from the - Check that the delivery station (application) has
delivery server. been started in the delivery server set by this device.
retry the delivery.
5-7
Table 5-5 Delivery Interface Warning List
(2/2)

1141 Invalid IP address is set to the delivery - Check that the IP address is set correctly in
server, this device, or path control respective units and table.
table.
1143 Delivery server down - Operate the delivery server normally and retry the
delivery.
1100 to 11FF Any error other than above occurred - Please notify to design group of the displayed error
in TCP connection system. message and error condition.
2102 Undefined command was received - Check the version of delivery station installed in the
from delivery server. delivery server, and reinstall correct application.
2103 I/O error (R) occurred in the connection - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
to the delivery server. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
2104 I/O error (W) occurred in the connection - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
to the delivery server. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
- Check that the communication parameters (set
values) are set correctly in the device.
2105 Connection error to the delivery server - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
occurred. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
values) between this device and delivery server are
set correctly.
2180 Operation NG notice was received from - Check that the delivery list information set by the
the delivery server. (Log information) delivery server is correct.
2181 Language system is different between - Match the language system between delivery server
delivery server and this device. (Log and this device.
information) - If matching is impossible, use English language in
the delivery server.
2182 Delivery information is not set at all in - Check that the delivery list information set by the
the delivery server, or delivery address delivery server is correct.
is not selected. (Log information)
2183 Key codes are different between - Retry acquisition of the delivery information from
delivery server and the device. the device.
2000 I/O error (RW) occurred in the - If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
device. turning it on again, hear from the user about the
2001 I/O error (SEL) occurred in the situation when the error occurred, and replace a
device. component or upgrade the firmware to the latest
version accordingly. In case of replacement, the
2002 Memory related error occurred in the MRC2 board is subject to change.
device.
2050 Command error occurred in the
device.
5-8
(5) File (TWAIN) Interface
W I NTERFACE - TW x x x x
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-6 File (TWAIN) Interface Warning List
(1/2)

1120 TCP is disconnected. - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
retry the delivery.
1131 IP address of the device is not set - Check that the IP address of the device is set
correctly. correctly.
1136 TCP connection was reset from the - There will be no problem if the scan data received
host device. by the host device are normal, but if abnormal, retry
the delivery.
1139 Host device is not connected to the - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
socket. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
113C Time out of TCP connection to the - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
delivery server. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
113D TCP connection was rejected from the - Check that host device scan driver in the operates
host device. normally.
retry the delivery.
1141 Invalid IP address is set to this device - Check that the IP address is set correctly in
or path control table. respective units and table.
1143 Host device down. - Operate the host device normally and retry the
delivery.
11FF Any error other than above occurred - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
in TCP connection system. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
2100 Any error occurred in TCP connection. - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
retry the delivery.
2103 I/O error (R) occurred in the connection - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
to the host device. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
2104 I/O error (W) occurred in the connection - Check the connection of relay units (HUB, etc.)
to the host device. between host and this device and the UTP cable, and
retry the delivery.
values) are set correctly in the device.
5-9
Table 5-6 File (TWAIN) Interface Warning List
(2/2)

2000 I/O error (RW) occurred in the device. - If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
turning it on again, hear from the user about the
2001 I/O error (SEL) occurred in the device. situation when the error occurred, and replace a
component or upgrade the firmware to the latest
2002 Memory related error occurred in the
version accordingly. In case of replacement, the
device.
MRC2 board is subject to change.
2003 Logical error occurred in the device.
2004 Socket related error occurred in the

device.
2050 Command error occurred in the
device.
(6) PlotDataToFile Interface
W I NTERFACE - PD nnn n
PRESS ANY KEY W I NTERFACE -PD nnnn
P r es s ANY Key
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-7 PlotDataToFile Warning List
(1/2)

1120 The TCP connection is failed. - Check the repeaters (such as hubs) and UTP cables
between the host and this device for a poor
connection, and retry data transmission.
1131 Incorrect IP address is set for this - Set the IP address of this device correctly.
device.
1133 Incorrect IP address of PDTF server - Set the IP address of PDTF server (host) correctly.
( h o s t ) i s s e t f o r t h i s d e v i c e , o r - Set the routing table correctly.
incorrect routing table is set.
1136 The TCP connection was reset by the - Correct raster data must be received by the PDTF
PDTF server. server. If not, retry the data transmission.
1139 T h e s o c k e t o f P D T F s e r v e r i s - Check that the PDTF tool software is running on the
disconnected. PDTF server of this device.
- Check the repeaters (such as hubs) and UTP cables
5-10
Table 5-7 PlotDataToFile Warning List
(2/2)

113C The TCP connection to PDTF server - Check the repeaters (such as hubs) and UTP cables
has timed out. between the host and this device for a poor
113D The TCP connection was rejected by - Check that the PDTF tool software is running on the
the PDTF server. PDTF server of this device.
- Check the repeaters (such as hubs) and UTP cables
1141 An invalid IP address is set for the - Check that the IP address is correct for each of them.
PDTF server, or for the IP address or
routing table of this device.
1143 The PDTF server went down. - Normally operate the PDTF server and retry data
transmission
11** A n e r r o r o t h e r t h a n a b o v e h a s - Report the error code (11**) to the design
occurred in the TCP connection department and take appropriate action.
system.
2000 An I/O error (RW) has occurred in this - Replace the MRC2 board.
device.
2001 An I/O error (SEL) has occurred in

this device.
2002 A memory error has occurred in this

device.
2050 A command error has occurred in this

device.
5-11
5.4.2 PDL Warning
A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the
computer and the device. When a PLD error occurs, you can return the LP-1020 to the normal
operation from the screen shown below.
Note: The PDL warning appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next
operation is performed. Consequently, you may not recognize the that error
occurred. It is recommended that the "ERROR MEMO" of "DRAWING
PARAM." in the setup menu be turned on, so that the error message is
printed on the drawing.
(1) Plotter PDL warning
W DATA nnnn
W DATA- nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-8 PDL Warning List

(1/2)
Error
Printed error memo title Description Measure
code
0201 W COMMAND ERROR HP-GL or HP-GL/2 command not Correct erroneous part at the
supported was received. computer side.
0202 W # OF PARAM. ERROR The number of parameters of HP-GL

or HP-GL/2 command is wrong.
0203 W PARAM._RANGE_ERR The plotting instruction that exceeds

the range supported by HP-GL or
HP-GL/2 command, or the plotting
instruction that uses illegal
characters was received.
0205 W UNDEFINED COMMAND Character set instruction of HP-GL Correct erroneous part at the
or HP-GL/2 command not supported computer side.
was received.
0207 W POLYGON_BFFR_ERR P o l y g o n b u f f e r o v e r f l o w e r r o r Correct erroneous part at the
occurred. computer side. (Polygon buffer
upper limit: 106600 points)
0208 — (No error memo) Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if
effective plotting data exists in HP- effective plotting data is
GL command. transferred.
0209 W CHAR._OVERFLOW There is no empty area in memory Correct so as to reduce the
for user registered characters of HP- number of registrations or data
GL (DL/UC command). by one character.
0300 W PATTERN OVERFLOW There are too many pattern Reduce the pattern registrations
registrations in one drawing and the in one drawing.
pattern memory overflows.
5-12
Table 5-8 PDL Warning List

(2/2)
Error
Printed error memo title Description Measure
code
0301 W HATCH OVERFLOW There are too many hatch Reduce the hatch registrations in
registrations in one drawing and the one drawing.
pattern memory overflows.
0303 W CHAR._OVERFLOW There is no empty area in memory for Correct so as to reduce the
user registered characters of HP-GL. number of registrations or data by
one character.
0305 W SPOOL OVERFLOW The spool memory overflows. Install optional HDD, or specify
the CENTERING = OFF if the
device is used with the
CENTERING = ON.
0306 W POLYGON OVERFLOW P o l y g o n b u f f e r o v e r f l o w e r r o r Correct erroneous part at the
occurred. computer side. (Polygon buffer
upper limit: 106600 points)
0307 to W PDL ERR 307 to Program warning If the error is reproducible and the
0313 W PDL ERR 313 print result is poor, the software must
be upgraded to the latest version.
0314 W DATA IGNORED Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if effective
effective plotting data. plotting data is transferred.
0400 W RASTER_DECODE_ERR The format of the compressed raster Check the computer side if the
data is erroneous. format of the compressed raster
data is correct.
0401 W RASTER_FORMAT_ERR There is no raster data of the size Check the computer side if data is
specified by the data. correct.
0500 to — (No error memo) Program warning If the error is reproducible and the
0505 print result is poor, the software must
be upgraded to the latest version.
0600 W FORMATERROR TIFF data is erroneous. Or, the device Correct erroneous part at the
failed plotting due to an omission of computer side.
essential tag.
0601 W # OF PARAM. ERROR The number of parameters of TIFF
data tag is wrong.
0602 W PARAM._RANGE_ERR The parameter value of TIFF data tag
exceeds the supported range.
0603 — (No error memo) Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if effective
effective plotting data in TIFF data. plotting data is transferred.
0700 — (No error memo) The device failed plotting due to an Correct erroneous part at the
omission of essential record in the computer side.
CALS format.
5-13
(2) Copy PDL warning (operator intervention)
If the following warning occurred, the error display and error log registration are taken place.
By pressing any key, you can reset the warning and recover to normal condition.
W COPY - nnnn
P r e s s Any Key
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-9 Copy PDL Warning (Operator Intervention)

0B30 Long paper error For printing in long size, the setup is limited. Use
default settings for the margin, frameerase, move,
mirror, and zoom modes, and scale x1 for the scale
mode.
0B31 Scan parameter error If the error is reproduced, upgrade the firmware to the
latest version.
0B32 No image appears
0B33 The virtual page line is insufficient.
5.4.3 Engine Warning
This error occurs when image data is transferred from the controller to the engine.
When this error occurs, the image data has not been transferred to the engine correctly and,
therefore, the faulty data may be printed on the paper. Return the device to the normal operation
from the following job.
W E56E - nnnn
W E56E - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-10 Engine Control Warning List

Hardware chip error Reprint the faulty data. If the error is not removed,
9001 to 900F
(plotter transfer error of gate array) replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest
Hardware chip error version accordingly. In case of replacement, change
9011 to 901F the RIP board or DRAM.
(scanner transfer error of gate array)
Hardware chip error (gate array
9021 to 90FF
operation failure)
5-14
5.4.4 Main Warning
W F06D - nnnn
W F06D- nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-11 List of Main Warnings

0801 Spool file error This error often results from abnormal power-off. If the
error does not recur as power is turned on again, there
is no problem. If the error still recurred as power is
turned on again, confirm with the user in what situation
did the error happened. Then replace the relevant parts
or upgrade F/W to the latest version. Target part is RIP
board (or, DRAM or HDD).
0838 Judgment of PDL is not available from If the error occurs on a specific set of data, a problem
the data on the data should be suspected. If the error occurred
on a set of data with which there has been no trouble
so far in its output, confirm with the user in what
situation the error resulted. Then replace the relevant
parts or upgrade F/W to the latest version. Target part
is RIP board (or, DRAM or HDD).
5.4.5 Scan PDL Warning
This error occurs when scanned image is processed by the scan PDL.
W F363 - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-12 Scan PDL Warning List

0001 Program error Collect information from the user about the situation
(Scan parameter error) when the error occurred. Upgrade the firmware to the
0003 Other errors latest version. If the error still persists, replace the
(Causes cannot be identified.) component (MRC2 board).
0002 Scan area error Reselect the scan area so that it covers the original, then
(No original is found in the specified scan again.
scan area.)
5-15
5.4.6 SNMP Warning
This error occurs when the copy account setting is executed.
E F375 - nnnn
P r es s Any Ke y
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-13 SNMP Warning List
(1/2)

0001 A device configuration error exists. Check the device settings (the “ Terioplot” must be
ON, and “ Terioplot IP address” must be a non-zero
value).
0002 No acknowledgement Communication between the device and the host may
have failed.
Specify the device settings (such as Terioplot IP
address) correctly. Also, check the LAN cable
connection and confirm the normal Terioplot operation
on the host.
0004 Incorrect acknowledgment The ACK information from the host may be incorrect.
Reboot both the device and host, and retry the job. If
0005 the error recurs, upgrade the device version or reinstall
Terioplot on the host.
0006 No response to the billing information Communication between the device and the host may
have failed.
Check the LAN cable connection and confirm the
normal Terioplot operation on the host.
0007 No response to the billing information Billing to the host has failed.
Incorrect response to the billing Reboot both the device and host, and retry the job. If
information the error recurs, upgrade the version or reinstall both
the device and host programs.
0008 Incorrect billing response information The response by the host to the billing information may
be incorrect.
0009 the error recurs, upgrade the device version or reinstall
000A Error in billing response The device and host may be not synchronized.
the error recurs, upgrade the device version or reinstall
000B No response for the end of copy Communication between the device and the host may
have failed.
Check the LAN cable connection and confirm the
normal Terioplot operation on the host.
000C Incorrect response for the end of copy The host may have failed to recognize the end of copy.
5-16
Table 5-13 SNMP Warning List
(2/2)

000D I n c o r r e c t e n d - o f - c o p y r e s p o n s e The response to the end of copy by the host may be
information incorrect.
000E the error recurs, upgrade the device version or
reinstall Terioplot on the host.
0011 Protocol error The device and host may be not synchronized.
0012
0013 Terioplot on the host.
0014
5-17
5.5 Service Call Error
Service call errors are handled by our Service Center.
Hint: When a service call error occurs, you should request the user to turn off the
device once and turn it on again to check whether the error is reproduced.
Restarting the machine may reset the error.
5.5.1 Engine Error
This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty.
E ENG I NE n n n n E ENG I NE nnnn

P OW E R O F F / O N
nnnn: Error code Powe r O f f / On
Description: This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty.
Measure: To correct error, see Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting (Engine Error)."
5.5.2 System Error
This error message may appear if an unrecoverable and exceptional system error occurs in the
controller of the device.
E FFFF - FFFF E FFFF - FFFF

P OW E R O F F / O N POWER OFF / ON
Description: An unexpected hardware or program error occurs.

Measure: Hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred.
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Check the hardware for connection.
Replace a part. In case of replacement, change the hard disk drive, DRAM, or
MRC2 board.
5-18
5.5.3 Controller Error
This error message may appear if an unrecoverable fatal error occurs in the module provided on
the controller of the device.
(1) Error in PDL module
E F064 - nnnn E F064 - nnnn

Table 5-14 PDL Module Error List

0380 to 039F Program error If the device is not reset by turning it off once
and turning it on again, hear from the user
about the situation when the error occurred,
and replace a part or upgrade the firmware
0A80 to 0A90 to the latest version accordingly. In case of
replacement, change the MRC2 board or
DRAM.
(2) Error in Engine Control module
E E56E - nnnn E E56E - nnnn

Table 5-15 Engine Control Module Error List

0111 to 01FF Program error (task boot error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once
0201 to 02FF Program error (task-to-task communication
error)
1000 to 1FFF Program error to the latest version accordingly. In case of
0301 to 03FF Hardware chip error (gate array error) replacement, change the MRC2 board or
DRAM.
0501 - 05FF Engine communication error
0601 - 06FF Scanner communication error
0401 to 04FF Hard disk error If the device is not reset by turning it off once
to the latest version accordingly. In case of
replacement, change the hard disk drive or
optional board (or MRC2 board or DRAM).
5-19
(3) Error in Operation module
E EF70 - n nnn E EF70 - nnnn

Powe r O f f / On
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-16 Operation Module Error List

0101 Program error (task boot synchronize error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
situation when the error occurred, and replace a
1000 to 1FFF Program error part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version
accordingly. In case of replacement, change the
MRC2 board or DRAM.
(4) Error in Main module
E F06D - n nnn E F06D- nnnn

Powe r O f f / On
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-17 Main Module Error List

0101 Program error (task boot synchronize error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
0111 to 01FF Program error (task boot error) situation when the error occurred, and replace a
0201 to 02FF Program error (task-to-task communication error) part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version
1000 to 1FFF Program error MRC2 board or DRAM.
0301 to 03FF NVRAM error If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version
MRC2 board or DRAM.
0401 to 04FF Hard disk / RAM disk error - If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
situation when the error occurred, and upgrade the
firmware to the latest version accordingly.
- Alternatively, check the power supply and data
cable that are connected to the hard disk drive.
If wrong connection is found, correct it.
- Check the power supply and data cable, which are
connected to the hard disk drive, for damage. If
either or both parts are damaged, replace it/them.
- In case of replacement, the hard disk drive,
optional board, change DRAM or MRC2 board.
2000 to 2FFF Hardware configuration error This error is attributable to incorrectly configured
hardware: for example, the standard panel is not
installed. Therefore, check the configuration and,
if troubles are found, replace a component or
upgrade the firmware to the latest version
panel, NVRAM, or MRC2 board.
5-20
(5) Error in Setup module

Table 5-18 Setup Error List

0101 Program error (task boot synchronize error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once
DRAM.
0301 to 03FF NVRAM error If the device is not reset by turning it off once
DRAM.
0401 to 04FF Setup control file error If the device is not reset by turning it off once
DRAM.
(6) Error in panel control module
E F06E- nnnn E F06E - nnnn

Powe r O f f / On
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-19 Panel Control Module Error List

0201 Program error (initial task interface error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once
replacement, change the hard disk drive or
optional board (or MRC2 board or DRAM).
5-21
(7) Error in spool module

Table 5-20 Spool Module Error List

1001 Storage access error - If the device is not reset by turning it off once
<Cause> about the situation when the error occurred,
* Logic failure of firmware. and upgrade the firmware to the latest
* Disconnect of hard disk drive. version accordingly.
* Faulty of hard disk drive. - Alternatively, check the power supply and
* Faulty of DRAM. data cable that are connected to the hard disk
drive. If wrong connection is found, correct
it.
- Check the power supply and data cable,
which are connected to the hard disk drive,
for damage. If either or both parts are
- damaged, replace it/them.
In case of replacement, the hard disk drive,
change DRAM or MRC2 board.
(8) Error in Copy PDL module
E 0040 - nnnn
Powe r O f f / On
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-21 Copy PDL Module Error List

0B80 to 0B93 Program error If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
component or upgrade the firmware to the latest
version accordingly. In case of replacement, the MRC2
board or DRAM is subject to change.
5-22
(9) Error in Scan PDL module
E F363 - nnnn
Powe r O f f / On
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-22 Scan PDL Module Error List
0101, 2201, 2303, 2501, 2C01 Program error (lack of memory) Hear from the user about the
situation when the error
0102 Program error (memory block acquisition error) occurred, and upgrade the
firmware to the latest version
1101 Program error (image acquisition error) accordingly. If the error
persists, replace a component.
1201 to 1203 Program error (MMR encode error)
In case of replacement, the
2301 to 2302 Program error (pipe open error) MRC2 board or DRAM is
subject to change.
2304, 2305, 2307, 2308 Program error (I/O error)
2306 Program error (termination type error)
2401, 2901 Program error (logic error)
2A01 Program error (setup read error)
2B01 to 2B04 Program error (I/O error)
(10)Error in Up-path spooler module
E F570 - nnnn
Powe r O f f / On
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-23 Up-path Spooler Module Error List

0001 to 000F Program error Hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred,
and upgrade the firmware to the latest version accordingly. If
0021 to 0042 Task-to-task communication the error persists, replace a component. In case of replacement,
error the MRC2 board or DRAM is subject to change.
1001 File access error
5-23
(11) Copy and sort module error
E 0050 - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-24 Copy and Sort Module Error List

1120 Generation of copy PDL is failed. Turn the power OFF then ON again. If this
does not work, replace the MRC2 board.
11A0 I/O error occurs inside the device. Replace the MRC2 board.
1230 Internal command error occurs inside the device.
12FF Process error occurs inside the device.
1340 I/O error occurs in the virtual page - Replace the hard disk drive.
(hard disk drive). - Replace the MRC2 board.
1350 I/O error of engine queue occurs. Replace the MRC2 board.
13A0 I/O error occurs inside the device (PM).
13B0 I/O error occurs inside the device (PDL).
13C0 I/O error occurs inside the device (ENG).
5-24
5.6 Error Log
Each time an error or warning occurs in the device, it is displayed on the LCD and also the error
log information is saved in the internal memory.
The error log information saved in the internal memory includes additionally the time when an
error occurred, and therefore you can confirm the error log using the "ERROR PRINT" of the
function menu.
(This information is saved even after the power was turned off.)
5.6.1 Classification of Error/Warning
The type of error/warning is classified as follows:
1 Classification: E (Service Call) An unrecoverable error that needs service person's

measures.
2 Classification: O (Operator Call) An error that the operator can take measures.
3 Classification: W (Warning) A warning, such as expiration of service life of
consumables and data error occurred.
5.6.2 Format of Message
Each error/warning message to be logged if an error or warning occurs identifies one character (+
space) at the top the of message as the error/warning identifier.
The log message is composed of alphanumerics and thus it does not necessarily match the
message displayed on the LCD.
The error/warning message registered as log information is prepared in the format mentioned
below.
5.6.3 Log Registration Format
An error or warning displayed on the LCD is registered as log information in the following
format.
Case 1 "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a bbbb-cccc"

Case 2 "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss cccc"
Case 3 "yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss"
yyyy/mm/dd year/month/day
hh:mm:ss hour:minute:second
a Error/warning identifier (common to LCD display)
bbbb- Error classification (hexadecimal notation)
cccc Error code (hexadecimal notation may be omitted)
ssssssss Optional alphanumeric message (may be omitted)
*Log example
"2007/05/24 12:31:55 E ENGINE 2030" Error number:2030=Power supply failure
5-25
5.6.4 Error Log Print Item
Table 5-25 Error Log Print Item
Header information Print item

Type of log media (log storage position)
Log media HDD : Hard disk drive
FLASH : Flash memory
Number of registrable logs
Max log number HDD : 8191
FLASH :1023
Log size Log size per information: 16 bytes
Log set count Number of registered logs
Error information Print item

Log Storage position (1 to 8191)
Date Error generation date (D/M/Y)
Time Error generation time
Error message:
E sssssss E: Fatal error (service call error)
Information
W sssssss W: Warning error
O sssssss O: Operator intervention error
5.6.5 Type of Error Log
The errors are classified as follows.

The following log examples show the information saved in the log file.
(1) Service Call Error (Classification: E)
Description: An unrecoverable error that needs service person's measures.
Cause: Hardware or firmware is faulty.
Measure: If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, replace
the hardware or firmware.
*Log example of hard disc error
"E E56E-0401"
(2) Operator Call (Classification: O)
Description: An error that the operator can take measures.
Cause: No paper, no toner or paper jams, which needs operator's help.
Measure: Remove the cause to restore the device to its normal state.
*Log example of door open
"O DOOR2 open"
5-26
(3) Warning (Classification: W)
Description: A warning state such as expiration of service life of consumables and data error
occurred.
Cause: A consumable approaches its life, or any failure in the environment, settings, or
data occurred.
Measure: Take appropriate measures to remove the cause.
(Service person may partially participate in the measure process.)
*Log example of comand warning
"W DATA 0201"
5-27
5.7 Error Log Classification List
Table 5-26 Error Log Classification List
Message Classification Description Measure

E xxxxxxxx (Error) Service call error An unrecoverable error needs If the device is not recovered from
service person's measures. this error after turning the power
off and on, hear from the user about
the situation when the error
occurred, and upgrade the firmware
to the latest version or replace a
relevant part accordingly.
O xxxxxxxx Operator call An error that the operator can T a k e m e a s u r e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e
(Operator Call) take measures. guidance message displayed on the
Remove the cause to restore LCD.
the device to its normal state.
W xxxxxxxx Warning A consumable approaches its Remove the cause of failure.
(Warning) life, or faulty in the (The service person may partially
environment, settings, or data participate in the measure process.)
was detected.
5-28
5.8 Job Log
When the device executes a job (i.e. print), a job log is saved in the internal memory. Various
types of information, including execution time, are registered in this job log. You can review the
job log history from "PRINT JOB LOG" of the function menu.
(The job log information is saved even after the power was turned off.)
Total count and distance, both of which are updated whenever a new job is executed, are
registered in this job log as well.
5.8.1 Job Log Print Item
Table 5-27 Job Log Print Item
(1 / 2)
Header information Print item
Type of log media (log storage position)
Log media HDD : Hard disk drive
FLASH : Flash memory
Number of registrable logs
Max log number HDD : 65535
FLASH : 1023
Log size Log size per information: 128 bytes
Log set count Number of registered logs
Job information Print item

Log file storage position (1 to 65535) (4 digits)
Log
Shows the job history number assigned to the job in execution order.
Job number (1 to 999) (3 digits)
Job
When the system recognizes the generation of job, the job number is assigned to the job.
Req Job generation (spool) number (1 to 999) (3 digits)
Processing PDL (5 characters)
PDL
A processing PDL is prepared for every data format
HPGL/TIFF/CALS/COPY/SCAN
Protocol / port number (4 characters)
Port Fxx (FTP), Lxx (LPR), Xxx (XPT), PARA, USB?
xx: Port number (1 to 10)
IP address (10 characters)
IP-address
When the protocol is USB and parallel jobs are executed, the IP address is not defined.
File name (12 characters)
File
Displays the file name that the host reported as printer job.
User name (12 characters)
User
Displays the user name that the host reported as printer job.
Receive data size (5 characters)
Input Size
This information shows the received data size (amount). Byte, kilobyte, and megabyte are
used as unit.
5-29
Table 5-27 Job Log Print Item
(2 / 2)
Job information Print item

Number of print job (3 characters)
Output Page
This information shows the number of sheets printed in one job, regardless of
drawing size.
Number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper (3 characters)
Output Acc This information shows the number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper
based on the value indicated by Output Page.
(A3/A4 = 1, A2 = 2, A1 = 3, A0 = 5)
Receive date
Date
This information shows the date in the format of xx (month) and xx (day). Only
figures are displayed.
Job start time (receive start time)
This information shows the job execution start time in the format of xx (hour) xx
Job Start
(minute) xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.)
In case of reprint or additional print, the start time of the new job is displayed
here.
Job end time
Job End
This information shows the print end time in the format of xx (hour) xx (minute)
xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.)
Total counter (number of sheets converted into A4/A3 paper) (unit: 10 sheets)
Counter Acc*10
This counter shows the total number of printed sheets that will be updated
whenever a new job is executed. "1234" means 12340 sheets.
Total distance (unit: 10 m)
Counter Run*10
This counter shows the total print distance that will be updated whenever a new
job is executed. "1234" means 12340 meters.
Job execution result (status)
This information shows the execution result of a job.

Only after the job is normally ended, the number in Counter Acc*10 is updated.
When a recovery process is executed, NORMAL is displayed as status and the
counter is ready.
Result
NORMAL : Normally terminated.
DELETE : Data is discarded.
CANCEL : Print (job) is canceled.
ERxxxx : Error end. (xxxx: Error log storage position)
EXTRA : Additional print
AGAIN : Reprint
5-30
5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board)
After the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced, the following operations are
needed. Be sure to transfer the EEPROM from the old board to the new board. (except where the
EEPROM is faulty).
Procedures:
1 Enter the serial number of the device.
Access "DEVICE SERIAL NO." of the "SYSTEM" menu and enter the serial number of the
device. Also, perform the operation for the serial number unset. (See "5.10 Serial Number
Unset".)
2 Perform the install operations and set of IP address. (Refer to the user's guide.)
3 Reset the each setting value on the other PCB - ASSY - MRC2.
Note: EEPROM contains important information such as counter. Pay close

attention not to break its legs or mount the element upside down during
removal and installation.
5-31
5.10 Serial Number Unset
After powering on, the device self-tests the area in which its serial number has been saved (flash
memory). If it is proved that the area is damaged or is not initialized, the following message
appears on the LCD.
The message appears when the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced with an
uninitialized board.
When this message appears, you must enter the maintenance person mode and enter the serial
number.
E SET THE S / N
Measure: Enter the device serial number using the following procedures.
E SET THE S /N
P A S S WO R D
I N P U T MO D E

I NPUT OK
LEVEL 003
SER I A L N UMB E R
* 00000
3 Enter the serial number of the device.
4 Press the key.
5-32
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)
This chapter describes the troubleshooting if a failure occurs in the engine.

If a message as shown below is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, take a corrective
measure following an error code "nnnn" of the error message. For other troubles, take a
corrective measure according to the symptom.
E ENG I NE nnnn
P OW E R OF F / ON
E ENG I NE nn nn
Po we r O f f /On
6.1 How to Read This Manual
6.1.1 Overview of Engine Troubleshooting
When troubleshooting the engine, first perform the level-1 troubleshooting to classify the
trouble. Then, advance the troubleshooting by performing the level-2 troubleshooting.
When you try to find a cause of the trouble through the troubleshooting or on the check-chart,
read the procedure carefully to avoid a failure. Also, if multiple causes are supposed, it is difficult
to find all causes at a time, and therefore you may have to perform the troubleshooting of the
same title again. In such a case, even for the same troubleshooting, ongoing judgment may
change, thus requiring extreme care.
Level-1 troubleshooting
The level-1 troubleshooting is the first step of troubleshooting. The level-1 troubleshooting
clarifies whether an error code or other trouble symptom is present or not to provide a hint for
proceeding to the level-2 troubleshooting.
6-1
The level-2 troubleshooting provides the classified troubleshooting procedures according to the
error code, paper jam, and other various symptoms. As a trouble diagnostic method, a cause of
the trouble can be found in a short time by performing the procedure given by the troubleshooting
or on the check-chart.
Error code : If an error code indicating an engine trouble is displayed on the
LCD, refer to the error description, resetting method, and corre-
sponding troubleshooting item from the error code list to per-
form the troubleshooting.
Paper jam : If a paper jam occurs frequently, refer to the description of the
paper jam code list to perform the paper jam troubleshooting.
Other symptoms : If an error code is not displayed or any trouble other than paper
jam occurs, judge an engine block concerned from the symptom
to perform the troubleshooting.
Maintenance diagnostic mode
This device provides various self-diagnostic functions to check or test the condition of each part
of the engine. These self-diagnostic functions are executed during the level-2 troubleshooting in
the engine maintenance mode.
For each function and its operating procedure in the engine maintenance mode, see Section 2.
6.1.2 Terminology
The terms listed below are frequently used in the engine troubleshooting. Before performing the
trouble analysis, understand the meaning of these terms.
Common terms
Error code : "nnnn" of an error message "E ENGINE nnnn" displayed on the
LCD of the control panel if the engine finds a trouble is called
the error code.
Visual check : Check visually the operation of parts such as a relay and me-
chanical linkage to find any faulty.
Enter maintenance Enter the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.1.1). Then,
code 03: select the maintenance code <03> and press the key.
6-2
Turn on power : Turn on the Power switch.
Turn off power : Turn off the Power switch.
Check for a short : Turn off the Power switch. Measure resistance between pin and
frame in the ohm range of the tester.
Select a subcode : Enter the engine maintenance mode following the procedure
given in "2.1.1 How to Enter the Engine Maintenance Mode,"
and select the maintenance code <03>. Then, select a subcode
"nn" and press the key.
"On" display ("Off" display) : This means that the maintenance code <06> is activated and a
subcode is selected, and then the signal level inputted to the
LCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) is displayed on the
LCD. "On" or "Off" is displayed.
Exit from trouble analysis procedure
Mechanical trouble : This term is used when you shift to mechanical adjustment or
part replacement. Read all items (main causes are described) for
comparison with a symptom appearing in the machine to find a
cause of the trouble.
Replace one after another : If a trouble is no longer analyzed, this device uses a method in
which a part is replaced one after another. The parts to be re-
placed are listed in the order having high replacement frequency
and high probability of trouble.
6-3
6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting
The level-1 troubleshooting sorts the troubles.

If "E ENGINE nnnn" is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, perform the troubleshooting
following this unrecoverable error code (see Section 6.3.1).
If a paper jam occurs frequently, enter the engine maintenance mode to check the paper jam
situations and perform the troubleshooting (see Section 6.3.2).
For other cases, make judgment from the symptom and perform the troubleshooting (see
Section 6.3.3).
6.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description

(1 / 2)
Unrecoverable
Description
error codes
2020 BM01 (waster toner bottle vibrating motor) trouble
2021, 2022 HM01 (heat roller pulse motor) trouble
2023 PM01 (process motor) trouble
2024, 202A GM01 (developer pulse motor) trouble
2026, 202B TM01 (paper feed pulse motor) trouble
2027, 202C FM01 (paper feed pulse motor 1) trouble
2028, 202D FM02 (paper feed pulse motor 2) trouble
2029, 202E FM03 (paper feed pulse motor 3) trouble
2030 Power supply failure (50 Hz/60 Hz evaluation value is faulty)
2032 High voltage power supply failure (overload occurred in high voltage output)
2033 Power supply failure (interrupt does not occur when the power is turned off)
2035 LED head correction data transfer error (time out)
2036 LED head correction data transfer error (header error)
2037 LED head correction data transfer error (footer error)
2081 TH02 (over thermistor) detected overheat of fuser temperature
2082 TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure
Extremely high temperature (cables could be shorted)
2085 TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be
shorted) or extremely low temp (cables could be disconnected)
2086 TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) exceeded the LED head upper limit temp
2087 TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted)
6-4

(2 / 2)
Unrecoverable
Description
error codes
20C1 to 20C3 NVRAM checksum error (system parameter)
20C4 NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part replacement)
20C5 NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part cleaning)
20C6 NVRAM checksum error (user-defined engine parameter)
20C8 NVRAM checksum error (unrecoverable error log)
20C9 NVRAM checksum error (paper jam error log)
20CA NVRAM checksum error (process cartridge consumption log)
20D1 to 20D8 NVRAM checksum error (engine control parameter)
20E0 WDT (watchdog timer) overflow
2D01 NAK was transmitted to the controller 7 times but no command is returned
2D02 Response to the controller was made 7 times but ACK is not returned
2D03 When receiving data from controller, the line error was detected more than 100 times
2D04 Engine status transition was noticed to the controller 7 times but ACK is not returned
2F7C After F/W rewriting error occurred, the flash memory cannot be cleared (F/W cannot be restored)
2F7D After F/W rewriting error occurred, no data can be written in the flash memory (F/W cannot be
restored)
2F7E After F/W rewriting error occurred, checksum of F/W rewritten in the flash memory does not match
(F/W cannot be restored)
2F7F After F/W rewriting error occurred, F/W rewritten in the flash memory does not match the contents
of SRAM (F/W cannot be restored)
6-5
6.2.2 Paper Jam Error Codes and Description
Table 6-2 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes
Paper jam error

Description
codes
3491, 3492 When paper roll is rewound, arrival at PS04 is too early
3493, 3494 When paper roll is rewound, paper exists in PS04 though preset paper pass time passed
3500 Paper is located at PS04 (register) position
3593, 3594 Paper trail edge does not leave PS05 though preset paper pass time passed
3600 Paper is located in PS04 (suction) position
3700 Paper is located at PS07 (fuser) position
3042 to 3047 Trouble when cutter blade moves
6-6
6.3.1 "Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting
(1) "2020" troubleshooting
This trouble occurs if the BM01 motor does not rotate.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (09) that corresponds to the displayed
error code to turn on the motor.
Is the motor rotating?
Y N
Is +24VDC present between CN7-1 and CN7-5 of PCB-ASSY-MEC?
Y N
◆ Check CBL07 for a disconnection or short.
◆ Check low voltage power unit.
◆ Check if the load on mechanical system is large.

◆ Check CBL03B and CBL032 for a short.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
(2) "2021" / "2022" / "2024" / "202A" troubleshooting
These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.
First, check if the interlock switches (INT1 and INT3) are normal.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (07 to 08) that corresponds to the
displayed error code to turn on the motor.
Y N
Y N

◆ HM trouble
Check CBL05A and CBL051 for a short.
◆ GM trouble
Check CBL05A, CBL51 and CBL052 for a short.
6-7
These troubles occur if the PM01 motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (06) that corresponds to the displayed
error code to turn on the motor.
Y N
Y N

◆ Check CBL06A and CBL061 for a short or open circuit.
If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
Mechanical system check

◆ Check the clutch for operation.
◆ Check the gear for damage or galling.
If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
6-8
(4) "2026" / "202B" / "2027" / "202C" "2028" / "202D" / "2029" / "202E" troubleshooting
These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (10 to13) that corresponds to the
displayed error code to turn on the motor.
Y N
Is +24VDC present between CN21-1 and CN21-2 of PCB-ASSY-RFU
(motor driver bord)?
Y N
◆ Check CBL07 and CBL 071 for a disconnection or short.
Are other motors rotating?

Y N
◆ Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit.

◆ Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit.
- TM trouble
Check CBL22 for a short or open circuit.
- FM01 trouble
Check CBL23 and CBLR231 for a short or open circuit.
- FM02 trouble
- FM03 trouble
Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board)
Mechanical system check

◆ Check the clutch for operation.
◆ Check the gear for damage or galling.
6-9
Input of frequency counter pulses from the power supply is faulty.
◆ Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit.

If not so, replace the low voltage power unit or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
Either of CH1 to CH4 of high voltage outputs is shorted.

Turn on the CH1 to CH4 one by one to check if the discharge sound is heard or the monitor
output of high voltage power is stable so as to identify which channel is shorted.
For a monitoring method of high voltage power unit, see 12.1.
Enter the maintenance code 09 in the engine maintenance mode. Select a subcode that corresponds to
each process.
CH1 failure (subcode 01)

◆ Check the process cartridge (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials,
or slack. Check the grid for dirtiness or slack.)
◆ Check the CBL-HV1 for a short.
If so, replace respective parts.

◆ Check the developer (Check the developer bias contact for a touch.)
◆ Check the CBL-HV22, CBL-HV2, CBL-HV21 for a short.

◆ Check the transfer unit (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or
slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.)

◆ Check the separator (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or
slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.)
If all channels are faulty

Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit.
6-10
The running distance data may not be saved in the NVRAM on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board) when the plotter was turned off in the previous job. Possible causes of this error will be low
voltage power unit, faulty PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board), or faulty CBL09.
Turn off the plotter once, and after several seconds, turn it on again.
Does 2033 error occur?
Y N
Check if the running distance is correct, and if OK, the plotter is normal.
NG, go to the next step.
Referring to Appendix A.2.1 (4), check the LED indication on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board) when the power is turned off.
Are LED 4 to 8 on PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) turned on?
Y N
Replace lower voltage power unit.
◆ Check the CBL09 for a short or open circuit.
◆ Check the 5 V of PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
(8) "2035" / "2036" / "2037" troubleshooting
These troubles will occur when the "config" (writing of correction data) for the LED head was not
executed normally.
Is +5VDC present between CN4 (CN5)-1 and CN4 (CN5)-4 of LED head?
Y N
◆ Check the CBL13 and CBL121 for a disconnection or short.
◆ Check the low voltage power supply.
If not so, replace the LED head.
◆ Check the CBL08

If not so, replace the LED head or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
6-11
◆ Check the TH01 (fuser control thermistor) for a mounting state (such as disconnected connector,
remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01).
◆ Check the TH01 contact surface with the heat roller for dirtiness. Clean as necessary.
◆ Check the TH01 for an open circuit.
If so, replace the TH01.
◆ Check the CBL45 and CBL04B for a short.
◆ Check the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is less
than 1k .
◆ Check the CBL04B and CBL045 for a short.
If the trouble is not removed, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
(10) "2082" / "2087" troubleshooting
◆ Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of
thermistor is less than 1k .
Check respective fans for operation one by one.

Check the BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation.
Does each fan operate normally?
Y N
Replace faulty fan.
Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short.
◆ Check the TH01 and TH04.
If so, replace TH01 or TH04.
◆ Check the CBL04B and CBL045.
◆ Check the ozone filter for clogging.
If clogged, replace the ozone filter.
Note: Check that the halogen lamp turns on and off repeatedly at a several
second interval.
6-12
Check if the halogen lamp (fuser lamp) turns on.
WARNING
- Before checking the halogen lamp on/off operation, make sure that fuser unit
temperature has dropped sufficiently.
Note: After the halogen lamp was checked for its lighting, immediately turn off the
halogen lamp (turn off the power switch or open the cover).
Does the halogen lamp turn on?

Y N
Check the THM (thermal fuse) for continuity.
Is the fuse continuous?
Y N
Replace the Thermal Fuse Assy.
*After the fuse was replaced, execute again "2084" troubleshooting.
◆ Check the FL01 and FL02 (lamp) for continuity.

Is the lamp continuous?
Y N
Replace the halogen lamp which is not continuous.
◆ Check the CBL17, CBL171 and CBL- HTR for an open circuit.
If the trouble is not removed, replace the low voltage current or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine
control board).
◆ Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) and the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a
mounting state (such as disconnected connector, remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01,
TH02, or TH04).
◆ Check the contact surface of TH01, TH02, and TH04 with the heat roller for dirtiness.
Clean as necessary.
◆ Check the TH01, TH02 and TH04 for a short or open circuit.
If so, replace TH01, TH02 and TH04.
6-13
◆ Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is
less than 1kΩ.
If so, replace the LED head.
Check respective fans for operation one by one.

Check the BL01 (suction fan) BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation.
Does each fan operate normally?
Y N
Replace faulty fan.
Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short.

◆ Check the TH03.
If so, replace the LED head.
◆ Check the ozone filter for clogging.
If clogged, replace the ozone filter.
(15) "20C1 to 20CA" / "20D1 to 20D8" / "20E0" troubleshooting
(16) "2D01 to 2D04" troubleshooting
◆ Check the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (controller board).

If so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (engine control board).
(17) "2F7C to 2F7F" troubleshooting
6-14
6.3.2 "Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting
(1) Power ON jam checkout procedure
This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble for which a paper jam error message is
displayed on the LCD before printing.
Note: When two or more doors are displayed on the LCD, check the sensors that
correspond to all doors.
Example:
If the specified door is one If the specified doors are two or more
OP E N DOOR X O P E N DOOR X , X
R EMO V E P A P E R R E MO V E P A P E R
Open Doo r X Open Doo r X , X

Remove Pape r Remov e Pape r
1 Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode, and check corresponding
sensors listed below from respective subcodes for each target door involved in paper jam.
Mainte-
Paper jam
nance Sensor Items to be checked
target door
code
- Light enters the sensor.
PS30 - CBL28-PS30 short (GND)
(A0 paper size sensor) - CBL28-PS30 loose connector or disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
(A1 paper jam4 sensor) - CBL28-PS31 loose connector or disconnection (open)
"Door 1" or - Sensor failure
"Door 2" or
"Door 3" - Light enters the sensor.
(A2 paper size sensor) - CBL28-PS32 loose connector or disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
(paper size sensor) - CBL28-PS04 loose connector or disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
PS05 - CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 short (GND)
"Door 4" or
(paper registration - CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 loose connector or
"Door 5"
sensor) disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 short (GND)
PS06
- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 loose connector or
(suction jam sensor)
disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
"Door 6"
- CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) short (GND)
PS07
- CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) loose connector or
(fuser jam sensor)
disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
6-15
2 Replace the sensor, and when the sensor is kept on even if each sensor code is entered, replace
the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
The sensor itself goes low when the light is intercepted.
(2) "Frequent paper jam" troubleshooting
This troubleshooting is used to guide which paper jam troubleshooting is to be executed

according to the paper jam situations.
Note: Turn off the power switch and check that no paper remains in the machine.
Turn on the power switch. Is the paper jam door displayed on LCD?
Y N
Perform the "frequent paper jam" troubleshooting.
Enter the maintenance code 05 in the engine maintenance mode. Check the last ten jam
codes displayed on the LCD. At this time, perform the troubleshooting one by one, starting
from the code that occurred most frequently.
◆ Jam code "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting
◆ Jam code "3401" / "3402" troubleshooting
◆ Jam code "37A1" / "37A2" troubleshooting
Perform the "Power ON jam checkout procedure."
6-16
(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" / troubleshooting
◆ Check if paper chips or foreign materials remain in the cutter unit.

◆ Check if wrong type of paper is used.
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 17 or 18 to sense
RE01 or RE02 (cutter left or right home position switch).
Is the ON ⇔ OFF display changed?
Y N
◆ Check the CBL27 and CBL62 for a short or open circuit.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine
control board), next, replace the cutter unit (RE01, RE02 faulty) in the following order.
◆ Check the cutter blade stop position relative to the RE01 and RE02.
If the position is inadequate, replace the cutter unit.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board).
(4) Jam code "3401" / "3402" troubleshooting
Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early after start.
◆ Check the paper or paper flange for setting.

◆ Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.
◆ Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).
In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to
check the cutter home position and cutter motion.
Is PS04 mounted correctly? (PS04 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)

Y N
If so, replace the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4).
◆ Check the paper path up to the PS04.
6-17
Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too lately after start.
◆ Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remains in the PS04.
◆ Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 04 to sense PS04
(paper jam sensor 4).
Y N
◆ Check the PS04 for setting failure or faulty lever shape.
If not so, replace the PS04.
Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors).
Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?)
Y N
Execute "2021" troubleshooting ﬁ see Section 6.3.1 (2)

◆ Check the pinch roller for pressure.
At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early.


Y N
If so, replace the PS04.
Check the paper path from PS04 up to PS05 (paper registration sensor).
6-18
At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too slow.

◆ Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remain in the PS04.
(paper jam sensor 4).
Y N
◆ Check the CBL28 for short.
Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors).
Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?)
Y N
Execute “2021” troubleshooting ⇒ see Section 6.3.1 (2)
The top edge of paper reached to the PS05 (registration sensor) too early.

◆ Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).
◆ Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.

Y N
6-19
The top edge of paper reached the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow.
Y N
◆ Check the CBL04,CBL041 and CBL044 for a short.
If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS05.
◆ Check the paper path up to the PS04 from PS05.

◆ When the jammed paper remains in the cutter, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047"
troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion.
The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too early.
◆ Check the registration roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.

Y N

Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?)

Y N
◆ Check the paper feed for load.

◆ Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor).
6-20
The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow.
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 05, Check the PS05.
Y N
◆ Check the CBL04A, CBL041 and CBL044 for a short.
◆ Check the operation for CL04 (clutch (registration))

◆ Check the paper pass for over PS05.
◆ Check the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) → Motor FG signal does not come → Paper
cut length becomes long.
The paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early.
Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y N
◆ Check the CL04 (registration clutch) for operation and for ON/OFF synchronization with the
registration roller.
If so, check the LC04 for a mounting clearance.
6-21
The top edge of paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow.

Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 06, sense to PS06.
Y N
If so, persists, replace the PS06.
A mechanical trouble has occurred. Check the paper path.

◆ Check the paper for running condition and shape of leading edge.
◆ Check the belts for elongation.
◆ Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding.
◆ Check if the paper floats up by getting stuck to the separating finger (OPC).
◆ Check if the paper is separated from the drum correctly.
◆ Check the BL01 for operation.
◆ Check the ozone filter (for lifetime).
The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early.
Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y N
◆ Check the paper for running condition or for floating up by wrinkle or slack.
◆ Check the paper for floating up due to a paper separation failure from the drum.
◆ Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding.
◆ Check the ozone filter (for lifetime).
Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?)

Y N
◆ Check the paper feed for load.

◆ Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor).
6-22
The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow.
Y N
◆ Check the paper pass to PS07.

◆ Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding.
◆ Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets).
◆ Check the BL01 for operation (A4 size).
◆ Check the ozone filter (A4 size).
◆ Check the air bleeding (A4 size).
The bottom paper passed the PS07 (suction jam sensor) too early.
Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y N
◆ Check the paper path.

◆ Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light.
◆ Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets).
6-23
The top edge of paper reached the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow.
Y N
◆ Check the CBL04A, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short.

◆ Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding.
◆ Check the fuser drive mechanism.
◆ Check the paper for deformation by getting stuck to the separation finger (fuser, IN).
◆ Check if the paper is separated from the heat roller correctly.
◆ Check the ozone filter.
The bottom paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too early.
Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y N
◆ Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light.

◆ Check the fuser drive mechanism.
◆ Check the paper path.
(Check the paper guide in the vicinity of PS07 for shape, curve, or warp (clearance of path).
6-24
The bottom edge of paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow.
Y N
◆ Check the CBL04B, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short.
6-25
6.3.3 Troubleshooting by symptom
(1) "Door open check" troubleshooting
This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a "Door open check" is displayed on the
LCD of the control panel and the print is disabled though the doors and covers are closed.
Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 to 4 displayed on the LCD.
1 Troubleshooting of "CLOSE DOOR 5" display
CAUTION
- If INT3 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization
that returns the cutter to the home position. To avoid this, never touch the
INT3.
Open the cutter door (Door 5). The INT3 (cutter door interlock switch) turns on.
Does "CLOSE DOOR 5" display disappear?
Y N
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 21.
Is "On" displayed?
Y N
◆ Check the INT 3.
◆ Contacts in signal system of INT3 may be faulty.
◆ CBL03A, CBL031, or CBL14 may be disconnected or connected loosely.
◆ Check the INT 3 for its mounting state.

◆ Check the actuator for a breakage or bending.
◆ Check mechanical parts.
◆ Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
6-26
Note: Execute the troubleshooting of 4 first.
CAUTION
- If PS21 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization.
To avoid this, never touch the PS21.
◆ Check the PS21.

◆ Contacts in signal system of PS21 may be faulty, or PS21 itself may be faulty.
◆ CBL23, CBLR231, or ROLL1CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).
CAUTION
- If PS22 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization.
To avoid this, never touch the PS22.
◆ Check the PS22.

◆ Contacts in signal system of PS22 may be faulty, or PS22 itself may be faulty.
◆ CBL24, CBLR241, or ROLL2CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).
6-27
(2) "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" troubleshooting
This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the toner refilling is
displayed and the print is disabled though the toner was refilled.
Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 and 2 displayed on the LCD.
1 Troubleshooting of "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display
Set the toner cartridge and pull the lever to the right.
Does "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display on LCD disappear?
Y N
Is the "ON " displayed ?
Y N
◆ Check the MS04 (toner door open-close switch).
◆ Contacts of MS04 may be faulty.
◆ Check the MS04 for its mounting state.

◆ Check the toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.
◆ Check if the toner cartridge is set correctly.
6-28
2 Troubleshooting of "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" display
Push the lock of the lever with your finger to unlock, and pull the lever to the right.
Check the hopper of developer for toner remaining quantity.
Does the toner remain sufficiently (agitator shaft is not visible)?
Y N
Return the lever to the left.
Refill the toner.
Is "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" displayed again after one minute?

Y N
Is the "ON " displayed ?
Y N
◆ Check the TS01 (toner remaining quantity sensor).
Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard) or developer.
◆ Check the toner cartridge for its expiration date.

◆ Check if the toner was set after adequate agitation.
◆ Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard).
6-29
(3) "Replace waste toner cartridge" troubleshooting
This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the waste toner
cartridge replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the cartridge was replaced.
Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1, 2 displayed on LCD of the
control panel.
1 Troubleshooting of "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display
Set the waste toner cartridge.

Does "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear?
Y N
Is "On" displayed?
Y N
◆ Check the MS05 (waste toner cartridge detection switch).
◆ Contact fault of MS05.
◆ Check the CBL03A, CBL031, or MS05 ASSY disconnected .

◆ Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.
◆ Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly.
2 Troubleshooting of "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display
Set the new waste toner cartridge.

Does "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear?
Y N
Is "On" displayed?
Y N
◆ Check the MS05 (waste toner sensor).
(Check the TS02 by applying a magnetic screwdriver or steel plate such as a
metallic ruler, and full waste toner cartridge to the TS02.)
◆ Check the TS02 and the cartridge for clearance.
◆ Check the CBL03A, CBL031, and CBL035 for a short, loose connection, or
disconnection.

◆ Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.
◆ Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly.
6-30
(4) "Replace paper" troubleshooting
This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the paper
replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the paper was replaced.
Perform the following troubleshooting according to the display on LCD of the control panel.
Troubleshooting of "SET PAPER" display
Set the paper roll attached with the paper flange.

Does "SET PAPER" display on LCD disappear?
Y N
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 08, 09
and 10.
Is "On" displayed?
Y N
◆ Check the PS11 (Roll 1 sensor) or PS12 (Roll 2 sensor).
◆ Contacts in signal system of PS11 or PS12 may be faulty, or PS itself may be
faulty.
◆ Check the CBL23, CBLR231, CBL24, CBLR241, CBL25 and CBLR251
for a short.
◆ Check the PS11 or PS12 for its mounting position.
◆ Check the flange guide for its mounting position.
◆ Check the PS11 and PS12 for its mounting state.

◆ Check the flange guide for its mounting position.
◆ Check the paper flange for deformation or any fault.
◆ Check if the paper flange is set correctly.
Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board).
6-31
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting (Scanner)
This chapter describes the troubleshooting when a trouble occurred in the engine.
If a message as shown below is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, take a corrective
measure following an error code "nnnn" of the error message. For other troubles, take a
corrective measure according to the symptom.
nnnn :Error code
E SCANNER nnnn nnnn: Error code
Powe r O f f /On
7.1.1 Outline of Engine Troubleshooting
In troubleshooting the engine, first perform the level-1 troubleshooting to classify the trouble.
Then, progress the troubleshooting by performing the level-2 troubleshooting.
When you try to find a cause of trouble through the troubleshooting or check-chart, read the
procedure carefully to avoid fail. Also, if multiple causes are considerable, it is difficult to find
all causes at a time, and therefore you may have to perform the troubleshooting of the same title
again. In such a case, even for the same troubleshooting, the judgment in the midway may
change, thus requiring extreme care.
The level-1 troubleshooting is the first step of troubleshooting. The level-1 troubleshooting
clarifies whether an error code or other trouble symptom is present or not to provide a guide for
proceeding to the level-2 troubleshooting.
The level-2 troubleshooting provides the classified troubleshooting procedures according to the
error code, paper jam, and other various symptoms. As a trouble diagnostic method, a cause of
trouble can be found in a short time by performing the procedure given by the troubleshooting or
check-chart.
7-1
The level-1 troubleshooting isolates the troubles.

If "E ENGINE nnnn" is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, perform the troubleshooting
following this unrecoverable error code (see 7.3.1).
When the paper jam occurs frequently, enter the engine maintenance mode to check the paper
jam situations and perform the troubleshooting (see 7.3.2).
For other cases, make judgment from the symptom and perform the troubleshooting (see 7.3.3).
7.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Code List
Table 7-1 Unrecoverable Error Code List

0103h Command sequence error
2101h SDRAM1 memory error
2102h SDRAM2 memory error
If the device is not reset by turning it off
2103h SDRAM3 memory error once and turning it on again, hear from
2201h FPGA configuration error the user about the situation when the
error occurred, and upgrade the firmware
2301h EEPROM1 read/write error
2302h EEPROM2 read/write error component accordingly. (If case of
2401h Hardware chip malfunctioning replacement, the MSC board is subject to
change.)
2402h Hardware chip malfunctioning
2501h EEPROM engine parameter sum error (both)
2601h Controller communication error
2801h ISI board EEPROM read/write error once and turning it on again, hear from
the user about the situation when the
2802h ISI board FPGA communication error
component accordingly. (If case of
2803h ISI board EEPROM sum error replacement, the scanner unit or ISI board
is subject to change.)
2A01h Shading offset auto adjustment error once and turning it on again, hear from
the user about the situation when the
2B01h Tone curve data checksum error
component accordingly. (If case of
2B02h Dither pattern data checksum error replacement, the MSC board is subject to
change.)
7-2
7.3 Level 2 Troubleshooting
7.3.1 "Unrecoverable Error Code" Troubleshooting
(1) Errorcode 2101/2102/2103/2201/2301/2302/2401/2402/2501/2B01/2B02
Replace the PCB-ASSY-MSC2 (scanner control board).
(2) Error code 2601
Replace the PCB-ASSY-MSC2 (scanner control board). If the error persists, replace the PCB-ASSY-
MCR2 (RIP control board).
(3) Error code 2801/2802/2803
Check the harness (CBLS06) connected between CIS unit and PCB-ASSY-MSC2. If the error persists,
replace the PCB-ASSY-MSC2 (scanner control board). If the error still occurs, replace the CIS unit.
7.3.2 Troubleshooting on Symptom
(1) "CHECK OPEN COVER" Troubleshooting
These diagnostic procedures are used to analyze those troubles where the open cover message is
displayed on the control panel although the relevant cover is being closed and, due to this, the original
cannot be transported.
Troubleshooting on "CLOSE THE DOOR"
Open the cover. Turn on PSS09 and PSS10. To this end, place something in the groove. Does the
error message "CLOSE THE DOOR" disappear from the VFD?
Y N
◆ Check the PSS09 and PSS10.
◆ Contacts in signal system of PSS09 and PSS10 may be faulty.
◆ CBL032, CBL031, or CBL03 may be disconnected or connected loosely.
◆ Insert the CN3 connector of PCB-ASSY-MSC2 may be faulty.
If not faulty, replace the PCB-ASSY-MSC2.
◆ Check the cover both edge levers for break or bending.

◆ Check the PSS09 and PSS10 for mounting state.
7-3
(2) "CHECK ORIGINAL JAM 1102/1103/1104" Troubleshooting
These failure diagnostic procedures are used to analyze those troubles where the original jam error
message appears on the control panel although the paper is not jammed and, due to this, the original
cannot be transported.
Troubleshooting on "OPEN THE COVER AND REMOVE ORIGINAL"

◆ Check the PSS06, PSS07, and PSS08.
◆ Check the PSS06, PSS07, and PSS08 for mounting state.
◆ Contacts in signal system of PSS06, PSS07, and PSS08 may be faulty.
(3) "CHECK ORIGINAL SET ERROR" Troubleshooting
These diagnostic procedures are used to analyze those troubles where the original set error message
appears on the control panel although the original is placed in the center of the document table and,
due to this, the original cannot be transported.
Troubleshooting on "SET ORIGINAL IN CENTER"

◆ Check PSS01, PSS02, PSS03, PSS04, and PSS05 for adhesion of paper chips, dust, and other
foreign materials.
◆ Check the PSS01, PSS02, PSS03, PSS04, and PSS05 for mounting state.
◆ Contacts in signal system of PSS01, PSS02, PSS03, PSS04, and PSS05 may be faulty.
(4) "CHECK NO MOTOR ROTATION" Troubleshooting
These failure diagnostic procedures are used to analyze those troubles where the motor is not operated
although the original is placed in the correct position and, due to this, the original cannot be transported.
Troubleshooting on "NO MOTOR OPERATION"

◆ CBLS04, CBLS041, or CBLS042 may be disconnected or connected loosely.
If not faulty, replace the motor, SM01, and PCB-ASSY-MSC2 in this order.
7-4
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)
This chapter describes the type of print quality troubles and its corrective measures.
8.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Method
If a print quality trouble occurs, print an engine test pattern saved in the memory inside the
engine to check if there is a failure at the engine side (hereinafter a printing of this engine test
pattern is called the engine test print).
The print quality troubleshooting method is classified into the following two depending on the
contents of failure.
- For the failures in the plotting length accuracy or registration, measure the printed engine
test pattern at the position shown in "8.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting
Specification Failure" to judge whether the measured value satisfies the reference value.
- For the failures in the background or print density, check doubtful parts from the symptom
to take a corrective measure. See "8.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality
Failure."
8-1
8.1.1 Type of Engine Test Patterns
To output engine test patterns, enter maintenance code 10 in the engine maintenance mode,
select the appropriate subcode, and execute the engine test print. For procedures on how to print
test patterns, see Section 2.3.10.
Table 8-1 shows the relationship between subcodes and engine test patterns.
Table 8-1 Engine Test Pattern List
Subcode Engine test pattern Evaluation item
01 Pattern 1 Vertical zebra (thick vertical stripes) - Ghost

02 Pattern 2 Checkerboard - Print density / base paper soiling
Horizontal zebra (thick horizontal
03 Pattern 3 - Ghost
stripes)
- Jitter
04 Pattern 4 1 by 3 horizontal
- Nonuniform LED illumination
- Skip/smear
05 Pattern 5 2 by 2 horizontal - Formation of toner layer on the magnet
roller
06 Pattern 6 2 by 14 horizontal - Resolution
- Image uniformity
- Adjustment of LED head joint
07 Pattern 7 1-dot line, 64-dot square mesh
- Adjustment of fixation position
08 Pattern 8 1-dot mes - Reproducibility of thin lines
- Measurement and adjustment of print length
09 Pattern 9 2-dot mesh
- Measurement and adjustment of registration
10 Pattern 10 4-dot mesh - Continuous printing
11 Pattern 11 2 by 2 vertical, 2-dot shift - Inuniform LED illumination
- Image density / base paper soiling / line
12 Pattern 12 black / white + Mesh
width measurement
13 Pattern 13 Mesh + scale - Cut length accuracy / cut squareness
- Plotting length accuracy / plotting
14 Pattern 14 Mesh + slant line,1-dot squareness
- Measurement and adjustment of registration
15 Pattern 15 Mesh + slant line, 2-dot
- Skew
Mesh + slant line, (1 and 2 dots - Reproducibility of thin lines
16 Pattern 16
mixed) - Continuous printing
17 Pattern 17 Solid black - Image uniformity
18 Pattern 18 Solid white - Adjustment of fixing roller nip pressure
19 Pattern 19 1 by 3 vertica
- Nonuniform LED illumination
20 Pattern 20 2 by 2 vertical
Engine test pattern image outputs are shown on the next page.
Note: Test patterns on the next page are only example showing what patterns will
be output. Pattern sizes and intervals are different from those actually output.
Test patterns 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 17 are represented in solid black. But, they
have different images in actual output.
Test patterns 8, 9, and 10 are actually different with respect to line thickness.
Test patterns 14, 15, and 16 are actually different with respect to line
thickness and pattern combination.
Test patterns 18, or solid white pattern, is omitted in this example.
8-2
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Pattern 3 Pattern 4
Pattern 5
Pattern 6
Pattern 7
Pattern 11
Pattern 17
Pattern 8 Pattern 12
Pattern 9
Pattern 10
Pattern 13 Pattern 14
Pattern 15
Pattern 16
8-3
8.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure
8.2.1 Plotting Specification and Measuring Method
Note: To check registrations (top edge and side), always print the appropriate test
patterns. Also, replace the normal paper and the tracing paper and execute the
engine test print. Sizes and intervals are different from those actually output.
No. Item Measurement position Standard Remarks
1 Accuracy of Main scan direction : Measure the horizontal H that - Main scan direction: Engine test pattern 15
plotting length is composed of 74 blocks. 802±0.5 % (±4 mm)
Sub scan direction : Measure the vertical dimension - Sub scan direction:
V that is composed of 104 blocks. 1127.1±0.5 % (±5.6 mm)
* Output three sheets in succession and measure the third

sheet.
* Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and
measure the test sheet.
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
2 Plotting Measure the horizontal dimension H composed of 74 - ± 0.2% Engine test pattern 15
squareness blocks, vertical dimension B composed of 74 blocks, and
diagonal dimension C to calculate the squareness using the
following equation.
{ (C - H2 + B 2 ) / H2+B2 } × 100
* Output three sheets in succession and measure the third

sheet.
* Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and
measure the test pattern.
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
2 block H
2 block
Paper output direction
C
V
8-4
3 Top edge Access the K'th block counted from the right edge, - A1 vertical direction: - Engine test pattern 15
registration and measure V that is the vertical dimension of the 21.7±3.0 mm
two frontmost blocks. - A2 vertical direction:
21.7±3.0 mm
* Output three sheets in succession and measure the - A3 vertical direction:
third sheet. 21.7±3.0 mm
* Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and - A4 horizontal direction:
measure the test pattern. 21.7±3.0 mm
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
* A1 vertical direction: K = 27 blocks.
A2 vertical direction: K = 20 blocks.
A3 vertical direction: K = 15 blocks.
A4 horizontal direction: K = 15 blocks.
4 Center Access the second block counted from the top edge, - A1 vertical direction: - Engine test pattern 15
registration and measure H1 that is the horizontal dimension of 21.7±3.0 mm
the two rightmost blocks. - A2 vertical direction:
21.7±3.0 mm
third sheet. 21.7±3.0 mm
* Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and - A4 horizontal direction:
measure the test pattern. 21.7±3.0 mm
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
5 Skew Access the L'th block counted from the top edge, and - A0 vertical direction: - Engine test pattern 15
measure H2 that is the horizontal dimension of the ±5.6 mm
two rightmost blocks. Subtract H2 from H1 to get - A1 vertical direction:
skew. ±4 mm
- A2 vertical direction:
* A0 vertical direction: L = 104 blocks. ±2.7 mm
A1 vertical direction: L = 74 blocks. - A3 vertical direction:
A2 vertical direction: L = 50 blocks. ±1.8 mm
A3 vertical direction: L = 33 blocks. - A4 horizontal direction:
A4 horizontal direction: L = 22 blocks. ±1.2 mm
K V
2 block H1
H2
8-5
6 Cut length accuracy Measure L, which is the overall length from top to - A0 vertical direction: - Engine test pattern 15
bottom edge, at the rightmost position. 1189±6.0 mm
- A1 vertical direction:
* Output three sheets in succession and measure the 841±4.0 mm
third sheet. - A2 vertical direction:
* Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and 594±3.0 mm
measure the test pattern. - A3 vertical direction:
420±3.0 mm
- A4 horizontal
direction: 210±3.0 mm
7 Cut squareness Measure V1 (right edge) and V2 (left edge) at the - A0 vertical direction: - Engine test pattern 15
second block counted from the top edge. Subtract V2 ±3.0/841 mm
from V1. - A1 vertical direction:
±2.0/594 mm
third sheet. ±1.4/420 mm
* Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and - A3 vertical direction:
measure the test pattern. ±1.0/297 mm
* 1 block = 10.837 mm - A4 horizontal direction:
±1.0/297 mm
V1
V2
8.2.2 Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure
The parameters that do not meet the required standards must be corrected referencing to the
appropriate procedures specified in Section 12.4 "Correction of Plotting Parameter."
8-6
8.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure
Table 8-2 lists the image quality defects to be corrected. Troubleshooting procedures for
respective items are described in the following paragraphs.
Table 8-2 Image Quality Defects List
Item Description
(1) Fog All or part of image is fogged.
(2) Uneven image density The image density is not uniform in the same print.
(3) Fluctuation of image density The image density is instable among prints.
among prints
(4) Low image density The image density is low.
(5) Lacking (partial) A part of the image is lost.
(6) Poor image reproduction When the pattern is reproduced, the defect such as lacking is generated.
(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak) The image is lost in the form of horizontal streak.
(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak) The image is lost in the form of vertical streak.
(9) Black stripe on print Black stripes are printed on the paper partially or entirely.
(10) Black stripe (horizontal) Several black horizontal stripes are printed on the paper.
(11) Black stripe (vertical) Several black vertical stripes are printed on the paper.
(12) Black banding (vertical) Black bands are printed on the paper.
(13) Black spot Black spots are generated.
(14) Unfixed toner When the image is rubbed, the toner is separated from the paper.
(15) Registration defect The printed image is shifted vertically or horizontally.
(16) Image slanting The image is printed slantingly.
(17) Blank copy No image is printed on the paper.
(18) Image overlap The same image is printed in duplicate.
(19) Skip The section that should be reproduced horizontally is not generated.
(20) Smear Duplicated or smeary image is generated.
(21) Solid The paper is printed in complete black instead of image.
8-7
(1) Fog
Print sample Trouble symptom and check method
The image is fogged entirely or partially.

◆ Print engine test patterns. The background is fogged.
Cause Measure
1. The developer blade suffers from poor charging 1. Take the following action(s) depending on the cause
performance for reason(s) shown below. identified.
◆ The blade is worn/damaged. ◆ Clean or replace the blade.
◆ The magnet roller surface is soiled/damaged. ◆ Clean or replace the magnet roller.
◆ The DV spacers on both sides of the magnet roller ◆ Check the magnet roller surface and, if damaged,
are worn/damaged, or contact surfaces on both ends replace the roller.
of the drum are damaged/worn.
◆ The DV spacers are faulty. ◆ Replace the spacers if damaged.
◆ The drum surface that contacts the DV spacers is faulty.
2. The contact spring of the developer unit is in imperfect 2. Check the contact spring of the developer unit. Replace
contact. the spring if necessary.
3. The charge unit is being discharged by itself or to other 3. Check the operating condition of the charge unit. (Turn
parts/materials. on the charge unit , maintenance code <08> "01") Replace
the unit if necessary.
4. ◆ The drum is soiled or degraded. 4. ◆ Replace the process cartridge.
◆ The drum is photodegraded (the drum is exposed to the ◆ When the process cartridge was exposed to fluorescent
lighting system and the like). lamps for 10 minutes, leave it in the dark place for
about 12 hours to restore the optical performance.
8-8
Cause Measure
5. The charge elimination LED suffers from imperfect 5. Check the charge elimination LED for turn-on.
lighting or soiling. (maintenance <08> "05")
Clean the LED.
6. Unspecified toner is used. 6. Instruct the user to use only the specified toner. Clean the
entire developer unit.
7. ◆ The output of the charge unit is high or low. 7. ◆ Measure the current on the charge unit monitor terminal
◆ The charge unit is imbalanced between left and right. CH1 of the high-voltage power unit. See Section
12.1.1.
◆ Check the charge unit roller 1 for wear, damage, and
soiling. Replace it if necessary.
8. The bias output of the developer unit is high or low. 8. ◆ Adjust the developer unit bias. See Sections 12.1.2
and 12.1.3.
◆ Check CBL22 of the developer unit bias for connection.
9. The separator is not discharging the electricity. 9. ◆ Check the data accessed with the code <08> "04."
◆ Adjust the separation unit bias. See Section 12.1.5.
10. The toner is fed too much. 10. Replace the magnet roller, as well as DV spacers at both
◆ The space between drum and roll becomes short due to ends of the roller.
worn DV spacers.
8-9
(2) Uneven image density
◆ Print engine test patterns.

The density and line thickness are nonuniform on a place-by-
place basis.
Cause Measure
1. The bias output of the developer unit is low or the contact 2. ◆ Check the bias output of the developer unit.
spring is in imperfect contact. (maintenance <09> "02")
◆ Check the contact spring for contact condition.
2. The developer blade is worn entirely or partially. 3. ◆ When the blade has been used to output more than
80000 sheets, replace it.
◆ When the blade is remarkably worn, replace it.
3. The LED head and lens are soiled. 4. Clean the LED head and lens.
4. The drum is soiled or degraded. 5. Replace the process cartridge.
5. The magnet roller is worn. 6. Replace the magnet roller.
6. The photosensitive drum is not grounded completely. 7. Check the drum for grounding.
◆ Check the frame leaf spring.
◆ Check the installation condition of the process
cartridge.
7. The toner is not fed uniformly due to worn magnet roller. 8. ◆ Check the toner formation on the magnet roller. If the
thickness of the toner layer is substantially fluctuating,
replace the roller.
8. The luminous strobe width of the LED head is 9. ◆ Check the maintenance code <12> "731" to "733" data.
improperly set. Check the luminous energy indicated on the LED head
to verify the luminous strobe width can generate the
energy. If the strobe width is not properly set, adjust it.
See Section 12.3.
◆ If the trouble is not removed, enter the strobe width
larger than the setting to recheck the machine condition.
9. The remaining toner is short. 10. Check the toner amount sensor (TS01) and refill the toner.
10. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the 11. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller.
developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.
8-10
(3) Fluctuation of image density among prints
◆When the same test pattern is continuously printed on several

sheets, the image density is different among those printouts.
Cause Measure
1. The drum is soiled or degraded. 1. Clean or replace the process cartridge.
2. The bias output of the developer unit is incorrect. ◆Check the bias output of the developer unit.
(maitenancecode 09<02>) Adjust the bias output
according to the result. See Sections 12.1.2 and 12.1.3.
◆Check the contact spring for contact condition.
3. The toner is short due to worn magnet roller. (This trouble 3. Check the toner formation on the magnet roller. If the
is prone to occur at high print rate.) toner layer is thin or the layer is not formed, replace the
roller.
4. The electrification capacity of the toner is decreased due 4. Check the blade. Clean or replace the blade. (If the number
to worn or damaged magnet roller. (This trouble is prone of output sheets has exceeded the value defined as blade
to occur at high print rate.) service life, replace the blade.)
5. Unspecified toner is used. 5. Instruct the user. Clean the entire developer unit.
8-11
(4) Low image density
◆The density of the copied image is low. The line width

equivalent to 3 dots is thin.
Cause Measure
2. The drum is degraded. 2. Replace the process cartridge.
3. The LED duty is low. 3. Check the LED duty (maintenance code <12> "731,"
"732," "733"). See Section 12.3 for the standard value.
4. The developer blade is worn. 4. Replace the developer blade.
5. The bias output of the developer unit is low. 5. ◆Check the developer bias voltage. See Sections 12.1.2
and 12.1.3.
◆Check the developer spring for contact.
6. The charge unit discharges electricity excessively. 6. Check the discharge level (maintenance code <09> "01").
Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal
CH1) See Section 12.1.1.
7. The transfer unit discharges the electricity faulty. 7. ◆Check the charge wire (2) for looseness.
◆Clean the charge wire (2).
◆Check the transfer unit for installation condition.
Check the discharge level of the transfer unit (maintenance
code <09> "03").
Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal
CH3) See Section 12.1.4.
8. The drum is not grounded completely. 8. Check the drum for grounding.
◆Check the frame leaf spring.
◆Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.
9. Unspecified toner is used. 9. Instruct the user.
10. The developing clearance is increased due to soiled or 10. ◆Check the DV spacers.
scratched DV spacers. ◆Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.
8-12
(5) Lacking (partial)
◆A part of the image is not printed.
Cause Measure
1. The paper is dampened. 1. ◆Replace the paper.

◆Instruct the user.
2. The toner is short or unevenly charged. 2. ◆Refill the toner.
◆If the toner is run out, check the toner amount sensor.
◆While there is no toner, check the magnet roller surface
for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.
3. The drum is degraded or soiled. 3. Replace the process cartridge. Cleaning photodegrades the
drum. So, wait until the photodegradation is no longer
observed.
◆Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance
code <09>"03").
◆Check the current consumption at the high-voltage
power unit terminal CH3. See Section 12.1.4.
5. The paper does not contact the drum completely during 5. ◆Check the clearance between drum bottom and the
the transfer process due to faulty paper feed such as skew. transfer guide plate.
◆For the skew, see "No. 5" in Section 8.2.1.
6. Correct pressure is not applied due to deformed developer 6. Replace the developer blade.
blade.
7. The magnet roller surface is scratched or worn. 7. Replace the magnet roller.
8. The DV spacers are damaged. 8. ◆Check the DV spacers.

◆Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.
9. Bits are missing. 9. Conduct the corrective action specified in "Poor image
reproduction." See the next page.
10. The paper path is not parallel. 10. Adjust the installation position of the fixation.
See Section 12.4.2
11. The agitator is deformed or incorrectly mounted. 11. Replace the agitator spring.
12. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the 12. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller.
developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.
8-13
(6) Poor image reproduction
When test patterns are output, patterns are reproduced to some

extent but the following troubles are observed.
◆Faulty character
◆Bits are missing.
◆The image is missing in the form of 8-mm wide vertical band.
◆The image is repeated (randomly).
Cause Measure
1. The LED head is defective. 1. Check the LED head for operation.
2. The high-voltage power unit is incorrectly adjusted. 2. Adjust the high-voltage power unit. See Section 12.1.
8-14
(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak)
◆When the test pattern is printed, horizontal streaks are

generated, leading to imperfect image.
Cause Measure

◆Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance
code <09>"03").
◆Check the load current at the high-voltage power unit
terminal CH3. See Section 12.1.4.
3. The bias of the developer unit suffers from imperfect 3. ◆Check the contact developer spring for contact
contact or unstable output. condition.
◆Check the developer bias output (maintenance code
<08>"02"). Adjust the bias output. See Sections 12.1.2
and 12.1.3.
4. ◆The magnet roller is rotation incorrectly. 4. ◆Turn the gears of the developer unit to check the magnet
roller for rotation.
◆The drive system (gears) of the developer unit suffers ◆Check the drive system of developer unit.
from damage or galling.
◆The DV spacers are damaged or rotation is incorrectly. ◆Check DV spacers for damage.
◆Check the contact surfaces between DV spacers and
the drum for deformation and dust adhesion.
8-15
(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak)
◆When the test pattern is printed, blank space is generated

vertically in the form of streak.
Cause Measure

2. The charge wire 2 is soiled. 2. Clean or replace the charge wire (2).
3. The toner is short or unevenly charged. 3. ◆Refill the toner

for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.
4. The pressure is substantially increased due to deformed 4. Check the developer blade for deformation.
developer blade. Foreign materials are mixed into the
machine.
5. The LED head is faulty. 5. Check the LED head for operation.
◆If the LED is faulty, replace the head.
6. A part of the magnet roller is worn or scratched, resulting 6. Check the magnet roller surface. Check whether the toner
in short toner feeding. layer is formed on the surface and, if not, replace the
roller.
7. A soft blocking (coagulation of toner brought by 7. Instruct the user. Clean the entire developer unit.
decreased fluidity) occurs in the developer unit due to
application of unspecified toner.
9. The LED head does not emit light. 9. Check the LED head for operation.
10. The charge unit grid is soiled. 10. Clean the grid.
11. The toner on the magnet roller is partially thick. 11. Check whether the developer blade (DV) is scratched and,
if so, replace the blade.
8-16
(9) Black stripe on print
◆When the engine test pattern is printed, the pattern is not

reproduced. Instead, black stripes are generated on the image
partially or entirely.
Cause Measure
1. The defects appear in the form of black or white stripes 1. Check the LED head for operation.
depending on the type of soiling or defective patterns. If the relevant section is turned on, replace the LED head.
8-17
(10) Black stripe (horizontal)
◆When the test pattern is printed, black bands are generated

on the paper.
Cause Measure
1. Charge wire 1 is soiled or foreign materials adhere on the 1. Replace the process cartridge.
wire.
2. The developer blade is damaged or in imperfect contact. 2. Replace the developer blade.
3. The LED head is faulty. 3. Check the LED head for operation.
4. There are members or foreign materials that contact the 4. Check whether there are members or foreign materials that
paper in the paper path between the drum and the heat contact the paper.
roller.
5. In the paper path between the drum and the heat roller, the 5. ◆Check the heat roller and suction drive systems.
paper is sagged to resultantly get in touch with machine ◆Check the evacuation performance and operating
members. condition of the suction fan.
Following lists the outer diameter and perimeter of the roller-related parts. Locate the failed part
from cycles of the trouble observed in the print sample, and then replace or clean it.
Parts Outer diameter (mm) Perimeter (mm)
Photosensitive drum 60 188
Heat roller 50 157
Backup roller 53 167
Developing sleeve 40 63
LED roller 12 38
8-18
(11) Black stripe (vertical)
◆When the test pattern is printed, the image is reproduced but

several black stripes, whose width is less than 1 mm, are
generated in the paper feed direction.
Cause Measure
1. ◆The drum is striated. 1. Replace the process cartridge.

◆Foreign materials adhere to the drum. ◆Check whether there are foreign materials that contact
the drum around it.
◆ Check whether the separation finger (OPC) interferes
with the drum to scratch the drum.
2. The heat roller is striated. 2. Replace the heat roller.
◆Check whether there are foreign materials that contact
the roller heat around it.
3. The bit of the LED is lit. 3. When the relevant bit of the LED head is not turned off,
replace the LED head.
4. There are members or foreign materials that contact the 4. Check whether there are members or foreign materials that
paper in the paper path between the drum and the heat contact the paper.
roller.
5. In the paper path between drum and heat roller, the paper 5. ◆Check the heat roller and suction drive systems.
is sagged to resultantly get in touch with machine ◆Check the evacuation performance and operating
members. condition of the suction fan.
6. The cleaner blade is scratched. 6. Replace the process cartridge.
8-19
(12) Black banding (vertical)
◆When the test pattern is printed, the image is reproduced

but several black stripes are generated in the lateral
direction (the direction normal to the paper feed direction).
Cause Measure
1. The drum is damaged or soiled in the direction parallel 1. Replace the process cartridge. Or clean the drum if
to the drum axis. (In this case, the black stripes are soiled.
generated at the interval of 180 mm.)
2. The toner from the cleaner blade adheres to the drum 2. Clean the drum. Or replace the process cartridge
surface. (In this case, the black stripes are generated at
the interval of 180 mm.)
3. The heat roller surface is scratched. 3. Check or replace the heat roller.
4. The magnet roller surface is scratched. 4. When the magnet roller surface is scratched, replace it.
8-20
(13) Black spot
◆When the test pattern is printed, black spots are generated on

the paper.
Cause Measure
1. The drum is scratched or soiled. (The black sports are 1. Replace the process cartridge. Or, clean the drum if soiled.
generated at the interval of 180 mm.)
2. The heat roller surface is scratched or soiled. 2. Check and clean or replace the heat and backup rollers.
3. After the drum passes through the bottom of the drum, it 3. ◆Check and correct the poorly discharging separation
contacts the separation finger (OPC). unit. (Measure the current at the terminal CH4 of the
high-voltage power unit.) See Section 12.1.5.
◆Check the wire for breakage.
◆Check the separation unit for discharging (maintenance
code <09>"04").
◆Check the heat roller and backup rollers for faulty
rotation.
◆Check the belt (TRANS) for expansion and slip.
4. The toner is dropping from the separation finger (OPC) 4. ◆Clean the separation finger (OPC) and cleaner.
and cleaner. ◆Check the separation finger (OPC). Replace if
necessary.
5. The magnet roller surface is scratched to cause a leak 5. ◆Check the magnet roller surface for scratches. If it is
between the developer bias and the drum. damaged, replace the roller.
◆Check the bias output of the developer unit (maintenance
code <09>"02"). Adjust the bias output according to the
result. See Sections 12.1.2 and 12.1.3.
6. The charge wire (2) is loosened. 6. Replace the charge wire (2).
8-21
(14) Unfixed toner
◆If the copied characters and image are rubbed with hands,
they are easily separated from the paper.
Cause Measure
1. The paper is defective. 1. ◆Replace the paper.

2. The heat roller is scratched or deformed. 2. ◆Replace the roller.
3. The backup roller pressure is short. 3. Check and adjust the nip pressure (maintenance code
<09> "07," 08," "09" ).
For adjustment procedures, see Section 12.4.1.
8-22
(15) Registration defect
◆When the test pattern is printed, registrations are shifted

vertically or horizontally.
Cause Measure
1. Vertical shift: The registrations are adjusted incorrectly. 1. Adjust the top edge registration (maintenance code<11>
"01").
For adjustment procedures, see Section 12.4.6.
2. Vertical shift: The registration clutch CL04 is slippery or 2. Replace the clutch (registration) CL04.
galled.
3. Horizontal shift: The side registrations are adjusted 3. Adjust the side registrations. (maintenance code<11>
incorrectly. "02." for adjustment procedures, see Section 12.4.7)
4. Vertical shift: The registration torque limiter is faulty. 4. Replace the torque limiter.
8-23
(16) Image slanting
◆The paper is skewed and resultantly the image is printed

on the slant.
Cause Measure
1. The paper is not loaded correctly. 1. ◆Reload the paper.

2. The paper feed roller nonuniformly contacts the paper. 2. ◆Replace the paper feed roller.
Or, the roller is nonuniformly worn.
3. The registration roller nonuniformly contacts the pinch 3. ◆Replace the registration and pinch rollers.
roller. Or, either or both rollers are nonuniformly worn.
4. The cutaway roller suffers from nonuniform contact or 4. ◆Replace the cutaway roller.
wear.
5. The fixation is not mounted at the correct position. 5. ◆Adjust the fixation mounted position. See section
12.4.2.
6. The nip pressure of the heat roller is improperly adjusted. 6. ◆Adjust the nip pressure. (maintenance code <09> "07,"
Or, the pressure is imbalanced. "08," "09," for adjustment procedures, see Section
12.4.1.)
8-24
(17) Blank copy
◆The paper is skewed and resultantly the image is printed

on the slant.
Cause Measure
1. The toner is run out. 1. Refill the toner.

for roughness.
2. There is no bias output on the developer unit. 2. ◆Check the bias output of the developer unit. (maintenance
code <09>"02")
◆Check the developer unit contact spring for contact
condition.
◆If there is no output, adjust the developer unit bias. For
adjustment procedures, see Sections 12.1.2 and
12.1.3.
3. The transfer unit is not discharging the electricity. 3. Check the charge wire (2) for disconnect.
◆Check the output of the transfer unit. (maintenance
code <09>"03", for adjustment procedures, see Sections
12.1.2 and 12.1.3.)
4. The LED head is faulty. (Solid black copy or black stripes 4. Check the LED head for operation.
are observed depending on the test patterns.)
5. The drum is not grounded correctly. 5. Check the drum for grounding.
◆Check the frame leaf spring.
◆Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.
6. The agitator spring is not mounted correctly. 6. Mount the agitator spring correctly. Replace it if
deformed.
7. The developer unit drive system is damaged. Or, the 7. Check the drive wheel unit. Replace it if damaged.
developer motor is not rotated.
8-25
(18) Image overlap
◆The image remains on the drum and resultantly the same

image is printed on the paper.
Cause Measure
1. The cleaner blade suffers from imperfect contact (due to 1. ◆Check the cleaner blade for contact condition. Replace
hardening or wear). it if necessary.
◆The blade is hardened at low temperatures.
2. The charge elimination LED is not turned on. 2. Check the deelectrification LED for operation. (maintenance
code <06>"05," "06")
3. The heat roller is offset. 3. ◆Clean the heat roller.
4. When the exposure drum is photodegraded with the toner 4. Leave the process cartridge in a dark place for about 12
image adhered to it, the image overlap defect occurs. hours.
5. The drum is aged or degraded. 5. Replace the process cartridge.
8-26
(19) Skip
◆When the test pattern is printed, a part of the grid pattern is

not reproduced (in the horizontal direction).
Cause Measure
1. The DV spacers of the developer unit are not rotated 1. ◆Replace the DV spacers.
correctly. Or, the spacer surface is soiled or scratched. ◆Check whether the surfaces that contact the DV spacers
are deformed.
2. Gears on both edge of the drum are deformed. 2. Check both gears for damage.
3. The magnet roller is not rotated correctly. 3. ◆Check whether turning the gears will result in smooth
rotation of the magnet roller.
◆Check whether the DV spacers on both edge of the
magnet roller are damaged.
4. The cleaner is blocked or the drum is not rotated correctly 4. ◆Clean the cleaner.
due to damaged gears. ◆Turn the gear to check whether the drum is operated
smoothly.
6. The drum surface suffers from soiling or dust adhesion. 6. Clean the drum, or replace the process cartridge.
8-27
(20) Smear
◆When the test pattern is printed, duplicated or smeary image

is generated on the grid pattern.
◆Horizontal lines are duplicated or smeared.
Cause Measure
1. The gears and paper feed system are damaged. 1. Replace the gears.
2. The magnet roller is not rotated correctly. 2. ◆Check whether turning the gears will result in smooth
rotation of the magnet roller.
◆Check whether the tracking rollers on both edge of the
magnet roller are damaged.
3. The cleaner is blocked or the drum is not rotated correctly 3. Replace the process cartridge.
due to damaged gears.
4. The cutter is not working correctly. 4. ◆Check the paper path mechanism.
5. The fixation is not mounted at the appropriate position. 5. Adjust the position of the fixation. For adjustment procedures,
see Section 12.4.2.
6. In the paper path system, there are some obstacles that 6. Check the paper path system.
hinder the paper feed.
8-28
(21) Solid black
Is the pattern image identifiable?

Y N
Is the charge wire working? (Check the load current of the charger. See Section 12.1.1)
Y N
◆ Check the CBL21 for its connection and short.
Is a blank space observed at the top or bottom edge of the print?

Y N
◆ Check the charger and surroundings for short.
(Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section 6.3.1(6).)
◆ Adjust the load current of the charger. see Section 12.1.1.
◆ Check the LED head for operation.

If necessary, replace the LED head.
◆ Check the load current of the charger. See Section 12.1.1.

◆ Check the charger and surroundings for short (Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section
6.3.1(6).)
◆ Check the bias output of the developer. (maintenance code <08> "02", for adjustment procedures,
see Section 12.1.2 and 12.1.3)
8-29
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting (Poor Scanner Image Quality)
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting (Scanner Print Quality Failure)
This chapter describes the type of print quality troubles and its corrective measures.
9.1 Troubleshooting for Print Quality Failure
(1) Image shift (front edge)
Description: The front edge registration is too large or small and, therefore, there is difference
between plotter setting and actual output.
Cause: The front edge registration of the plotter or scanner is incorrect.
Measure: Check which unit, plotter or scanner, suffers from incorrect front edge registration.
Step 1: Check the front edge registration of the plotter.
Output engine test pattern 13 and measure the front edge registration at
specified blocks. See Chapter 8.
If a shift is found, adjust the front edge registration.
Step 2: Check the front edge registration of the scanner.
After the adjustment of plotter, use engine test pattern 13 as original to
copy it. Measure the front edge registration of the output. (Use the same
blocks as specified for the plotter.)
Step 3: Adjust the front edge registration so that it will be twice as large as the
original.
9-1
(2) Image shift (side edge)
Description: Although the original is correctly inserted into the machine along the original
guides, the side edge registration is substantially shifted.
Cause: The side edge registration of the plotter or scanner is incorrect.
Measure: Check which unit, plotter or scanner, suffers from incorrect side edge registration.
Step 1: Check the side edge registration of the plotter.
Output engine test pattern 13 and measure the side edge registration at
specified blocks.
If a shift is found, adjust the side edge registration. See Chapter 8.
Step 2: Check the side edge registration of the scanner.
After the adjustment of plotter, use engine test pattern 13 as original to
copy it. Measure the side edge registration of the output. (Use the same
blocks as specified for the plotter.)
Step 3: Adjust the side edge registration so that it will be twice as large as the
original.
(3) Vertical streak (black or white)
Description: Black or white streaks are observed on the copied paper.

Cause: Dust or soil adheres on the shading guide or scanner glass.
Measure:
Step 1: Check the plotter side for print quality.
Output the engine pattern, and take a corrective action if faulty.
See Chapter 8.
Step 2: Check the scanner side for evidence of any problems.
If no problem is found on the plotter side, clean the shading guide of the
scanner or the scanner glass.
Replace the CIS unit if these measures failed to improve the situations.
(4) Uneven density
Description: Uneven density is observed in the order of CIS.

Cause: The shading correction that removes the height difference between shading guide
and scanner glass may be shifted from the specified value.
Measure: Adjust the shading correction value. Replace the CIS unit if the density is uneven
obviously in the order of CIS though the shading correction value was adjusted.
(5) Others
9-2
Chapter 10 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)
Chapter 10 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly of Plotter)
This chapter describes how to disassemble and assemble the device when it is necessary to
replace the parts.
10.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly
This Section defines several rules used in the part replacement (disassembly/assembly)
procedures.
Note: Before disassembling the intended section, examine and comprehend the
complete installation condition. This allows you to assemble the device
smoothly.
Before replacing a part, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the
power cable from the power outlet.
To protect the photosensitive material from degradation, be sure to close

the upper cover whenever unnecessary.
Removal : Shows the disassembling procedures. Note that some procedures are detailed in
illustrations.
Installation : Shows the assembling procedures. Since the device is assembled by executing the
disassembling procedures reversely, only precautions are described in the
assembling procedures.
Direction : Positions and directions (including those of engine interior) described in the
procedures are defined as follows (see Figure 10-1).
◆ Front : Front panel of the device
◆ Right : Right panel of the device when viewed from the front
◆ Left : Left panel of the device when viewed from the front
◆ Rear : Rear panel of the device
10-1
10.1.2 Covers
Figure 8-1 shows the nomenclatures of the covers attached to the device.
Front cover
Manual feed cover Top cover
Right upper cover
FDL cover
Front cover 2 Filter cover 1
Roll 1 door
Filter cover 2
Roll 2 door
Waste toner door
FDR cover
Buffer door
Cutter door Left upper cover 1
Rear cover 1
Rear cover 2
Figure 10-1 Nomenclatures of Covers
10-2
10.2 Replacing the Parts
10.2.1 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board)
<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (setscrews 6 pcs)
Right upper cover
2 Remove the left upper cover. (setscrews 6 pcs)

Left upper cover
10-3
3 Remove the front cover 2. (setscrews 3 pcs)
Front cover 2
4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (setscrew, 1 pc each)
FDL cover
FDR cover
10-4
5 Disconnect the connector provided on both side of the device.
Right side White Red
Disconnect all of the connectors

Disconnect the 4 high-voltage connected to the electrical control
power connectors (CH 1 to CH4) unit and push them in place.
Disconnect both the halogen lamp

connector and the power connector.
White connector CN1A (12 pins, Red and black stripes)

White connector CN1B (10 pins, Red and black stripes)
Blue connector CN3B (10 pins, Red and black stripes)
Blue connector CN4B (11 pins, Red and black stripes)
Primary power supply connector (2 pins, Black and white stripes)
Primary power supply connector (4 pins, Black and white stripes)
Secondary power supply connector (2 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and brown stripes)
Secondary power supply connector C105 (6 pins, Orange and brown stripes)
High-voltage power supply connector (Red stripes) 4
10-5
Left side
Disconnect all of the connectors connected to the

electrical control unit and push them in place (the
number of connectors differs between MF and PL).

Secondary power supply translucent connector (4 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and black stripes)
Secondary power supply translucent connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)
* More connectors are used on the FM model.

White connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes)
White connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)
Blue connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes)
Secondary power supply blue connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)
6 Remove the front cover. (setscrews 5 pcs)
10-6
7 Remove the three setscrews from the electrical box and pull out the box.
Electrical box
8 Remove the cable clamp (2 clamps on MF model) (2 setscrews) and the cable to take out the
electrical box.
Cable clamp (for MF alone) Cable clamp
9 Remove the board cover (setscrews 8 pcs)
10-7
0 Remove the MRC2 board. (setscrews 8 pcs)
As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (setscrews 6
pcs)
(As for MF model)
MSC2 board
A Remove EEPROM and transfer it to the new board.
EEPROM
10-8
10.2.2 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board)
1 Remove the right upper cover. (setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 1.
2 Remove the left upper cover. (setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 2.
3 Remove the front cover 2. (setscrews 3 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 3.
4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (setscrew, 1 pc each) See Section 10.2.1 4.
5 Unplug the connectors. See Section 10.2.1 5.
6 Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the
connectors. See Section 10.2.1 5.
7 Remove the front cover. (setscrews, 5 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 6.
8 Remove the three setscrews from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 10.2.1
7.
9 Remove the cable clamp (2 clamps on MF model) by unscrewing the two setscrews,
disconnect the cable, and remove the electrical box. See Section 10.2.1 8.
0 Remove the board cover. (setscrews 8 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 9.
A Remove the USB board. (setscrews 4 pcs and connector 1 pc.)
10-9
10.2.3 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board)
connectors. See Section 10.2.15.
7 Remove the front cover. (setscrew, 5 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 6.
7.
9 Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two setscrews, disconnect the cable, and remove
the electrical box. See Section 10.2.1 8.
A Remove the MEC board. (setscrews 6 pcs and connector 5 pcs)
As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (6 setscrews)
B Remove NVRAM and transfer it to the new board.
NVRAM
10-10
10.2.4 Replacing the Controller Fan
<Removal>
5 Unplug connectors. See Section 10.2.1 5.
7 Remove the front cover. (setscrew, 5 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 6.
7.
A Remove the fan. (setscrews 2 pcs)
Controller fan
10-11
10.2.5 Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor
<Removal>
1 Remove the cutter door. (setscrews 4 pcs)
Cutter door
2 Remove the connector (1 pc each) and setscrew (1 pc each) from disconnect the paper size
sensor and paper jam sensor.
10-12
10.2.6 Replacing the Cutter Unit
<Before starting the replacement>

Note: Be sure to turn the main power switch off before starting replacement,
because cutter replacement work involves connection and disconnection
of the connector.
Make sure that the connectors are correctly connected before operation,
because if the power is turned on when the connector is improperly
connected, the device will not start properly.
Be careful during the work to prevent personal injury. The cutter is bare -
not protected with a cover.
Main power switch
Moving blade
Fixed blade
10-13
<Removal>
1 Draw out roll 1 door. (1st stage alone)

Open the roll 1 door somewhat so that it may not interfere with removal of the cutter unit.
Roll 1 door
2 Remove the cutter cover. (Setscrews 4 pcs)
3 Remove the rear cover 2. (Setscrews 4 pcs)
Cutter cover
Rear cover 2
10-14
4 Unplug the connector
Note Use care when removing the connector so that the receiving side pin may
not be bent.
1. Remove the connectors for the cutter motor and the paper size sensor from connectors
CN27 and CN28 on RFU board, and then place them on the feed board box.
2. Remove the connectors wired from the low-pressure power supply on the device body,
feed pulse motor and MEC board from connectors CN21, CN22 and CN29. Then pull
them out from the side face of the feed board box and fix them on the sheet metal with
a piece of tape.
(Remove the cable from the device body since it interferes with removal of the cutter
unit.)
Fix them using tape to protect
them from damage.
Pull it upward
Pull it sideways
Cable being led from the device body

Cable of cutter unit
5 Remove the cutter center supporting sheet metal (Screws: 2 pcs)
Cutter center
supporting sheet metal
10-15
6 Remove the cutter guide supporting sheet metal (Setscrews 4 pcs)
This sheet metal is provided at the bottom of the device. Reasonable care is needed in its
removal since it is somewhat difficult to remove and can be easily dropped and lost.
Pin (Pin on the opposite side is provided on the

backside of the motor)
The cutter unit is fitted to the pins on the device body. So remove the pins first.
Reasonable care must be exercised in the removal not to drop it inadvertently. (The same holds
true for the installation.)
For details of the work, see the following "Cutter Unit Removal Procedure".
<Cutter Unit Removal Procedure>
Note Don't remove all screws at one time. Otherwise, the cutter might fall off.
Be sure to support the cutter while removing the screws.
Tilt the cutter unit somewhat

and then pull it out straight.
Be sure to tilt the cutter unit. Otherwise, the

motor bottom can damage the wiring harness.
Tilt and then pull it out gradually.
Removed parts
Screws : 14 pcs
Covers : Rear cover 2 and cutter cover 1 pcs for each
Small part : Cutter center supporting sheet metal 1 pcs
10-16
<Installation>
1 Install the replacing cutter. (Setscrews 6 pcs)
Install the cutter in the procedure reverse to the removal.
1. Tilt the cutter somewhat and then install it straight.

Like in the removal, use care not to damage the cable on the bottom of the cutter motor.
When fixing the unit with the screws, hold the unit with hand while taking care not to
lose the screws.
2. Fit the cutter unit to the pins on the device body.

3. After fitting to the pins, fix the cutter unit with the screws.
Cutter center
supporting sheet metal
Position of the screws for the cutter center supporting

sheet metal depends on the given model.
For 1- or 2-stage
Butt position
feed
10-17
2 Plug the connector.
1. Lead in the cutter motor connector and the paper size sensor connector of the cutter
unit through the top and insert them to connectors CN27 and CN28 on the RFU board.
2. Lead in the connectors from the low-voltage power supply on the device body, feed
pulse motor and MEC board through the side face and then insert to connectors CN21,
CN22 and CN29 on RFU board.
Use care so that cables may not

be caught with surrounding parts.
3 Install the cutter cover and rear cover 2, and then close the roll 1 door. (Setscrews 8 pcs)
Cutter cover
Rear cover 2
Roll 1 door
4 Turn on the main power switch and proceed to adjustment of the cut length accuracy.
It is a must to confirm the normal operation of the device and to adjust squareness of the cut.
For adjustment of squareness of the cut, see 12.4.3 of this document.
10-18
10.2.7 Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit
<Removal>
7 Remove the front cover. (setscrew, 3 pcs each) See Section 10.2.1 6.
7.
0 Unplug the all connectors from the high voltage power unit.
A Remove the high voltage power unit. (setscrews 9 pcs)
High-voltage power supply unit

Remove the cable and then install on
the new high-voltage power supply unit.
10-19
10.2.8 Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit
<Removal>
7 Remove the front cover. (setscrew, 3 pcs each) See Section 10.2.1 6.
7.
0 Unplug the all connectors from the low voltage power unit.
A Remove the low voltage power unit. (setscrews 5 pcs)
Low-voltage power supply unit
10-20
10.2.9 Replacing the Power Switch
<Removal>
Note: Before replacement, make sure to trun the main power switch off and
remove the power cord from the outlet.
2 Unplug the power switch connectors.
Power switch connector (blue) Power switch connector (blue)
120 V 230 V
Harness (white) in front Harness (white) in front
Power switch connector (white) Power switch connector (white)
3 Remove the bracket that secures the power switch and remove the switch. (setscrews 3 pcs)
120 V 230 V
3 Remove by pushing projections on both sides.
10-21
Note: When installing the power switch, make sure the up-and-down direction.
Note: Check if the unit can be powered properly after the powe switch
replacement.
10.2.10 Replacing the Filter
<Removal>
1 Remove the filter cover 1 or filter cover 2.
2 Remove respective filters.
Filter cover 1
Filter cover 2
10-22
10.2.11 Replace the waste toner bottle switch and the waste toner sensor
<Removal>
2 Remove the waste toner bottle.
Waste toner bottle
3 Remove the sheet metals. (Setscrews 2 pcs for each sheet metal)
When removing TS02 sensor, remove the sheet metal on MS05 switch first and then remove the sheet
metal on TS02 sensor.
Sheet metal on TS02 sensor
Sheet metal on MS05

sensor
4 Remove MS05 switch or TS02 sensor. (Setscrews 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs for each)
TS02 sensor
MS05 switch
10-23
10.2.12 Replacing the Fixation Unit
<Removal>
3 Remove the front cover. (setscrews 7 pcs)
Front cover
4 Remove cover (FDL) and cover (FDR). (Setscrews 1 pcs for each)
Cover (FDL)
Cover (FDR)
5 Remove the manual feed drawer. (Setscrews 2 pcs)
Manual feed drawer
10-24
6 Pull and remove the manual feed tray.
Manual feed tray
7 Remove the connectors on the right side of the device. (1 connector for fan, 1 connector for
temperature fuse, 1 connector for halogen lamp, 2 connectors for thermister, 1 connector for
each of MS06-1 and MS06-2 and 1 connector for PS07.)
Connector for fan
MS06-1 (Blue)
Connector for
temperature fuse
(Yellow)
Connector for halogen lamp Connector for MS06-2 (White)

thermister (White)
Connector for
Connector for PS07
thermister (Red)
10-25
8 Remove the fan unit. (Setscrews 5 pcs)
Fan unit
9 Remove MS06 unit. (Setscrews 1 pcs)
MS06 unit
10-26
0 Remove the fixation unit motor. (Setscrews 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs)
Fixation unit motor
Connector
A Remove 1 setscrew of the fixing sheet metal for the alignment adjusting screw.
Alignment adjusting screw

Setscrew for fixing sheet metal
B Loosen 4 sets screws on both sides of the fixation unit.
10-27
C Pull out the right side of the fixation unit by the length equal to the slot in the set screw
section for the fixation unit.
Pull it out by this length.

Pull it out by this
length.
D Make sure the fixing sheet metal is detached from the device. Remove the fixing sheet plate
and the alignment adjusting screw by turning the alignment adjusting screw.
Alignment adjusting screw
Fixing sheet metal
E Push back the right side of the fixation unit and then move the wiring harness for the
halogen lamp, thermister and temperature fuse toward the right side of the fixation unit
(from the outside of the right side plate to its inside). Move the wiring harness of PS07 to
the outside of the right side plate.
F Remove the fixation unit. (Setscrews 4 pcs)
Fixation unit
10-28
10-29
10.2.13 Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY
<Removal>
2 Open the clamshell.
Clamshell
Process cartridge
3 Remove the process cartridge.

4 Remove the transcription separator. See Section 10.2.23.
5 Unplug the connector (motor part 2 pcs)
6 Loosen the bolt on the tension drum plate, move the plate to the left, and retighten the
screw to set the plate.
Boss (wound) Pulley (64) Tension drum plate setscrew
Timing drum (belt)
The connector of
procedure 5
10-30
7 Remove the timing drum (belt).

8 Remove the boss (wound). (hexagon socket setscrews 2 pcs)
9 Remove the pulley (64).
0 Remove the boss stopper. (hexagon socket setscrews 2 pcs)
Boss stopper
A Remove the drum gear.

B Remove the support (left drum). (inner setscrews 2 pcs, outer setscrew 1 pc)
Support (left drum)
Drum gear
10-31
C Remove the wheel unit. (setscrews 4 pcs)
This screw is longer than others. Use care in the installation not to mistake
it for others (Printed as LS on the sheet metal).
Clutch assembly
Clutch assembly
Wheel unit
D Unplug the connector from each clutch ASSY (2 pcs). (1 pc each)

E Remove the clutch ASSY.
10-32
10.2.14 Replacing the Main Motor
<Removal>
1 Remove the wheel unit. See Section 10.2.13.
2 Remove the tension spring.
Tension spring
3 Loosen the four setscrews and move up and down the main motor, loosen the timing belt.
Main motor
4 Remove the main motor. (setscrews 4 pcs)
10-33
10.2.15 Replacing the Transport (suction).
<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (Setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 1.
2 Open the clamshell. See Section 10.2.13 2.
3 Remove the process cartridge. See Section 10.2.13 3.
4 Remove the transfer separator. (equipped with a hook at the right.)
Transfer separator
5 Unplug the two connectors from the transport ASSY.
Connector (Blue)
Connector (White)
10-34
6 Remove the transport ASSY. (setscrew, left/right 1 pc each)
Note: Care must be exercised in removing the transport ASSY so that PS06
may not be broken.
Transport ASSY Connector
10-35
10.2.16 Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit
<Removal>
1 Remove the fuser unit. See Section 10.2.12.
2 Unplug connectors from both sides of the halogen lamp and remove the right and left fuser
holders. (setscrew 1 pc each)
Fuser holder (left)
Stopper (heat roll)
Stopper (heat roll)
Fuser holder (right)
3 Remove the stopper (heat roll).

4 Pull out the halogen lamp.
Note: Pay attention not to touch the transparent glass of the halogen lamp
during the work. If you touch the glass, wipe it with a rag dampened with
alcohol.
<Installation>
Note When installing, fit the halogen lamp securely. Don't leave it in loosened
state.
After replacement, adjust the alignment again. -> 12.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack
10-36
10.2.17 Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan)
<Removal>
1 Remove the transport. See Section 10.2.15.
2 Unplug the connector,
3 Remove the fan. (setscrews 2 pcs, connector 1 pc)
Connector
Cut off this portion for older models

(it interferes with the sheet metal in
the rear side).
10-37
10.2.18 Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation
<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 1
2 Remove the left upper cover. (setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.1 2
3 Remove the front cover. (setscrews 9 pcs) * 7 pcs in Rev. D
4 Remove the fan unit. (setscrews 5 pcs, fan connector 1 pc) See Section 10.2.12 8
* If it is bundled with Insulock tie, cut Insulock tie.
5 Remove the fixation cover. (setscrews 3 pcs)
6 Unscrew the setscrews and remove the thermistors.
This thermister is connected to

the red connector.
Enlarged figure
Note: Plug the red connectors in the left thermistor shown in the picture above.
Note: If the fan unit was bundled with Insulock tie, bundle it likewise in installa-
tion, too.
10-38
10.2.19 Replacing the Fan on Fuser
<Removal>
3 Remove the front cover. (setscrews 9 pcs) See Section 10.2.12 3
4 Unplug the connector. (1 pc each)
5 Remove the fan. (setscrew, 2 pcs each)
10-39
10.2.20 Replacing the Charger Fan
<Removal>
4 Remove the top cover. (setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.25.
5 Close the clamshell.
6 Remove the plate spring and bracket clamshell (2 pcs each). (Setscrews 1 pc on each side)
Plate spring (it is

tightened together with
the bracket clamshell)
Enlarged view
Plate spring
10-40

* Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it.
8 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (setscrews 3 pcs and connector 1 pc) See Section
10.2.24.
Charge elimination
ASSY
9 Remove the fan. ( setscrews 2 pcs each) (connector 1 pc)
Note When closing the clamshell after replacing the fan, care must be used to
prevent the ferrite core bumping against the developer unit.
10-41
10.2.21 Replacing the Process Unit
<Removal>
2 Pull out and remove the process unit.
Process unit
10-42
10.2.22 Replacing the LED Head
• In the case of PL model
<Removal>
4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 10.2.21 2.
5 Remove the top cover. (setscrews 6 pcs)
7 Remove the two plate springs and the two bracket clamshells. (setscrew left/right 1 pc
each.)
Plate spring (it is

tightened together with
the bracket clamshell)
Enlarged view
Plate spring
10-43
* Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it.
9 Unplug the three connectors of LED head.
0 Remove the right and left move guides. (setscrews 2 pcs each)
Guide (MOVE)
A Remove the LED head
Note: After the replacement of LED head, the LED head joint must be adjusted.
For details, see Section 12.6 "Adjusting the LED Head Joint."
10-44
• In the case of MF model
<Removal>
1 Remove the developer unit
2 Install the frame (regist/pinch). (Setscrews 4 pcs)
To install the frame (regist/pinch) easier, change the screw position on the side to keep the
clamshell open.
Change the screw position
Frame (regist/pinch)
3 Remove the cable of the LED head.
Close the clamshell and then remove the LED head cable through the device back face.
10-45
4 Remove the LED head. (Setscrews 4 pcs)
Return the screw being moved in step 2z to the original position and then fully open the
clamshell. Remove LED-MOVE on both sides and then take out the LED head. Care must be
exercised in removing LED-MOVE so that the LED head may not be inadvertently dropped.
Restore the original screw position
<Installation>
1 Install LED-HEAD and fix it with LED-MOVE of both sides.
2 Close the clamshell and then connect 4 LED head cables through the back face.
3 Remove the frame (regist/pinch).
Modify the fixing position on both sides and then partially open the clamshell. Remove the
frame (regist/pinch). (Setscrews 4 pcs)
4 Install the developer unit.
Note Don't fully open the clamshell while the developer unit is removed.
Otherwise, FR4 and FR5 can be disengaged.
Be sure that the frame (regist/pinch) has been installed before opening
the clamshell fully.
10-46
10.2.23 Replacing the Transfer Separator
<Removal>
1 Remove the process unit.
2 Remove the transfer separator by unlatching the two hooks.
<Installation>
Note: Check the transfer separator is correctly fixed to the specified position.
Note: Whenever installing the transfer separator, be sure to insert its left side
first.
10-47
10.2.24 Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY (charge elimination LED)
<Removal>
4 Remove the top cover. (setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.25 5.
5 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (Setscrews 3 pcs and connector 1 pc)
Charge elimination
ASSY
10-48
10.2.25 Replacing the Developer
<Removal>
4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 10.2.21 2.
• In the case of PL model

5 Remove the top cover. (setscrews 6 pcs each)
COVER(TOP)PL
[Left rear] [Light rear]
10-49
5 Remove the top cover. (setscrews 4 pcs each)
[Left rear] [Light rear]

7 Change fixing positions of right and left stoppers.
10-50
Unplug the two connectors.
Connnectors
8 Open the buffer door.
Buffer door

0 Remove the frame (regist/pinch). (setscrews 4 pcs)
Frame (regist/pinch)
10-51
A Remove the clamped cable.
The cable is clamped

on the backside of
this portion.
B Remove the rear cover. (setscrews 5 pcs)

Rear cover
C Remove the left DEV angle and right DEV angle. (setscrew 1 pc each)
Right DEV angle

Left DEV angle
D Remove the developer.
10-52
10.2.26 Replacing the Developer DV Spacer
<Removal>
1 Remove the developer.
2 Remove the stopper and wave washer from the developer right side. (setscrews 2 pcs)
Stopper
Wave washer
3 Remove the gear from the developer left side.
1. Remove the E-ring of gear (idler 2) .
2. Remove the gear (idler 2).
3. Remove the gear (idler 1).
4. Remove the E-ring of gear (magnet roll).
5. Remove the gear (magnet roll).
6. Remove the screw (2 pcs).
7. Remove the bearing. Bearing
Gear (idler 1)
Gear (idler 1)
Screw
DV spacer
E-ring of gear (magnet roll)

E-ring of gear (idler 2)
4 Remove the DV spacer.

1. Remove the gear (magnet roll).
2. Remove the DV spacer.
<Installation>
Note: The gear (magnet roll) has front and back faces. Mount the gear with its
light-blue face.
10-53
10.2.27 Replacing the Developer Blade
Note: The toner may spill out during the work. Lay the cover such as newspa-
per on the floor.
<Removal>
1 Remove the magnet roller. See Section 10.2.26 4.
Place the removed magnet roller as shown in the picture.

2 Remove the developer blade.
1. Remove the left and right screws (total 2 pcs) from the blade holder.
2. Remove the blade together with the holder.
3. Loosen the setscrew from the blade plate.
4. Remove the blade.
10-54
<Installation>
Note: After a new blade is mounted to the blade holder, apply the toner to the
blade tip.
Apply the
toner over the
entire blade
tip.
Before installing the blade assembly, remove the toner from the magnet
roller and developer chassis using a vacuum cleaner.
Remove the toner from

the developer chassis.
10-55
10.2.28 Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch)
<Removal>
3 Remove the INT1.
1. Unplug the connector.
2. Disconnect the INT1.
INT1
10-56
10.2.29 Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch)
<Removal>
2 Open the buffer door. (remove the two thumb screws.)
Buffer door
3 Disconnect the INT3.

4 Remove the bracket (INT3) (setscrews 2 pcs)
2 setscrews behind harnesses
5 Remove the INT3.
INT3
10-57
10.2.30 Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor
<Removal>
1 Open the buffer door.
3 Remove the frame (regist/pinch). See Section 10.2.25 0.
4 Unplug the connector and remove the PS05.
10-58
10.2.31 Replacing the Manual Feed Sensor
<Removal>
1 Pull out the manual feed tray.
2 Unplug the connector and remove the PS15.(setscrew 1 pc)
10-59
10.2.32 Replacing the Control Panel
<Removal>
2 Remove the control panel.
2. Remove the two setscrews.
10-60
10.2.33 Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02)
<Removal>
(Procedures shown below are common to upper, middle, and lower trays.)
1 Remove the roll paper feed unit:

1. Pull out the roll door.
2. Remove the roll paper feed unit. (setscrews 4 pcs)
Note: Place the roll paper feed unit with the handle-attached face downward.
2 Remove the motor.

2. Remove the two setscrews.
3. Remove the motor.
FM01(FM02)
10-61
<Installation>
When installing the roll paper feed unit, fix it with screws as shown below.
1 Fix the left side of the roll paper feed unit in 2 positions.
2 Close the roll paper feed unit once and then open it slightly again. Then fix a position in the
front right side of the roll paper feed unit with a screw.
3 Open the roll paper feed unit fully and screw-fix a position in the back of the unit.
10-62
10.2.34 Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit (PS11, PS12, PS21, and PS22)
PS11 ASSY ( Roll 1 paper end sensor 1)

PS12 ASSY ( Roll 2 paper end sensor 1)
PS21 ASSY ( Roll 1 door switch)
PS22 ASSY ( Roll 2 door switch)
<Removal>
1 Pull out the roll 1 and roll 2 doors.
2 Remove PS21 and PS22.
Remove PS11 and PS12.
1. Unplug the connector from each sensor.
2. Remove the relevant sensors.
When the roll door cover is removed by unscrewing the four setscrews and the latch metal is removed
by unscrewing the setscrew, PS21 and PS22 can easily be removed.
PS11,12 PS21,22
10-63
10.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring
Note: Be sure to assign two persons for the operation. If only one person is
assigned by necessity, be sure to follow the specified procedure. Wear
safety globes if they do not affect on the workability.
<Removal>
1 Remove the PROCESS_CARTRIDGE.
PROCESS CARTRIDGE
2 Remove the COVER (R). (setscrews 6 pcs)
COVER(R)
3 Remove the COVER (L). (setscrews 6 pcs)
COVER(L)
10-64
4 Remove the COVER (TOP)PL. (setscrews 6 pcs)
COVER(TOP)PL
Left rear Right rear
5 Remove the SPRING (FR5) and BRACKET (MINICLAM) on the both side. (setscrews 6
pcs each)
The SPRING (FR5) and BRACKET

(MINICLAM) are tightened with
together.
SPRING(FR5) BRACKET
(MINICLAM)
10-65
6 Hold DOOR 6 by hand, and carefully open it.
DOOR6
7 Place the STAY (FR4) correctly. (One setscrew)
STAY(FR4)
FRAME(MINICLAM R)
1. Insert the STAY (FR4) into the FRAME (MINICLAM R).
2. Push the FRAME (R) and STAY (FR4) surfaces, STAY(FR4) FRAME(R)
and mount and tighten the setscrew from the
outside.
10-66
<Replacement>
1 Replace the two GAS SPRING ASSEMBLIES. (2 pieces)
GAS SPRING ASSEMBLIES

(2 pieces)
GAS SPRING
PL model: 20P2
MF model: 2588
Note: Make sure that the number at the bottom of the seal matches the PL
machine number.
Note: Replace the right GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY first, then replace the left
GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY. Do not remove both the right and left GAS
SPRING ASSEMBLIES at the same time.
1. Remove the right flange bolt having the hexagon socket head, and remove the E-RING. (One E-
RING is mounted on one setscrew.)
Flange bolt having the E-RING
hexagon socket head
Note: Keep securely the flange bolt having the hexagon socket head as it will
be used again for reassembling.
10-67
After the E-RING and setscrew are
removed, pull out the GAS SPRING
ASSEMBLY in the bottom direction
as shown on the photo.
2. Insert the GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY from the bottom side, mount this assembly onto the bottom pin,
and mount the E-RING.
E-RING
3. Engage the PIN (GAS/SPRING) with the D-cut section of the FRAME (CLAMSHELL), and mount and
tighten the flange bolt having the hexagon socket head.
FRAME（CLAMSHELL)
(Inside)
PIN(GAS/SPRING) Flange bolt having the

hexagon socket head
10-68
4. Remove the left flange bolt having the hexagon socket head, and remove the E-RING. (One E-RING
is mounted on one setscrew.)
Flange bolt having the Remove the clamps. Keep away from the
hexagon socket head wiring harnesses.
E-RING
ASSEMBLY in the bottom direction as
shown on the photo.
5. Install the left GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY in the same procedure from Step 2 to Step 4. Remember
that you must fix the clamps for this ASSEMBLY.
Clamps
10-69
2 Remove the old “Gas Spring Replacement Date” label, and attach the new “Gas Spring
Replacement Date” label..
Gas spring
replacement
date label
3 Remove the STAY (FR4), and close DOOR 6. (One setscrew)

4 Mount the right and left SPRINGS (FR5) and BRACKETS (MINICLAM). (Use one screw
to secure them with together.)
5 Install the COVER (TOP) PL. (6 setscrews)
6 Install the COVER (L) and COVER (R). (6 setscrews for each cover)
7 Install the PROCESS CARTRIDGE.
10-70
<Removal>
1 Remove the PROCESS_CARTRIDGE.
PROCESS
CARTRIDGE
2 Remove the COVER (R). (setscrews 6 pcs)
COVER(R)
3 Remove the COVER (L). (setscrews 6 pcs)
COVER(L)
10-71
4 Remove the COVER (TOP) MF. (4 setscrews)
COVER(TOP)MF
5 Remove the developer. (See Section 10.2.25 “Replacing the Developer”.)
6 Install the FRAME (RESIST/PINCH) and close the COVER (BF). (4 setscrews)
FRAME(REGIST/PINCH)
COVER(BF)
7 Remove the right and left PINS (STOPPERS). (One setscrew for each.)
(Left side) (Right side)

PIN(STOPPER)
10-72
8 Open the SCANNER COVER.
SCANNER_COVER
9 Hold DOOR 6 by hand, and carefully open it.
DOOR6
0 Place the STAY (FR4) correctly. (1 setscrew)
STAY(FR4)
10-73
FRAME(MINICLAM R)
1. Insert the STAY (FR4) into the FRAME (MINICLAM R).
2. Push the FRAME (R) and STAY (FR4) STAY(FR4) FRAME(R)

surfaces, and mount and tighten the setscrew
from the outside.
10-74
<Replacement>
1 Replace GAS SPRING ASSEMBLIES. (2 pieces)
GAS SPRING ASSEMBLIES

(2 pieces)
GAS_SPRING
PL model: 20P2
MF model: 2588
Note: Make sure that the number at the bottom of the seal matches the MF
machine number.
Note: Replace the right GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY first, then replace the left
GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY. Do not remove both the right and left GAS
SPRING ASSEMBLIES at the same time.
1. Replace the right GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY first, then replace the left GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY.
Do not remove both the right and left GAS SPRING ASSEMBLIES at the same time.
Flange bolt having the hexagon socket head E-RING
10-75
The E-RING and setscrew are
ASSEMBLY in the bottom direction
as shown on the photo.
2. Insert the GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY from the bottom side, mount this assembly onto the bottom pin,
and mount the E-RING.
E-RING
3. Engage the PIN (GAS/SPRING) with the D-cut section of the FRAME (CLAMSHELL), and mount and
tighten the flange bolt having the hexagon socket head.
FRAME(CLAMSHELL)
(Inside)
PIN(GAS/SPRING) Flange bolt having the

hexagon socket head
10-76
4. Remove the left flange bolt having the hexagon socket head, and remove the E-RING. (One E-RING
is mounted on one setscrew.)
Flange bolt having the Remove the clamps. Keep away from the
hexagon socket head wiring harnesses.
E-RING

ASSEMBLY in the bottom direction as
shown on the photo.
5. Install the left GAS SPRING ASSEMBLY in the same procedure from Step 2 to Step 4. Remember
that you must fix the clamps for this ASSEMBLY.
Clamps
10-77
2 Remove the old “Gas Spring Replacement Date” label, and attach the new “Gas Spring
Replacement Date” label.
Gas spring
replacement
date label
3 Remove the STAY (FR4), and close DOOR 6. (1 setscrew)
4 Close DOOR 6, and close the SCANNER COVER.
5 Install the right and left PINS (STOPPERS) when the door is half opened, and fully open
DOOR 6. (One setscrew for each)

Position of PINS (STOPPERS)
when the door is half opened
6 Open the COVER (BF), and remove the FRAME (RESIST/PINCH). (4 setscrews)
7 Install the developer.
8 Install two connectors: ANGLE (DEV) R and ANGLE (DEV) L. (One setscrew for each
connector)
9 Install the COVER (REAR). (5 setscrews)
0 Install the FRAME (RESIST/PINCH) and close the COVER (BF). (4 setscrews)
10-78
A Close DOOR 6, and place the right and left PINS (STOPPERS) to the fully open position.

Position of PINS (STOPPERS)
when the door is fully opened
B Install the COVER (TOP) MF. (4 setscrews)
C Install the COVER (L) and COVER (R). (6 setscrews for each)
D Install the PROCESS CARTRIDGE.
10-79
10.2.36 Replacing the heat roller
<Removal>
1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 10.2.12.
2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 10.2.16.
3 Remove the stay (motor HM). (Setscrews 2 pcs)
4 Remove the ejector (top) assembly. (KL clip 1 pc)
Stay (motor HM)
KL clip
Ejector (top) assembly
5 Remove the cover (heat roller). (Setscrews 2 pcs)
6 Remove the ejector (top) assembly retaining spring. (Retaining spring 1 pc and setscrew 1 pc
on each side)
7 Remove the paper guide (bottom) assembly. (Setscrews 2 pcs)
Cover (heat roller)
Ejector (top)
assembly retaining
panel
Paper guide
(bottom) assembly
10-80
8 Remove gear (Z35-Z15) and gear (Z19) on the left side of the fixation unit. (E-ring 2 pcs)
9 Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the left side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are
engaged with the heat roller)
0 Remove the gear (heat roller).
Gear (Z35-Z15)
Gear (Z19)
Gear (heat roller)
Stopper (heat roller)
Gear (Z19)
A Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the right side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are
engaged with the heat roller)
B Remove the spacer (sleeve). (Right side alone)
C Remove the sleeve (heat roller). (1 pc on each side)
D Remove the bearing (heat roller). (1 pc on each side)

Bearing (heat roller)
Sleeve (heat roller)
Spacer (sleeve)
Stopper (heat roller)
10-81
E Remove the heat roller.
Note When assembling a new heat roller, clean the entire heat roller surface
with HR cleaner.
10-82
10.2.37 Replacing the backup roller
<Removal>
1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 10.2.12.
2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 10.2.16.
3 Remove the heat roller. See Section 10.2.36.
4 Remove the cover (FU top) assembly. (Setscrews 3 pcs)
Cover (FU top)

assembly
5 Remove the lever (cam). (Setscrew 1 pc)
6 Remove the holder (shaft L) and holder (shaft R). (E-ring 2 pcs on each side)
Backup roller assembly
Holder (shaft R)
* Holder (shaft L) is
provided on the
opposite side (left
side)
Lever (cam)
10-83
7 Remove the fame (FU top) assembly. (Setscrews 4 pcs. It is allowed to leave the cables on the
frame.)
Frame (FU top) assembly
8 Remove the backup roller assembly.
Backup roller assembly
9 Remove C-ring and then remove bearing (backup roller). (2 pcs on each side)
0 Remove the shaft (backup roller).
Bearing (backup roller)
C-ring
Shaft (backup roller)
Note Even if the backup roller may be cooled down, the shat (backup roller)
sometimes remains hot. Be careful to avoid burn.
10-84
10.2.38 Replacing the BELT (TRANS)
<Removal>
1 Remove the PROCESS_CARTRIDGE. See Section 10.2.21.
2 Remove the TC/DC ASSY. See Section 10.2.232.
3 Remove the TRANSPORT_UNIT (setscrews 2pcs and connectors 2pcs). See Section
10.2.15.
4 Remove the GUIDE(CENTER), GUIDE(ROLLER), and GUIDE(SIDE). (10 pcs)
GUIDE(CENTER)
GUIDE(ROLLER)
GUIDE(SIDE)
[Rear side]
[Front side]
TRANSPORT_UNIT [Rear side]
Note: Each guide is fixed by hooks. The guide can be easily removed by
pressing its hook using a flat-blade screwdriver or others. (Each guide
has two hooks.)
Note: The belt can be replaced without removing the rightmost end GUIDE
(SIDE).
5 Remove the SHAFT(DRIVE-LONG) and SHAFT(DRIVE-SHORT).
1. Remove 4 E-RINGS, and remove BEARINGS. (3 pieces)
E-RING
BEARING
[Left side] [Right side]
2. Remove the GEAR (20Z-TRANS), and remove the BEARING.
GEAR(20Z-TRANS)
[Left side]
Pull up the hook and BEARING
remove the gear.
10-85
3. Remove joggles of the BEARING (TRANS). (5 pieces)
BEARING(TRANS)
Slightly slide the SHAFT to the left to release the joggle, and rotate and remove the SHAFT.
4. Slide the SHAFT (DRIVE-LONG) and SHAFT (DRIVE-SHORT) to the left, then pull those SHAFTS
by sliding to the right.
SHAFT(DRIVE-LONG)
SHAFT(DRIVE-SHORT)
6 Remove the BELT (TRANS). (4 pcs)
BELT(TRANS)
10-86
<Installation>
1 Install BELTS (TRANS). (4 pieces)
2 Install the SHAFT (DRIVE-LONG) and SHAFT (DRIVE-SHORT).
Note: Carefully install the SHAFTS not to break the center PHOTOSENSOR 2
(PS06).
1. Engage joggles of the BEARING (TRANS). (5 pieces)
2. Install the BEARING, and install the GEAR (20Z-TRANS).
3. Install the BEARING, and install E-RING 4. (3 pieces)
3 Install the GUIDE (CENTER), GUIDE (ROLLER), and GUIDE (SIDE). (10 pieces)
4 Install the TRANSPORT UNIT (2 setscrews per 2 connectors). See Section 10.2.15
Note: Keep the TRANSPORT UNIT vertically and install it in position so that the
center PHOTOSENSOR 1 (PS06) is not damaged.
5 Install the TC/DC ASSEMBLY. See Section 10.2.232

Note: Insert the TC/DC ASSEMBLY from the left side and make sure that it is
secured in its position.
6 Install the PROCESS CARTRIDGE. See Section 10.2.21
10-87
10.2.39 Replacing the GEAR (DRUM/21Z/20.4)
<Removal>
2 Remove the COVER (L). (setscrews 6 pcs) See Section 10.2.11.
3 Remove the TC/DC_ASSY. See Section 10.2.232.
4 Loosen the setscrews of the PLATE (TENSION/DRUM), move the plate to the left lower
position, and retighten the setscrews. Remove the TIMING-BELT (DRUM).
TIMING-BELT(DRUM)
[Left side of the device]
5 Remove the BOSS (WOUND) and the PULLY (64P). (Two 2-mm dia, hexagon socket head
screws)
PULLY (64P)
BOSS (WOUND)
6 Remove the STOPPER (BOSS), and remove the GEAR (DRUM/21Z/20.4).

(Two 2-mm dia, hexagon socket head screws)
GEAR(DRUM/21Z/20.4)
STOPPER(BOSS)
10-88
<Installation>
1 Install the GEAR (DRUM/21Z/20.4) and STOPPER (BOSS). (Two 2-mm dia, hexagon
socket head screws)
2 Install the SHAFT (DRIVE-LONG) and SHAFT (DRIVE-SHORT).
STOPPER(BOSS)
GEAR(DRUM/21Z/20.4)
Note: Pull the GEAR (DRUM/21Z/20.4) toward you to eliminate the looseness
in thrust direction, press the STOPPER (BOSS), and tighten the
setscrews.
3 Install the BOSS (WOUND) and the PULLY (64P). (Two 2-mm dia, hexagon socket head
screws).
4 Install the TIMING-BELT (DRUM) and loosen the setscrews of the PLATE (TENSION/
DRUM). When the PLATE returns, tighten the setscrews.
MOTOR(PM01)
Note: To increase the tension of the TIMING-BELT (FIRST), rotate the rotor of
the MOTOR (PM01) clockwise for several turns, and tighten the
setscrews of the PLATE (TENSION/DRUM).
5 Install the TC/DC ASSEMBLY. See Section 10.2.232

6 Install the COVER (L) (6 setscrews). See Section 10.2.12

7 Install the PROCESS CARTRIDGE. See Section 10.2.21
10-89
10.2.40 Replacing the Nail (Fu•Out) ASSY
<Removal>
1 Remove the COVER (R) (setscrews 6 pcs) . See Section 10.2.11.
2 Remove the COVER (L) (setscrews 6 pcs). See Section 10.2.12.
3 Remove the COVER (F) (setscrews 7 pcs). See Section 10.2.123.
4 Remove the END ASSY (KL clip 1pc). [Right side]
KL clip
END ASSY
Slide the covers to the left, and remove them by sliding to the right.
Note: Take care not to drop the KL clip inside of the device.
Note: To avoid scratching on the ROLLER (HEAT) by the NAIL (FU), keep
holding the END ASSEMBLY upward and remove it.
5 Remoce the Nail (Fu•Out) Assy (setscrews 12 pcs).

Nail(Fu•Out)ASSY
10-90
<Installation>
1 Install the NAIL (FU/OUT) ASSEMBLY. (12 setscrews)
2 Install the END ASSEMBLY. (One KL clip)
Note: Insert the left pin first, slide the assembly to the right, and insert the right
pin.
Note: To avoid scratching on the ROLLER (HEAT) by the NAIL (FU), keep
holding the END ASSEMBLY upward and install it.
Note: Take care not to drop the KL clip inside of the device.
3 Install the COVER (F) (7 setscrews). See Section 10.2.12 3
Note: Be sure to engage hooks with the device. (Two hooks)
Manual paper feeding guide (DOOR 8)
[Left side of the device] [Right side of the device]
ANGLE (TG/SUPPORT)
10-91
Note: After installing the COVER (F), open and close the manual paper feeding
guide (DOOR 8) and make sure that the PUSH LATCH of the MANUAL
FEED PLATE is latched (engaged) securely. If poorly latched (engaged),
loosen 2 setscrews of the bearing of manual paper feeding guide (DOOR
8) and 2 setscrews of the ANGLE (TG/SUPPORT). Then, adjust the
manual paper feeding guide mounting position by moving the screw hole
position.
4 Install the COVER (L) (6 setscrews). See Section 10.2.12
5 Install the COVER (R) (6 setscrews). See Section 10.2.11
10-92
10.2.41 Replacing the Separator (BUR) ASSY
<Removal>
1 Remove the COVER (R) (setscrews 6 pcs) . See Section 10.2.11.
4 Remove the END ASSY (KL clip 1pc). See Section 10.2.404.
5 Remove the Guide (Last) (setscrews 4 pcs).
Guide(Last)
BOARD_SPRING(END-UP)
[Left side of the device] [Right side of the device]
Remove the right and left BOARD SPRINGS (END-UP), and remove the setscrews locating
under them.
Note: Remove the ROLLER (HEAT) and ROLLER (BACKUP) without

scratching them by the SEPARATOR (BUR).
10-93
6 Remove the Guide(Last-Route) (setscrews 6 pcs).
7 Remove the Separator (BUR) ASSY (setscrews 6 pcs).
10-94
<Installation>
1 Install the SEPARATOR (BUR) ASSEMBLY. (6 setscrews)
2 Install the GUIDE (LAST-ROUTE). (6 setscrews)
Note: Engage with the rear side joggle before tightening the setscrews.
3 Install the GUIDE (LAST). (4 setscrews)
BOARD_SPRING(END-UP)
Install the setscrews, then install the BOARD SPRING (END-UP).
Note: Install the ROLLER (HEAT) and ROLLER (BACKUP) without scratching
them by the SEPARATOR (BUR).
4 Install the END ASSEMBLY. (One KL clip) See Section 10.2.40 <Installation> 2.
5 Install the COVER (F) (7 setscrews). See Section 10.2.40 <Installation> 3.
6 Install the COVER (L) (6 setscrews). See Section 10.2.12.
7 Install the COVER (R) (6 setscrews). See Section 10.2.11.
10-95
10.2.42 Replacing the TIMING-BELT(FIRST)
<Removal>
1 Remove the PROCESS CARTRIDGE. See Section 10.2.21.
3 Remove the TC/DC ASSY. See Section 10.2.232.
4 Loosen the setscrews of the PLATE (TENSION/DRUM), move the PLATE to the left lower
position, and remove the TIMING-BELT. See Section 10.2.394.
5 Remove the BOSS (WOUND) and the PULLY (64P). (Two 2-mm dia, hexagon socket head
screws) See Section 10.2.395.
6 Remove the STOPPER (BOSS) (by removing two 2-mm dia, hexagon socket head screws),
and remove the GEAR (DRUM/21Z). See Section 10.2.396.
7 Remove the SUPPORT (DRUM) L. (One external and 2 internal setscrews)
SUPPORT(DRUM)L
8 Remove the FR3 UNIT. (4 setscrews per 2 connectors)
10-96
<Replacement>
1 Loosen 4 setscrews of the MOTOR-MOUNT.
2 Remove and replace the TIMING-BELT (FIRST) with the new one.
TIMING-BELT(FIRST)
Push up the MOTOR-MOUNT (or pushing

up the PULLEY (19P)), and remove the
TIMING-BELT (FIRST).
Push up the MOTOR-

MOUNT (or pushing up
the PULLEY (19P)), and
install the new one.
10-97
<Installation>
1 Install the FR3 UNIT in the device. (4 setscrews per 2 connectors)
2 Tighten 4 setscrews of the MOTOR-MOUNT.
MOTOR (PM01)
Note: Move up and down the MOTOR-MOUNT (that is, the MOTOR (PM01))
several times, and tighten the setscrews when the MOTOR-MOUNT goes
down by its own weight.
3 Install the SUPPORT (DRUM) L.
Note: If not installed securely, slightly move the SUPPORT (DRUM) L

downward and install it.
4 Install the STOPPER (BOSS) and GEAR (DRUM/21Z).
STOPPER(BOSS)
GEAR(DRUM/21Z/20.4)
Note: Pull the GEAR (DRUM/21Z/20.4) toward you to eliminate the looseness
in thrust direction of the GEAR (DRUM/21Z), press the STOPPER
(BOSS) and tighten the setscrews.
10-98
5 Install the BOSS (WOUND) and the PULLY (64P). See Section 10.2.39 <Installation> 2
6 Slide the PLATE (ENSION/DRUM) to the left lower position, and install the TIMING-
BELT (DRUM).
7 Tighten the setscrews of the PLATE (TENSION/DRUM).
MOTOR(PM01)
Note: To increase the tension of the TIMING-BELT (FIRST), rotate the rotor of
the MOTOR (PM01) clockwise for several turns, and tighten the
setscrews of the PLATE (TENSION/DRUM).
8 Install the TC/DC ASSEMBLY. See Section 10.2.232.
0 Install the PROCESS CARTRIDGE. See Section 10.2.21.
10-99
10.2.43 Replacing the WIRE (TC/DC)
<Removal>
3 Remove the GUIDE (L) and GUIDE (R). (3 pieces each)
GUIDE (L)
GUIDE (R)
Note: The guide is secured by hooks at front and rear. Pick and pull the guide
upward to remove the guide.
4 Remove the COVER (TC/DC/L) and COVER (TC/DC/R).
COVER COVER
(TC/DC/L) (TC/DC/R)
5 Remove the SPRING (CHARGER), and remove the WIRE (TC/DC).
SPRING(CHARGER)
Note: Remove the SPRING (CHARGER) using the tweezers or others.
WIRE(TC/DC)
10-100
<Installation>
1 Install the WIRE (TC/DC), and install the SPRING (CHARGER).
BEAD (Spindle for

vibration control)
Hook the left side of the WIRE (TC/DC), install the SPRING (CHARGER) at the right side,
and engage with the HOOK.
Note: Set the BEAD (the spindle for vibration control) in the position shown on
the photo.
Note: Install the SPRING (CHARGER) using the tweezers or others.
2 Install the COVER (TC/DC/L) and COVER (TC/DC/R).
3 Install the GUIDE (L) and GUIDE (R). (3 pieces each)
Note: Engage the HOOKS securely and make sure that the GUIDE is not lifted.
4 Install the TC/DC ASSEMBLY. See Section 10.2.232.
10-101
10.2.44 Replacing the Photo Sensor 1 (PS07)
<Removal>
1 Remove the COVER (R) (setscrews 6 pcs). See Section 10.2.11.
4 Remove the END ASSY (KL clip 1 pc). See Section 10.2.404.
5 Remove the Guide (Last) (setscrews 4 pcs). See Section 10.2.415.
6 Remove the Photo sensor 1 (PS07) (connector 1 pc).
PHOTOSENSOR 1 (PS07)
<Installation>
1 Install the PHOTOSENSOR 1 (PS07). (One connector)
2 Install the GUIDE (LAST) (4 setscrews). See Section 10.2.41 <Installation>3.
3 Install the END ASSEMBLY (One KL clip). See Section 10.2.40 <Installation>2.
4 Install the COVER (F) (7 setscrews). See Section 10.2.40 <Installation>3.
6 Install the COVER (R) (6 setscrews). See Section 10.2.11.
10-102
10.2.45 Replacing the Photo Sensor 2 (PS06)
<Removal>
1 Remove the PROCESS_CARTGIDGE. See Section 10.2.21.
3 Remove the GUIDE (CENTER) on the center of the TRANSPORT_UNIT.
TRANSPORT_UNIT
GUIDE(CENTER)
Note: The GUIDE (CENTER) is secured by the HOOKS. Press the HOOKS
using a flat-blade screwdriver or others, and remove the GUIDE. (The
position is shown on the above photo.)
4 Remove the PLATE(PS06) (setscrew 1pc and connector 1 pc).
PLATE(PS06)
5 Remove the Photo sensor 2 (PS06).
Photo Sensor 2 (PS06)
10-103
<Installation>
1 Install the PHOTOSENSOR (PS06).
2 Install the PLATE (PS06). (One setscrew per connector)
3 Install the GUIDE (CENTER).
4 Install the TC/DC ASSEMBLY. See Section 10.2.23 2.
10-104
10.2.46 Replacing the MAGNET ROLL of the developer
<Removal>
1 Remove the developer. See Section 10.2.25.

2 Remove the SUPPORTER (MG) from the right side of developer, and remove the WAVE-
WASHER. (2 setscrews)
SUPPORTER(MG) WAVE-WASHER
3 Remove the GEAR ASSEMBLY from the left side of developer.
GEAR(ONE-WAY)
GEAR(DV-57Z) GEAR(DV-23Z)
1. Remove E-RING 6, and remove the GEAR (DV-57Z).
2. Remove the GEAR (DV-23Z).
3. Remove E-RING 8, and remove the GEAR (ONE-EAY).
4. Remove the STOPPER (MG-BEARING). (2 setscrews)
STOPPER(MG-BEARING)
10-105
5. Remove the BEARING, and remove the PLATE (0.7).
PLATE(0.7)
BEARING
4 Remove the MAGNET ROLL, and remove the right and left SPACERS (DEV).
<Installation> SPACER (DEV)
Note: Before starting the installation, remove the toner from the CHASSIS
(DEV) using a vacuum cleaner or others.
1 Install the SPACER (DEV) at the right and left of the MAGNET ROLL, and place them on
the CHASSIS (DEV).
CHASSIS(DEV)
MAGNET_ROLL
2 Install the GEAR ASSEMBLY at the left side of developer.
1. Install the PLATE (0.7), and install the BEARING.
2. Install the STOPPER (MG-BEARING). (2 setscrews)
3. Install the GEAR (ONE-WAY), and install and secure E-RING 8.
GEAR(ONE-WAY)
10-106
Note: The GEAR (ONE-WAY) has the front and rear surfaces. Install the GEAR
in the correct direction as shown on the photo.
4. Install the GEAR (DV-23Z).
5. Install the GEAR (DV-57Z), and install and secure E-RING 6.
3 Install the SUPPORT (MG). (2 setscrews)
Memory position
LSP-CBL-HV21
SUPPORTER(MG)
SHAFT of MAGNET ROLL
Note: Engage the SUPPORTER (MG) with the D-cut section of the SHAFT of
MAGNET ROLL, and insert it into position. Then, align the MEMORY of
the SUPPORTER (MG) to the center position, and tighten the setscrews.
Note: If the SUPPORTER does not engage with the D-cut position, remove the
LSP-CBL-HV21 (by removing one setscrew). Then, engage the
SUPPORTER (MG) with the D-cut position of the SHAFT of MAGNET
ROLL by rotating it, and tighten the setscrews.
4 Install the developer. See Section 10.2.25.
10-107
10.2.47 Cleaning Primary Wire
Table 10-1 Maintenance Priority
Clean Clean Exchange Exchange Exchange

WIRE BLADE WIRE BLADE Process
(CHARGER) (CHARGER) (CHARGER) (CHARGER) Cartridge
Black Line
Black Belt 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
(Media Feed direction)
Black Spot
Black Line 1st 2nd 3rd
(Roll Width Direction)
Fog
(Background Cloud) 1st 2nd 3rd
Uneven Image Density 1st 2nd 3rd
White Spot,
White Line 1st
(Roll Width Direction)
Partial Lacking
(Media Feed direction)
1st 2nd 3rd
Black Copy 1st 2nd
• Necessary tools
a.Screwdriver (+)
b. Swabs
c. Ethanol (99.5%)
d. Cotton Ciegal
Swabs Ethanol Cotton Ciegal
10-108
1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)ASSY). (Two setscrews)
CASE (CHARGER)
2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.
WIRE (CHARGER) WIRE (CHARGER)
Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs
wetted by ethanol.
10-109
3 Clean the wire (WIRE(CHARGER)).
(1) Prepare two swabs wetted by ethanol.

(2) Nip the Wire by two swabs wetted by ethanol.
(3) Move the two swabs right and left.
Note: a. You may clean the wire even when you have only one swab. See
pictures below.
b. Be careful not to cut or bend the wire.
c. Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs
wetted by ethanol.
(Example of cleaning by two swabs)
(Example of cleaning by one swab)
4 After cleaning, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two setscrews.
WIRE (CHARGER)
10-110
10.2.48 Exchanging Primary Wire
• Necessary tools and part

a.Screwdriver (+)
b. Tweezers
c. Ethanol (99.5%)
d. Cotton Ciegal
Cotton Ciegal
Ethanol Tweezers Cotton ciegal

e. WIRE (CHARGER)
Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs wetted
by ethanol.
1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)). (Two setscrews)
CASE (CHARGER)
2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.
WIRE (CHARGER) WIRE (CHARGER)
10-111
3 Detaching tired Primary Wire
(1) Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers, and unhook from support.
(2) Pick the other side (fixed side) by tweezers, and unhook from support.
10-112
4 Attaching new Primary Wire
(1) Prepare detached SPRING (CHARGER) and new WIRE (CHARGER).
SPRING (CHARGER) WIRE (CHARGER)
(2) Pick one terminal of the Wire by tweezers, and hook it onto support.
(3) Hook another terminal of the Wire with SPRING (CHARGER), and hook it onto
support.
Note: Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers as below to make the procedure

easier.
10-113
(4) Check whether bent or soiled wire has been attached to the process cartridge or not.
Note: If the wire is soiled, clean it again. If the wire is bent, replace it again.
WIRE (CHARGER)
(5) After Exchanging, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two
setscrews.
CASE (CHARGER)
Note: Be careful not to bend the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) fixed to the

BLADE(CLEANER) with setscrew.
Make sure the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) correctly touch to the CASE
(CHARGER).
PLATE(CLEANER_FG)
10-114
10.2.49 Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade
• Necessary tools
a. Screwdriver (+)
b. Adjust Gauge : JIGU(CLEANER BLADE)
c. Ethanol (99.5%)
d. Cotton Ciegal
e. Vaccume cleaner for toners Adjust Gauge
1 Remove five setscrews, and detach BLADE(CLEANER).
BLADE (CLEANER)
Five setscrews and two plates
BLADE (CLEANER)
Blade rubber BLADE (CLEANER) Aluminum holder
Note: BLADE(CLEANER) consists of an aluminum holder and a blade rubber.

Do not touch the blade rubber by hands.
If touched, clean the blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol.
Vacuum the toner on the blade rubber with the Vacuum cleaner for
toners.
10-115
2 Wipe blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal.
Note: If the blade rubber is strongly soiled, use Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol.
If the blade rubber is damaged or cannot be cleaned any more, replace
BLADE (CLEANER).
Blade rubber
3 After cleaning, sprinkle new toner for lubrication on the blade rubber.
Wipe some toner off from the development sleeve with cotton ciegal.
Brush the blade rubber with the cotton ciegal to spread toner.
Blade rubber
Aluminum holder
Blade rubber
Spread toner here.

BLADE (CLEANER)
10-116
Note: Do not spread new toner on the blade rubber while blade rubber is wetted
right after cleaning by ethanol.
Use new toner for spreading on the blade rubber. Do not use waste
toner.
BLADE(CLEANER)
Waste toner bottle

4 Attach cleaner blade to initial position and fix it with five setscrews. Press the blade against
the adjust gauge to fix.
Note: Keep just 2mm (0.08 inch) of gap between blade and chassis at left, mid-
left, center, mid-right and right.
Keep space with the adjust gauge and press the blade against the gauge.
Fix the blade with screws in the following order: center, mid-left, mid-right,
left-end and right-end, or in reverse order as center, mid-right, mid-left,
right-end and left-end.
Adjust Gauge
BLADE (CLEANER)
2 (+/-0.2) mm
0.08 (+/-0.008) inch
10-117
5 After cleaner blade is attached, clean toner around the process cartridge.
BLADE (CLEANER)
10-118
10.2.50 Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum
1 Remove the process cartridge.
2 Place the process cartridge on the table directing its grip downward.
3 Repackage OPC cleaner into a smaller sized container and then apply an appropriate amount
of it to a piece soft cloth such as cotton ciegal.
4 Clean the photosensitive drum surface.
10-119
5 Rotate the gear section of the photosensitive drum with hand and then rotate the
photosensitive drum in the paper feed direction.
6 Repeat above steps 4 and 5.
10-120
Chapter 11 Replacing the Part (Disassembly/Assembly of Scanner)
Chapter 11 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly of Scanner)
This chapter describes how to disassemble and assembly the scanner when it is necessary to
replace the part on the device.
11.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly
This section defines several rules used in the component replacement (disassembly/assembly)
procedures.
Note: Before disassembling the intended section, sufficiently examine and

comprehend the complete installation condition. This allows you to assembly
the scanner smoothly.
Before replacing a component, be sure to turn off the device and unplug the
power cable from the power outlet.
To protect the photosensitive material from degradation, be sure to close the

upper door whenever unnecessary.
Removal: This word represents disassembling procedures. Note that some procedures are
detailed in illustrations.
Installation: This word represents assembling procedures. Since the device is assembled by
executing the disassembling procedures reversely, only precautions are described
in the assembling procedures.
11-1
11.1.2 Name of Scanner Covers
Figures 11-1 shows nomenclatures of covers located on the device.
Control panel
Left scanner cover Scanner exit guide
Right scanner cover

Original holder
Figure 11-1 Nomenclatures of Scanner Covers
11-2
11.2 Replacing the Part
11.2.1 Replacing the Scanner Cover
<Removal>
1 Open the upper door.
Upper door
2 Remove both right and left scanner covers. (set screw, 2pcs each)
Right scanner cover
Left scanner cover
11-3
11.2.2 Replacing the Control Panel
<Removal>
1 Remove the two set screw from each side of the control panel.
2 Unplug the two cables coming from the device and remove the control panel.
11-4
11.2.3 Replacing the Scanner Motor
<Removal>
1 Open the upper door. For procedures, see Step 1 in Section 11.2.1.
2 Remove the right scanner cover. (set screw 2 pcs) For procedures, see Step 2 in Section
11.2.1.
3 Remove the gear cover. (Set screw 1 pc)
Release the harness clamp and raise the harness.
Gear cover
Harness clamp
4 Loosen the screw shown in the figure and shift it in the arrow direction to make the belt loose.
Retighten the screw in the position where the belt is disengaged from the pulley.
11-5
5 Remove three set screws and one connector from the bracket, and remove the scanner motor
assembly.
Connector
* The motor harness is routed so that it comes out under the scanner.
6 Remove the tension belt angle. (1 set screw and 1 E-ring)
E-ring Tension belt angle

7 Remove the tension belt pulley. (1 E-ring)
E-ring Tension belt pulley

11-6
8 Remove the scanner motor. (set screw 2 pcs)
Oblong
hole
* The motor harness

direction is on the oblong
hole side.
11-7
11.2.4 Replacing the CIS Unit
<Removal>
1 Open the upper door. For procedures, see Step 1 in Section 11.2.1.
2 Remove both right and left scanner covers. (set screw 2 pcs) For procedures, see Step 2 in
Section 11.2.1.
3 Loosen the screw of the tension belt angle. Retighten the screw with the belt relaxed. For
procedures, see Step 4 in Section 11.2.3.
4 Remove three set screws and one connector from the bracket, and remove the scanner motor
assembly. For procedures, see Step 5 in Section 11.2.3.
5 Remove the pinch unit stopper by removing the E-ring of the pinch unit stopper on the right
side of the pinch unit.
Stopper (pinch unit)

E-ring
6 Remove the document table unit. (set screw 7 pcs)
Document table unit (original table)
11-8
Screw is tightened together with spring
7 Close the upper door, and open the scanner cover to backward.
8 Remove the registration guide. (set screw 4 pcs)
Registration guide
11-9
8 Loosen four screws on the exit guide.
Guide (EXIT)
* Loosening the exit guide allows the CIS unit to be removed easily. Also, the CIS can be set in
position when it is installed.
0 Remove holders (CIS_ASSY). (set screw,1pc each)
Holder (CIS_ASSY) Holder (CIS_ASSY)
11-10
A Remove the CIS unit. (connector 2 pcs)
Remove two screws and then the GND

angle, and disconnect the connector.
Connectors
CIS unit
<Installation>
1 Install the CIS unit. (ANGLE (GND), 2 setscrews, 2 connectors)
CIS unit
ANGLE(GND)
[Rear side of CIS unit]
Cable ties
Connector
Note: Pay attention to the connector in its correct direction, and insert the connector
to its end.
Note: Locate the cable tie in a position between the circuit board and the ANGLE
(GND), and tighten setscrews.
11-11
Notches (cutouts) engaged with pins Pins
Note: Keep the setscrews of GUIDE (EXIT), and install the CIS unit.
Note: Make sure that the CIS unit is mounted onto the pins securely.
2 Install the right and left holders (CIS ASSY). (One setscrew for each)
OK NG
Holder (CIS ASSY)
Note: To make parallel holder installation, press the top surface of each holder (CIS
ASSY) downward by using a flat-blade screwdriver or others, and tighten the
setscrews.
3 Secure the GUIDE (EXIT) by tightening setscrews. (4 setscrews)
Four M4 setscrews (for binding)
① ②
③
④
Note: Hold the GUIDE (EXIT) backward, and tighten setscrews 1, 2, 3 and 4 in
this order.
11-12
4 Install the GUIDE (RESIST). (4 setscrews)
Groove of CIS unit
GUIDE(REGIST)
Note: Take care not to enter the GUIDE (RESIST) into the groove of CIS unit.
Note: Take care not to drop the CIS unit below the GUIDE (RESIST).
Note: Finally, wipe and dry the surface of document glass.
5 Close the scanner cover.
6 Install the document table. (4 external setscrews and 5 internal setscrews)
Note: Install the document table so that the spring end faces backward of the
scanner unit.
7 Install the STOPPER (PINCH UNIT). (Use two E-rings 4.)
E-ring
Note: Close the bottom clearance using an adhesive tape or others so that the E-ring
does not drop inside the scanner unit.
11-13
8 Install the BRACKET (SC/MOTOR). (3 setscrew per connector)
1
PULLY
Note: Loosen setscrew 1, rotate the pulley clockwise for several turns to increase the
belt tension, and retighten setscrew 1.
9 If the COVER (SC) has a label, make sure that the label directs to the right and left correctly
and install the scanner cover.
0 Adjust the scanner using the scanner adjuster kit. See Chapter 13 “Adjustment (Scanner)”.
A Check the print quality using the checklist attached to the ADJUSTER-KIT (scanner).
B If an image in the joint area of CIS shifts, readjust the scanner unit.
11-14
11.2.5 Replacing the GUIDE (SHADING)
<Removal>
1 Remove the right and left scanner covers (2 setscrews for each). See Section 11.2.1.
2 Remove the STOPPER (PINCH UNIT) (Use two E-rings 4). See Section 11.2.4 5.
Note: Close the bottom clearance using an adhesive tape or others so that E-ring 4
3 Open the scanner cover backward. See Section 11.2.4 7.
4 Remove 5 setscrews from either the right or left scanner unit frame.
Note: Keep the Document Selector lever in the position.
Document
Selector lever
5 Remove the GUIDE (SHADING).
GUIDE(SHADING)
Note: The GUIDE (SHADING) is supported by pins of the right and left scanner unit
frames. (One left and 2 right pins)
Note: Open the right or left scanner unit frame outward, whose setscrews you have
removed in Step 4, and remove the shading guide. Take care not to drop it.
11-15
<Installation>
1 Install the GUIDE (SHADING).
Note: Install the GUIDE (SHADING) on the pins of right and left scanner unit frames.
Note: Open the right or left scanner unit frame outward, whose setscrews you have
removed in Step 1, and install the GUIDE (SHADING). Take care not to drop it.
2 Mount and tighten the 5 setscrews.
3 Close the scanner cover.
4 Install the STOPPER (PINCH UNIT) (Use two E-rings 4). See Section 11.2.45.
5 Install the right and left scanner covers (2 setscrews for each). See Section 11.2.1.
11-16
11.2.6 Replacing the ROLLER(SC/REGIST)ASSY / ROLLER(SC/EXIT)ASSY
<Removal>
1 Remove the COVER(R). (6 setscrews)
COVER(R)
2 Remove the COVER(L). (6 setscrews)
COVER(L)
3 Remove the COVER(TOP)MF. (4 setscrews)

COVER(TOP)MF
[Rear of scanner unit] [Left rear of scanner unit] [Right rear of scanner unit]
4 Remove the right and left scanner covers (2 setscrews for each). See Section 11.2.1.
5 Remove the document table (7 setscrews). See Section 11.2.46.
11-17
6 Remove the STOPPER(PINCH UNIT). (Two E-rings 4)
E-ring and washer STOPPER(PINCH_UNIT) E-ring
7 Remove the PIN(CONNECTOR/R) and COVER(GEAR/SC). (for 2 setscrews, 1 connector,

1 GND lead)
PIN(CONNECT/R)
[Right side]
COVER(GEAR/SC)
GND lead
Remove the harness clamps to make the

wiring harness free.
Connector
11-18
8 Remove the PIN(CONNECT/L). (One setscrew per connector)
[Left side] PIN(CONNECT/L)
Unplug the connector.

Remove the cable clamps.
9 Remove the pinch unit. (One setscrew per GND lead)
PINCH_UNIT
1. Slide the pinch unit backward, remove the setscrews from the GND lead, return the pinch unit back to
its original position, and pull out the GND lead.
[Left side]
GND lead
11-19
2. Align the wiring harness pass-through hole of the scanner side plate to the wiring harness pass-
through hole of the pinch unit, and push the connector into the pinch unit.
Wiring harness pass-through Wiring harness pass-through

hole of pinch unit hole of scanner side plate
Note: Do not insert the connector excessively as it will be pulled out later.
3. Pull up the left side of pinch unit, slide the unit to the left, and pull out and remove the right connector
and the GND lead from the wiring harness pass-through hole.
Wiring harness pass-through

hole of scanner side plate
[Right side]
GND lead Connector
11-20
0 Remove the BRACKET(SC/MOTOR). (3 setscrews per connector)
Note: Loosen setscrew 1, pull up the bracket to the right upper position, when the
belt becomes loose and is almost removed from the pulley, retighten the
setscrew.
A Remove the pulley. (Two E-rings 4 and two E-rings 6 for each of right and left sides)
PULLY

E-RING_4
E-RING_6
E-RING_6
B Remove the GUIDE(REGIST). (4 setscrews)
GUIDE(EXIT) GUIDE(REGIST)
11-21
C Remove the GUIDE(EXIT). (4 setscrews per 2 flexible bushings)
Flexible bushing
Note: As the flexible bushings are secured by adhesives, use a flat-blade

screwdriver to remove them.
D Remove the bearings. (2 bearings at each side)

Bearings Bearings
E Remove the BRACKET(SC/PS/L). (2 setscrews)
BRACKET(SC/PS/L)
F Remove the ROLLER(SC/REGIST)ASSY and the ROLLER(SC/EXIT)ASSY.
ROLLER(SC/EXIT) ROLLER(SC/REGIST)
Note: Slide the SHAFT(SC) to the right first, then pull out and remove the scanner
unit shaft to the left.
11-22
<Installation>
G Install the ROLLER(SC/REGIST)ASSY and the ROLLER(SC/EXIT)ASSY.
Difference between ROLLER(SC/REGIST) and ROLLER(SC/EXIT):

ROLLER(SC/REGIST) ROLLER(SC/EXIT)
Outer diameter: 25.80 mm Outer diameter: 25.85 mm

HOLDER(SHAFT)
Note: When you install a new roller ASSY, slightly apply the grease to the 6 specified
points of the shaft holder.
H Install the BRACKET(SC/PS/L).

I Install the bearings. (2 bearings at each side)
J Install the GUIDE(EXIT) and flexible bushing. (4 setscrews)
Four M4 setscrews (for binding)
2
1 3
4
Note: Tighten setscrews 1, 2, 3, and 4 in this order while pressing the GUIDE(EXIT)
backward.
Note: Fix the flexible bushing ends using an instant adhesive.
K Install the GUIDE(REGIST). See Section 11.2.4 <Installation>4.

L Install the pulley. (Two E-rings 4 and two E-rings 6 for each of right and left sides)
M Install the pinch unit. (One setscrew per GND lead)
1. Pass the right connector and GND lead through the wiring harness pass-through hole.
11-23
2. Push and insert the left connector into the pinch unit (do not insert excessively). Align the wiring
harness pass-through hole of the scanner side plate to the wiring harness pass-through hole of the
pinch unit. Then, pull out the connector using the long nose pliers or others.
[Left side]
3. Pass the GND lead through the wiring harness pass-through hole of the scanner side plate, and
secure the lead by tightening its setscrew.
M4x12(Ni)
GND lead
Note: The power and signal cables are wound by protection tapes. This tape section
must locate in a place between the pinch unit and the scanner side plate (at
right and left sides).
N Install the PIN(CONNECT/L). (1 setscrews per connector)

O Install the PIN(CONNECT/R) and COVER(GEAR/SC). (for 2 setscrews, 1 connector, 1
GND lead)
P Install the STOPPER(PINCH UNIT) (Two E-rings 4). See Section 11.2.4 <Installation>7.
Q Install the BRACKET(SC/MOTOR). See Section 11.2.4 <Installation>8.
R Install the document table. See Section 11.2.4 <Installation>6.
S If the scanner cover has a label, make sure that the label directs to the right and left correctly
and install the scanner cover. See Section 11.2.1.
T Install the COVER(TOP)MF. (4 setscrews)
U Install the COVER(L). (6 setscrews)
V Install the COVER(R). (6 setscrews)
W Adjust the scanner using the scanner adjuster kit. See Chapter 13 “Adjustment (Scanner)”.
X Check the print quality using the checklist attached to the ADJUSTER-KIT(scanner).
Y If an image in the joint area of CIS shifts, readjust the scanner unit.
11-24
11.2.7 Replacing the MSC2 Board
For Steps 1 to 8, refer to Section 10.2.1 "Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (MRC2

Board)."
<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs)
2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs)
3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs)
4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1pc each)
5 Unplug connectors.
6 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 3pcs each)
7 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and withdraw the box.
8 Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the set screw 2 pcs, disconnect the cable, and remove
the electrical box.
9 Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs)
0 Remove the MSC2 board. (set screw 6 pcs and connector 3 pcs.)
<Remounting the ROM>
When replacing the board

Remove the EEPROM 2 pieces (locations: U5, U6) mounted on the original board, and then
mount them on new board at the same locations (U5, U6).
Take care not to bend the pins when dismounting and remounting the EEPROM
11-25
11.2.8 Replacing the GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY
<Installation>
1 Remove the CIS unit. See Section 11.2.4.
2 Remove the right and left HOLDER(GLASS)s. (One setscrew for each)
HOLDER(GLASS)
3 Rotate 10 setscrews for 5 turns to loosen them on the FRAME(CIS_BASE-Fr).
[Front side of CIS unit]

FRAME(CIS-BASE-Fr)
4 Remove the GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY.
Remove the GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY as

shown on the photo.
Note that the FRAME(CIS-SIDE) is already
removed for easy understanding on the
photo below.
GLASS(DOCUMENT) ASSY
FRAME(CIS-SIDE)
FRAME(CIS-BASE-Fr)
[Front side] [Rear side]
11-26
1. Rotate and turn the FRAME(CIS-BASE-Fr) outward.
2. Hold the right and left ends of the GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY, and pull up the assembly front side.
Then, remove the assembly from the scanner unit by pulling out the rear side SHEET(GLASS) from
the groove of the FRAME(CIS-BASE-Rr).
GLASS(DOCUMENT)
FRAME(CIS-BASE-Rr)
SHEET(GLASS)
Note: The SHEET(GLASS) being attached to the bottom surface of the

GLASS(DOCUMENT) is inserted into the groove of the FRAME(CIS-BASE-
Fr) and the FRAME(CIS-BASE-Rr).
<Installation>
1 Install the GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY.
1. Insert the SHEET(GLASS) into the groove of the FRAME(CIS-BASE-Rr), and mount the front side of
the GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY in its position.
GLASS(DOCUMENT)ASSY
FRAME(CIS-BASE-Rr)
Note: The marking at the end of GLASS(DOCUMENT) in the longitudinal direction

must locate at the left front side during installation.
GLASS(DOCUMENT)
Marking
SHEET(GLASS)
Note: The inside surface of the GLASS(DOCUMENT) must be free from dirt or
poor wiping. The CIS sensor must be free from a foreign material (such as
dust), dirt, condensation or others.
- If dirty, wipe and clean using a dry clean cloth.
- If the dirt still remains, wipe with a wet cloth first, then wipe and dry using a
dry and clean cloth.
11-27
2 Tighten 10 setscrews on the FRAME(CIS-BASE-Fr).
Note: Mount the setscrews at each position, tighten and secure them in the specified
order as shown on the photo.
Note: Press and contact the FRAME(CIS-BASE-Fr) and the FRAME(CIS-BASE) in

tight by hand, and tighten the setscrews.
10 8 6 4 2 1 3 5 7 9
3 Install the right and left HOLDER(GLASS)s. (One setscrew for each)
Note: Push down the HOLDER(GLASS) by hand, and tighten the setscrews.
HOLDER(GLASS)
4 Install the CIS unit. See Section 11.2.4.
11-28
Chapter 12 Adjustment
Chapter 12 Adjustment (Plotter)
This chapter describes how to adjust each part of the engine in this device.
12.1 Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit
Method of adjusting the primary charger load current, developer AC bias, developer DC bias,
transfer unit load current, and separator AC bias are described.
12-1
12.1.1 Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current
1 Remove front cover.

2 Insert the tester probes into the CH1 terminals, and operate the primary charger with the
maintenance code <09> "01" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the load current Icc of the charging wire.
For the measurement, use the DC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read
100 µA for 100 mV.
3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH1 control using a screwdriver for power supply
adjustment.
CH1 terminals
Setting range: -865 to -935 µA (Reading of tester = 0.865 to 0.935 V)

Target value: -900 µA (Reading of tester = 0.9 V)
12-2
12.1.2 Developer AC Bias

2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2AC terminals, and operate the developer AC bias with
the maintenance code <09> "02" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the AC load current Vdba.
For the measurement, use the AC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read
100 V for 100 mV.
3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH2AC control using a screwdriver for power
supply adjustment.
CH1 terminals
Setting range: 1.40 to 1.50 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 0.625 to 0.675 V)

Target value: 1.45 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 0.65 V)
12-3
12.1.3 Developer DC Bias
Note: The developer DC bias must be adjusted after the developer AC bias was
adjusted.

2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2DC terminals, and operate the developer DC bias with
the maintenance code <09> "02" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the DC load current Vdba.
100 V for 100 mV.
3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH2DC adjusting volume using the
screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.
CH2DC terminal
Setting range: -270 to -290 V (Reading of tester: 0.27 to 0.29 V)

Target value: -280 V (Reading of tester: 0.28 V)
12-4
12.1.4 Transfer Load Current

2 Insert the tester probes into the CH3 terminals, and operate the transfer with the
maintenance code <09> "03" in the engine maintenance mode (⇒see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the load current Itcd of the transfer wire.
100 µA for 100 mV.
3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH3 adjusting volume using the
screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.
CH3 terminal
Setting range: 570 to 630 µA (Reading of tester: 0.570 to 0.630 V)

Target value: 600 µA (Reading of tester: 0.6 V)
12-5
12.1.5 Separator AC Bias

2 Insert the tester terminal into the CH4 terminal on the high voltage power unit, use the
maintenance code <09>"04" (see Section 2.3.9) of the engine maintenance mode to
operate the separator AC bias, and measure the AC load voltage Vdca. On the tester, select
the AC voltage measurement position and read 1 V as 1000 V.
Note DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.
3 If the adjustment is needed, turn the CH4 control volume using a flat blade screwdriver,
which is specialized for adjustment of power unit, to adjust the voltage.
CH4 terminal
Setting range: 12.0 to 13.0 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 4.3 to 4.7 V)

Target value: 12.5 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 4.5 V)
12-6
12.2 Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit
This section covers verification procedures for the voltage of the low-voltage power unit.

2 According to the voltage you want to check, insert the tester terminal to TP1 to TP4 pins.
Voltage value 24 V ± 1.2 V : TP1 (24 V), TP2 (GND)
Voltage value 5.1 V ± 0.005 V : TP3 (5.1 V), TP4 (GND)
Note DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.
TP4 TP3 TP1 TP2

VR71
3 When adjustment +5.1 V is needed, do it by turning the adjustment volume (VR71) using
the screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.
12-7
12.3 Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head
As each LED head has different light quantity, if the LED head is replaced, the light emitting
STB width and the density change width must be set.
The LED light quantity label has been attached to the LED head, and therefore set the light
emitting STB width and the density change width following the light quantity given on the label.
For setting the light emitting STB width and the density change width, select the maintenance
code <12>, subcode "731 - 739" in the maintenance mode. For the setting procedure, see 2.3.12.
After setting, execute the engine test print (maintenance code <10>) to check that normal plotting
is outputted.
Hint: In case of a print quality failure such as uneven density and variations in line
thickness, try to set larger STB value than the value listed in the
corresponding table.
Table 12-1 Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value
Average light STB STB Average light STB STB
quantity value width quantity value width
1.100 28 5 1.310 24 4
1.110 28 5 1.320 24 4
1.120 28 5 1.330 23 4
1.130 28 5 1.340 23 4
1.140 27 5 1.350 23 4
1.150 27 5 1.360 23 4
1.160 27 4 1.370 23 4
1.170 27 4 1.380 23 4
1.180 26 4 1.390 22 4
1.190 26 4 1.400 22 4
1.200 26 4 1.410 22 4
1.210 26 4 1.420 22 4
1.220 26 4 1.430 22 4
1.230 25 4 1.440 22 4
1.240 25 4 1.450 22 4
1.250 25 4 1.460 21 4
1.260 25 4 1.470 21 4
1.270 25 4 1.480 21 4
1.280 24 4 1.490 21 3
1.290 24 4 1.500 21 3
1.300 24 4
Observing the average light quantity of the LED head, set the HEAD_A, B, C from the above table.
Then, perform the test print of "2 by 2" vertically to check that there is no density difference.
(If the error diffusion data can be outputted, also print the error diffusion data for checking.)
If different, change the STB width of HEAD_A, C to adjust the density. At this time, select the
STB width according to the STB value from the following table and enter it.
STB value STB width STB value STB width
21 4 32 6
22 4 33 6
23 4 34 6
24 4 35 6
25 4 36 6
26 4 37 6
27 5 38 7
28 5 39 7
29 5 40 7
30 5 41 7
31 5 42 7
12-8
12.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items
The items that do not satisfy the reference values in "7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a
Plotting Specification Failure" and other adjustment items are listed in Table 12-2.
Referring to the corresponding items in Table 12-2, enter the engine maintenance mode to
adjust, or take corrective measures following the reference sections.
Table 12-2 Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure

Output Output paper
Control Output paper type for Print engine test
Item length for width for
(adjustment) item adjustment pattern
adjustment adjustment
Pressure of the
Adjustment of 400 mm A0 Normal paper No.5
pressure roller
fixation nip pressure
Adjustment: See Section 12.4.1.
Adjustment of Fixation position 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15

skew/slackness Adjustment: See Section 12.4.2.
Cutter mount
1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15
Cut squareness height
Normal paper / tracing
– 1189 mm A0
paper (75 g) / film
– 297 mm A0 No.15
paper (75 g) / film
Cut length accuracy* – 210 mm A0
paper (75 g) / film
Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: line).
The cut length is reduced if numeric value is increased (1 line = 0.042333 mm).
When the set value is increased, the cut length will be decreased. (1 line = 0.042333 mm)
– 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15
Print length Remarks: The print length is reduced if numeric value is increased.
accuracy* (About ±3.3 mm per 841 mm is reduced if there is a ±5 Hz change)
– 1189 mm A0
paper (75 g) / film
– 297 mm A0 No.15
paper (75 g) / film
Top edge
registration* – 210 mm A0
paper (75 g) / film
Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: msec).
The print start position reverses if numeric value is increased (10 msec = 0.8 mm).
– 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15
Center registration* Remarks: The print position is shifted to the left if numeric value is increased (1 byte = 0.508 mm).
Fixation position 1189 mm A0 Normal paper No.15
Checking Skew
* Items to be adjusted in the engine maintenance mode.

Select maintenance code <12> if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance.
Select maintenance code <11> if the adjustment is performed after test print and measurement.
12-9
12.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure
WARNING
- Immediately after the operation, the fixation and hexagon head screws are
hot. So, keep away from these parts. Otherwise, you may be burned.
Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.
1 Set the A1 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer).

2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and perform the maintenance code <09>"07," "08" or
"09" (see Section 2.3.9). Test prints are output.
3 Measure the black band, which is printed at the position 30 to 40 cm away from the top
edge of the test print, at both sides. (See the figure below.)
Paper feed direction

25 mm 25 mm
7.5±0.5 mm 7.5±0.5 mm
30 to 40 cm
Reference value: Width of the black band = 7.5 ± 0.5 mm

Difference between left and right = ± 0.5 mm or less
4 When the value is deviated from the standard value, open the top door (door 6) and adjust it by
turning the nip adjustment screws being provided on both sides of the fixation unit (first loosen
the nut that is fixing the nip adjustment screws).
Fixation adjustment
screw
Turning the screw clockwise :

Decreases the nip pressure.
Turning the screw counterclockwise :

Increases the nip pressure.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the adjusting meet the reference values.

6 Retighten the nut loosened in the previous steps to adjust the nip pressure.
12-10
12.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack
WARNING
- Don't touch the fixation and hexagon head screw right after the operation.
These components become hot and may result in burns.
Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.
1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer).
2 Turn on the engine maintenance mode and check the nip voltage for appropriateness. If it is
off the standard value, adjust it. see Section 12.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure.
3 Print 3 copies of the engine test pattern No.5 consecutively.

(see Section 2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) Engine maintenance code
<10>"05")
4 Check the rear end of the roll for smear without registration (several millimeters wide
wedge-shaped horizontal lines).
5 If a smear appears, remove the right upper cover, left upper cover, front cover, cover
(FDL), cover (FDR) and manual feed drawer from the device body. Insert papers between
the open/close sensors for the fixation door and the manual feed drawer to simulate the
closed state of the door. Then adjust the fixation unit alignment and the heat roller speed.
a) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the right side of a print sample
(right side of the device)
-> Push the right side of the fixation unit toward backside of the device.

13cm
b) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the left side of a print sample (left
side of the device)
-> Pull the right side of the fixation unit toward front side the device.
13cm
12-11
Use the alignment adjusting
screw for the adjustment.
Clockwise turn: Pushes back the

right side of the fixation unit
Counterclockwise turn: Pulls out
the right side of the fixation unit
Note Be sure to loosen 2 set screws on the fixation unit before adjusting.
1) Mark the initial positions of the top and bottom screws fixing the fixation unit on the
right side plate.
2) Turning the alignment adjusting screw, move the fixation unit until the horizontal lines
of the smear are moved to the left side. (Try to move about 1 mm from the original
position, though the distance depends on the magnitude of the smear.)
3) Mark the screw position as the horizontal lines of the smear are moved to the left side.
4) Fine-control the alignment between the original position and the position being
recorded as the lines are moved to the left side.
* Turning the alignment adjusting screw may not immediately move the fixation unit.
Thus, it is advisable to move the unit while observing the move of the screw-fixed
portions at the top and bottom of the fixation unit on the right side plate.
(Above can be done easier by removing the screw and observing move of the screw hole.)
And the screw-fixed portion at the top of the fixation unit may sometimes not follow
that of the bottom portion. In such case, retry the operation after loosening the duct set
screws on the fixation unit.
* When the alignment adjustment alone is not enough for adjusting wrinkles or missed
print, adjust the heat roller speed. (Modify the default value by ±10 or ±20)
(See Section 2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) Table 2-4
Engine Control Parameter List (3/4))
12-12
c) If horizontal lines of a smear are conspicuous across the full width a print sample
Increase the heat roller speed.
Modify the heat roller speed control parameter by +10 or +20 from the default value.

13cm
6 Repeat above adjustment and printing until the smear without registration becomes
inconspicuous on No.5 test print. Then check No.14 test print for irregularities of the lines
in a space 13 mm or so away from the rear end.
* Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with No.5. Thus, if further adjustment

is needed in spite of the adjustment made in No.5, adjust the heat roller speed. If the
speed adjustment doesn’t solve the problem, readjust referencing the results of No.5
and No.14.
7 Tighten 2 fixation unit set screws.
8 Use A1 size for the adjustment.

As the adjustment with A0 size is completed, generate 3 copies of No.5 test print
consecutively in the same manner.
* Even when the smear was found on A1 size, first adjust with A0 size.
If a smear appears at any place or size on the print sample, modify the heat roller
speed control parameter by -10 or -20 from the default value.
* Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with A0 size. Thus, if further
adjustment was needed with A1 size, support it by adjusting the heat roller speed.
If the speed adjustment could not eliminate the problem, proceed to readjustment
referencing the results of A1 and A0 size.
12-13
12.4.3 Adjusting the Cut Squareness
1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in the roll 1 (upper drawer).
2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and output engine test pattern 15. (maintenance code
<10> "15," see Section 2.3.10.)
3 Measure the cut squareness. For measuring method and reference value, see "No. 7" in
Section 8.2.1.
4 If the standard value is met, remove the cutter cover and then loosen 2 screws on both side
and 1 screw at the center.
Cutter mounting sheet metal
5 While moving up and down the cutter mounting brackets (at a rough estimate), adjust the
cutter mounting height.
6 Tighten the screws to fix.
7 After repeating steps 2 through 6, adjust until the measured value satisfies the reference
value.
12-14
12.4.4 Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy
Select the maintenance code <11>, subcode "04" in the maintenance mode if performing the
adjustment after the test print and measurement. ⇒See item (1) below.
Select maintenance code <12>, subcode "801 - 848" in the maintenance mode if the condition
and value to be adjusted are known in advance. ⇒See item (2) below.
This paragraph outlines adjustment procedures and explains supplementary operations. For
concrete operating procedures (LCD display and key operation) in the engine maintenance
mode, see "2.3.11 Maintenance Code <11> "REGULATE" (Adjustment)," "2.3.12
Maintenance Code <12> "PARAMETER" (Parameter)" or "2.3.13 Maintenance Code
<13> "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."
(1) When the cut length is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data are set to defaults.
1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code <11>.
2 Select subcode "11< 04> Cut-Length."
3 Select the roll paper and print length test conditions.
Note: For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use
default value as it is.
4 Output the print of subcode "04."

Three sheets are outputted continuously.
5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specification.
For the measuring method and reference value, see 8.2.1 No.6.
OK if within the specification.
- Repeat steps 3 and 4, when further making a check under other test conditions.
- Go to step 9 when finishing the test.
If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6.
6 To change the correction value, calculate the new value as shown in the example below.
Example 1: When the paper length is short. (The actual sheet length is 1182 mm although the
reference value, A0 = 1189±6 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value:
1182 - 1189 = - 7 mm
2. Calculate the number of print lines equivalent to the difference
(1 line = 0.0423 mm):- 7 ÷ 0.04213 = -165.8 lines ⇒ -165 lines
12-15
3. Check the value saved in NVRAM.
* The default is determined by the print length and roll paper specifications.
4. Calculate the correction value and enter the result:
300 lines - 165 lines = 135 lines
7 Output the test print of subcode "04." Three sheets are output continuously.
8 Measure the length of the third sheet and check whether the paper length meets the
requirement. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM.
(2) If the cut length is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known in
advance:
This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the cut length of plain
paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters.
2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number.
- Select the subcode suitable for the print length and roll paper conditions.
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into the number of lines to determine the correction
value. For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.
4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the cut length, repeat steps 2 and 3
above.
5 Save the correction value in NVRAM.
6 Execute the print with maintenance code <11> and subcode "04," and check the cut length
after adjustment.
- Check all codes with which the cut length was adjusted.
- Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment.
For the print executing method, see 2.3.11.
12-16
12.4.5 Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy
Select maintenance code <11>, subcode "03" in the maintenance mode if performing the
This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For
Hint: The type and width of the paper used are A1 width of plain paper.
However, if the user's paper use condition is limited, the adjustment may be
performed under that condition.
(1) When the plotting length is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default. Only
the roll paper is subject to adjustment of print length. To adjust the A4 cut paper, follow the
procedures in item (2).
2 Select subcode "11<03> plotting -Length."
3 Select the roll paper to be used.
- The print length accuracy may be adjusted using either roll 1 or 2.
Note: For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use
default value as it is.

Three sheets are outputted continuously. (print length: 1189 mm)
5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specification.

Go to step 9, finishing the test.
If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6.
Example 1: When the plotting length is short. (The actual print length is 1122.8 mm although
the reference value is 1127.1 mm ± 0.5 %.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference

value:1122.8 - 1127.1 = -4.3 mm
12-17
2. Calculate the shift from the reference value in percentage
-4.3 ÷ 1127.1 = -0.00382 (about 0.38 % short)
(Default = 1915 lines/sec)
4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to reference
value:
1915 × (-0.00382) = -7.31 ⇒ -7 lines/sec
1915 - 7 = 1908 lines/sec
Example 2: When the plotting length is long. (The actual print length is 1131.8 mm although
the reference value is 1127.1 mm - 0.5 %.)
1131.8 - 1127.1 = 4.7 mm
2. Calculate the shift from the standard in percentage:
4.7 ÷ 1127.1 = -0.00417 (about 0.42 % long)
(Default = 1915 lines/sec)
4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the to the print length to
reference value:
1915 × 0.00417 = 7.99 ⇒ 8 lines/sec
1915 + 8 = 1923 lines/sec
7 Output test print of subcode "03." Three sheets are output continuously.
8 Measure the plotting length of the third sheet and check whether it meets the requirement.
If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable, reexecute the
above procedures from Step 6.
(2) If the plotting length is adjusted when the value to be adjusted is known in advance
This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the plotting length to be
reduced or extended by certain millimeters.
2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number of the item to be adjusted.
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into lines per second to determine the correction value.
For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.
5 Execute the print using maintenance code <11> and subcode "03," and check the plotting
length after adjustment.
12-18
12.4.6 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration
This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For
(1) When the top edge registration is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default.
2 Select subcode "11<01> Front-Regist."
3 Select roll paper and print length test conditions.
Note: For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default
value as it is.

5 Measure the top edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specifications.

If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust (Go to step 9.)
Example 1: When the top edge registration is short. (The actual top edge registration is 18.2
mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and reference value:

18.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm
2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of
seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s)
-3.5 ÷ 80 = -0.04375 (sec)
⇒ This means the plotting starts 43.75 ms earlier.
12-19
3. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the registration to the reference
value (1 step = 1.0 msec).
43.75 ÷ 1 = 43.75 ⇒ 44 (steps)
(Default = 400 steps*)
* The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications.
400 + 44 = 444 (steps)
Example 2: When the top edge registration is long. (The actual top edge registration is 25.7
mm although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)
25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm
2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of
seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s)
4.0 ÷ 80 = -0.05 (sec)
⇒ This means the plotting starts 55 msec later.
value (1 step = 2.0 msec).
50.0 ÷ 1 = 50.0 ⇒ 50 (steps)
(Default = 400 steps*)
* The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications.
5. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to the reference
value.
400 - 50 = 350 (steps)
7 Output the print of subcode "01." Three sheets are output continuously.
8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted check if it satisfies the
specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable,
reexecute the above procedures from Step 6.
(2) If the top edge registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are
known in advance:
This adjustment is effective, for instance, when the user requests the top edge registration of
plain paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters.
1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code <12>.
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction
value. Enter that correction value. For the calculation method, see Step 6 of Paragraph
(1) above.
4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the top edge registration, repeat steps
2 and 3 above.
12-20

6 Perform maintenance code <11>, subcode <01> to print, check the top edge registration
after adjustment.
- Check all the subcodes where the top edge registration was adjusted.
- For the adjusted subcodes, match the test conditions and the print conditions.
For the print method, see Section 2.2.11. For measuring method and reference value, see
No. 3 in Section 8.2.1.
12.4.7 Adjusting the Center Registration
This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains supplementary operations. For
(1) When the center registration is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default.
1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code <11>.
2 Select the subcode "11<02> Center-Regist."
3 Select the roll paper to be used.
Note: For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default
value as it is.

5 Measure the top edge registration of the sheet outputted third to check if it satisfies the
specifications.

If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust. ⇒Go to step 6.
12-21
Example 1: When the center registration is short. (The actual center registration is 25.2 mm
although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value.
25.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm
2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.0508 mm).
-3.5 ÷ 0.0508 = -6.9 pitches
⇒ This means the 6.9 pitch print position is
shifted rightward.
value (1 step = 1 pitches).
6.9 ÷ 1 = 6.9 ⇒ 7 (steps)
(Default = 50 steps)
50 + 7 = 57 (steps)
Example 2: When the center registration is long. (The actual side registration is 25.7 mm
although the reference value is 21.7 ± 3.0 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the standard:

25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm
2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.508 mm):
4.0 ÷ 0.508 = 7.9 (pitches)
⇒ This means the 7.9 pitch print position is
shifted leftward.
value (1 step = 8 pitches):
7.9 ÷ 1 = 7.9 ⇒ 8 (steps)
(Default = 50 steps)
50 - 8 = 42 (step)

8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it to NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable,
reexecute the above procedures from Step 6.
(2) If the center registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known
in advance
This method is effective when the user requests you to shift the center registration of the roll 1 to
the left or right by a given amount.
12-22
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction
value.
For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.
4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the center registration, repeat steps
2 and 3 above.
5 Save the correction value to NVRAM.
6 Execute the print with maintenance code <11> and subcode "03," and check the center
registration after adjustment.
- Check all codes with which the center registration was adjusted.
- Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment.
12-23
12.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space
The device supports the following maximum plotting range:

The device has a dead space of 3 mm at the top edge of the paper.
When the user wants wider plotting range, the dead space can be reduced so that the image will
be printed as near to the edge as possible. To this end, perform the maintenance code <12>,
subcode "663" of engine maintenance mode of "Top Edge Clip Requirement."
Note: If this adjustment is performed, explain the user that the possibility of paper
jam increases and get approval.
The dead space at the top edge of paper is provided as the clip amount to
separate the paper from the heat roller in the fusing process. Accordingly, if
this clip amount is narrowed, the possibility of paper jam increases
(particularly when high density data is plotted at the top edge of paper).
The preset value for the top edge clip amount adjustment does not become
effective unless the device is rebooted, thus requiring care.
2 Enter the subcode "663."
3 Convert the desired dead space (mm) into the number of lines.
Example: To set the dead space to 1mm, conduct the following operation. (default: 71 lines
= 3.0 mm)
: Determine what number of lines is equivalent to 1 mm (1 line = 0.04233 mm)
and enter the result.
1 ÷ 0.04233 = 23.62 ⇒ 24 (lines)
4 Save the value in NVRAM.

5 Turn off the device once and turn it on again to reboot the system.
6 Allow the computer to send the data whose top margin is minimum to the device and check
whether the plotting is printed correctly.
12-24
12.6 Adjusting the LED Head Joint
This section describes how to adjust the LED head joint. This process is needed after the LED
head is replaced with a new one.
(1) Configuration of LED head
The LED head is designed as illustrated below. Therefore, it is necessary to correct and adjust the
print shift at joints among heads.
LED head
Head C Head A
Plotter Head B

(2) Parameters
To adjust LED head joints, use the following parameters. (* Pay attention that the preset
parameter will not deviate from the allowable range.)
1 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "708" : Fine adjustment of joint between heads A and B
(setting range: 0 to 65)
2 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "709" : Fine adjustment of joint between heads C and B
(setting range: 0 to 65)
After the adjustment in the order of line with maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and
maintenance coded <12>, subcord "713," finely adjust the joint with this parameter. The
amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1."
3 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "710": Start address used to write the data to each head
memory. To find the first print shift, temporarily specify "100." The shipping default is
fixed to "94."
4 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "711": Line adjustment parameter used between heads
A and B (setting range: 87 to 93)
12-25
5 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "712": Line adjustment parameter used for head B
(fixed to 0)
6 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "713": Lin adjustment parameter used between heads
C and B (setting range: 87 to 93)
This parameter adjusts the shift in the order of line. The amount of 42.3 µm is shifted
against the adjustment value "1." To find the first print shift, temporarily set both
maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "713" to 98.
Since maintenance code <12>, subcord "712" is a reference, or head B, the value must be
fixed to 0.
(3) Basic operation
Shown below are operations observed on the device when above parameters settings are
changed.
(a) Maintenance code <12>, subcord "708" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "709"
1 When decreasing set values:

Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.
B
C A
Shifted Shifted
* Image B does not move since it is reference.

2 When increasing set values:
Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as
reference.
Shifted Shifted
C A
B
12-26 Paper feed direction

(b) Maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "713"
1 When decreasing set values:

Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as
reference.
Shifted Shifted
C A
B
2 When increasing set values:

Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.
B
C A
Shifted Shifted
12-27
(4) Print pattern
Use pattern 7. Print out maintenance code <10>, subcode <07>.
(5) Adjustment method
(a) Check the adjustment positions.
Provide the following parameter settings and printed.
Maintenance code <12>, subcode "708": 0

With the above settings, the pattern is output with images shifted as shown below. Identify the
place of shift from this sample.
B
C A
12-28
(b) Adjustment
Execute the test printing by setting the following parameters respectively. These values are set,
considering the distance 3.8 mm between A and B, and B and C of the LED head.
Maintenance code <12> subcode "708": 16
In the following settings, adjust according to how the printed image is shifted.
1 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B

Increase the setting values of both maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and maintenance
code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value
"1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the set values of both
maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and maintenance code <12> subcode "713."
If they are initially 90, decrease them to 89.
B
C A
After the adjustment in the unit of line, fine adjustment is necessary. Thus, check the shift
direction and set the appropriate values to maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and
maintenance code <12> subcode "709."
12-29
2 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B
Decrease the setting values of both maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and maintenance
code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the adjustment value "1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting values of
both maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and maintenance code <12> subcode "713."
If they are initially 90, decrease them to 91.
C A
B
12-30
3 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction, C is shifted in the paper feed direction and
reverce direction on the basis of B
Increase the setting values of maintenance code <12> subcode "708." Decrease the setting
value of maintenance code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against
the adjustment value "1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the setting value of
maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and increase the set value of maintenance code <12>
subcode "713."
C
B
A
12-31
4 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction and reverce direction, C is shifted in the paper
feed direction on the basis of B
Decrease the setting values of maintenance code <12> subcode "708." Increase the set value
of maintenance code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 µm is shifted against the
adjustment value "1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting value of
maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and decrease the set value of maintenance code <12>
subcode "713."
A
B
C
(6) Judgment criteria
When lines are united in the scan direction on the test pattern 7, head joints are correctly adjusted.
Note that some lines may exceptionally be dislocated (terminated) due to jitter. If other lines are
united, the image is acceptable.
(7) Data storage
When the image is acceptable, save the data in the NVRAM. See Section "2.3.13 Maintenance
Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."
12-32
Chapter 13 Adjustment (Scanner)
This chapter describes the scanner adjustment items required when replacing the CIS unit, etc.
13.1 Items Required for Adjustment
Adjust the scanner using the Web function of the device and two different tools that run on the
PC for adjustment and the originals for adjustment.
1 This document
2 Network cable
Cross cable or straight cable
3 PC for adjustment
Web browser
Scanner maintenance tool (scans the originals for adjustment)
Scanner adjustment tool (calculates the adjustment value based on the adjusted image)
4 Originals for adjustment and evaluation (3 types)
Original for feed adjustment (297 × 297 mm)
Original for connection adjustment (A1)
Original for evaluation (A1)
・Web browser
・Scanner maintenance tool
・Scanner adjustment tool
Originals for
adjustment
Maintenance
Manual
Original fed with:
LP-1020MF
(Device to be
adjusted)
Network (cross cable or straight cable)
Figure 13-1 Items Required for Adjustment
13-1
13.2 Outline of Adjustment Work
(1) Shading offset adjustment
- Execute with the Web browser.
(2) Original feed adjustment (Motor Speed adjustment)
- Set the initial value and scan speed with the Web browser.
- Scan the original for adjustment with the scanner maintenance tool.
- Calculate the adjustment parameters from the scan data at each scan speed using the scanner
adjustment tool.
- Enter the adjustment parameters with the Web browser.
(3) Connection adjustment in main and sub scan directions (CIS Connection adjustment)
- Set the initial value and scan speed with the Web browser.
- Scan the original for adjustment with the scanner maintenance tool.
- Calculate the adjustment parameters from the scan data at each scan speed using the scanner
adjustment tool.
- Enter the adjustment parameters with the Web browser.
(4) Registration adjustment
13-2
13.3 PC for Adjustment
13.3.1 Conditions of PC for Adjustment
The conditions of the PC used for adjustment are as follows:

- Windows 2000/XP (including SP2)
- Memory 256 MB (512 MB or more recommended)
- HDD space 5 GB or more
- Screen size 800 × 600 or larger (1024 × 768 or larger recommended)
- Web browser (Internet Explorer 6 or later version recommended)
13.3.2 Scanner Maintenance Tool (ScanMainte.exe)
This tool makes the device scan under the scan conditions for adjustment.
It runs on the Windows 2000/XP (including SP2).
Double-click the ScanMainte.exe to start the tool.

The "File" function of the device is used for scanning.
Enter IP address of device
Press either
button to execute
the scan
13-3
13.3.3 Scanner Adjustment Tool (MFTool.exe)
This tool calculates the adjustment value from BMP image scanned with the scanner
maintenance tool.
It runs on the Windows 2000/XP (including SP2).
Double-click the MFTool.exe to start the tool.
A check is given when

the adjustment
completed
Press this button to go to

each adjustment screen
13-4
13.4 Originals for Adjustment and Evaluation
Check that the originals are free from extreme curl, dog-ear, or wrinkle.
Handle the originals carefully.
13.4.1 Original for Feed Adjustment (for Motor Speed Adjustment)
This original is used to adjust the motor feed speed.
for Motor Speed Adjustment
Original feed for scan in

landscape direction
Original feed for scan in

portrait direction
Cut along a dotted line to

size 297 × 297 mm.
Size: 297 mm × 297 mm (originally A3 portrait)
13.4.2 Original for Connection Adjustment (for CIS Connection Adjustment)
This original is used to adjust the connection points of respective CIS sensors.
for CIS Connection Adjustment
Original feed
direction
Size: A1 landscape
13-5
13.4.3 Original for Evaluation (Copy/Scan Standard Chart)
This original is used for evaluation before and after scanner adjustment.
Original feed
direction
Size: A1 landscape
13-6
13.5 Preparation for Adjustment
13.5.1 Connecting the Device
Specify the device for network connection and check the connection with PC for adjustment.
13.5.2 Starting Respective Tools
(1) Open the scanner parameter adjustment page (Scanner Parameter) of the Web browser on
the device side.
[Procedure]
1 Start the Web browser on the PC for adjustment, and enter the IP address of the device into
URL (address) to access to the Web browser on the device side.
2 When the top screen of the device Web browser is displayed, enter the password (csccsudr or
CSCCSUDR) for a maintenance person into the password block at the lower left of the page,
and press the [Login] button to log in.
3 Click "Maintenance" in the page list on the left side of Web page to open the Maintenance
page.
4 Click the "Scanner Maintenance" link on the Maintenance page to open the "Scanner
Parameter" page.
* Open "New Window" to facilitate the work
13-7
(2) Start the scanner maintenance tool.
(3) Start the scanner adjustment tool.
13-8
13.5.3 Example of Screen Layout
To facilitate the work, setup the Web browser and tools before adjustment, and lay out them as
shown below.
Web tool
Adjustment
tool
Maintenance tool
13.5.4 Printing the Scanner Parameters
This adjustment rewrites the scanner parameters, and therefore be sure to execute "Scan
Information Print" before adjustment.
(For "Scan Information Print," see "LP-1020-MF/LP-1020L-MF Multi-Function Plotter
User’s Guide (Plotter Unit)".)
13-9
13.6 Shading Offset Adjustment Procedure
This adjustment prevents a difference in density of respective CIS sensors that may arise
depending on a difference in height of the shading guide.
[Preparation]
1 Clean the glass surface and the shading guide.
2 Check that the shading guide does not get stuck to the scanner cover or is not oblique.
3 Check that the levers are not set for an original having a strong crease (both sides).
If set for an original having a strong crease → Return the levers for normal original.
4 Check that the scanner cover is closed tightly.
5 Check that there is output result of "Scan Information Print."
[Parameter description]
Monochrome
No. Unit Range Description
ISI - 111 - - Shading offset value of CIS (A)
ISI - 112 - - Shading offset value of CIS (B)
ISI - 113 - - Shading offset value of CIS (C)
ISI - 114 - - Shading offset value of CIS (D)
ISI - 115 - - Shading offset value of CIS (E)
Color
ISI - 226 - - Shading offset value (R) of CIS (A)
ISI - 227 - - Shading offset value (G) of CIS (A)
ISI - 228 - - Shading offset value (B) of CIS (A)
ISI - 229 - - Shading offset value (R) of CIS (B)
ISI - 230 - - Shading offset value (G) of CIS (B)
ISI - 231 - - Shading offset value (B) of CIS (B)
ISI - 232 - - Shading offset value (R) of CIS (C)
ISI -233 - - Shading offset value (G) of CIS (C)
ISI -234 - - Shading offset value (B) of CIS (C)
ISI - 235 - - Shading offset value (R) of CIS (D)
ISI -236 - - Shading offset value (G) of CIS (D)
ISI - 237 - - Shading offset value (B) of CIS (D)
ISI - 238 - - Shading offset value (R) of CIS (E)
ISI - 239 - - Shading offset value (G) of CIS (E)
ISI - 240 - - Shading offset value (B) of CIS (E)
13-10
[Adjustment procedure]
1 Start the device and choose "PRINT" mode on the control panel.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
SAVING DELIVERY FILE
2 On the "Scanner Parameter" page of the Web browser, check that "White on the glass" and
"White on the grass (for color)" values are not 0 or 255.
* If the values are 0 or 255, the CIS unit must be replaced.
Check that their values

are not 0 or 255.
⇒If NG, the process is
fault.
13-11
3 On the "Scanner Parameter" page, press [Automatic Adjust] button under the "White on the
glass."
* It will take several seconds after the button operation up to the end.
* The "Shading Offset" and "Shading Offset (for color)" values are automatically
adjusted.
Press this button to

execute adjustment
4 After the adjustment finished, refresh the "Scanner Parameter" page.
13-12
5 Check that the adjustment value of "Shading Offset" was refreshed.
The adjusted results are entered here.
Thus, the "Shading Offset Adjustment" is over.
13-13
[Recovery method]
If the adjustment failed due to any faults, enter directly the ISI 111-115 and 226-240 parameter
values of "Scan Information Print" and press [Manual Adjust] button to restore the values. For
the judgment criteria, see "13.9 Checking Adjustment Results."
If situations are worse

after adjustment...
Set values manually Re-enter original values
13-14
13.7 Original Feed Speed Adjustment/Connection Adjustment in Main and Sub Scan
Directions
13.7.1 Original Feed Speed Adjustment (Motor Speed)
Adjust the original feed speed (60 mm/s, 30 mm/s).
[Preparation]
1 Check that there is output result of "Scan Information Print."
Monochrome
No. Unit Initial value Description
Specify the rotation speed to forward the
MSC-67 PPS 10913
original at 60 mm/s.
Specify the rotation speed to reverse the
MSC-68 PPS 10913
original at 60 mm/s.
MSC-69 PPS 10913
original at 30mm/s.
MSC-70 PPS 10913
original at 30mm/s.
Color
No. Unit Initial value Description
MSC-167 PPS 10913
original at 200dpi (60 mm/s).
MSC-168 PPS 10913
MSC-169 PPS 7275
MSC-170 PPS 10913
MSC-171 PPS 10913
MSC-172 PPS 21826
MSC-173 PPS 7275
MSC-174 PPS 21826
Note: The larger the value is, the faster the feed speed becomes. The scan results are thinned
out in the main scan direction.
13-15
1 Start the device and choose "PRINT" mode on the control panel.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
2 On the "Scanner Parameter" page of Web browser, press [Set Default] button for "Motor
Speed/CIS Connection" to set default values for adjustment.
Set default
values
3 Set the Scan Speed to 60 mm/s.
Choose 60 mm/s
Set the scan

speed
After refreshing, the parameters are reflected in these values.
13-16
4 Refresh the "Scanner Parameter" page and check that respective adjustment values were
refreshed to the following values.
Motor Speed
60 mm/s MSC 67 - 68 10913 10913
30 mm/s MSC 69 - 70 10913 10913
CIS Connection
1st dot ISI 16 - 20 4153 5153 10305 15457 20609
End dot ISI 21 - 25 5152 10304 15456 20608 21608
60 mm/s ISI 8 - 11 20 640 640 20 −
30 mm/s ISI 12 - 15 20 640 640 20 −
CIS Connection (sub)

Sensor MSC 38 - 41 0 0 0 0
Motor MSC 42 - 45 0 0 0 0
Regist
Front(60, 30 mm/s) MSC 46 - 47 Don't Care Don't Care
Back (60, 30 mm/s) MSC 48 - 49 Don't Care Don't Care
Side MSC 122 0 −
5 Switch the device to the "FILE" mode.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
13-17
6 Press [1_MotorSpeed_L60] button of the scanner maintenance tool.
7 When "Set Original" is displayed on the control panel of the device, set the original for
adjustment in the landscape direction (orientation 1).
Original orientation 1 for scan in

landscape direction
13-18
8 After the original scanning finished, check that the data "1_MotorSpeed_L60.bmp" is
created in the folder of the scanner maintenance tool.
Scan finished when

"Finish" is displayed
here.
9 Successively, press [2_MotorSpeed_P60] button of the scanner maintenance tool.
13-19
adjustment in the portrait direction (orientation 2).

Original orientation 2, 3 for
scan in portrait direction
A After the original scanning finished, check that the data "2_MotorSpeed_P60.bmp" is
Scan finished when

"Finish" is displayed.
B Switch the device to the "PRINT" mode.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
13-20
C Set the scan speed to 30 mm/s.
Choose 30 mm/s
Set the scan

speed
After refreshing, the parameters are reflected in these values.
D Switch the device to the "FILE" mode.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
E Press [3_MotorSpeed_P30] button of the scanner maintenance tool.
13-21
F When "Set Original" is displayed on the control panel of the device, set the original for
adjustment in the portrait direction (orientation 3).

Original orientation 2, 3 for
scan in portrait direction
G After the original scanning finished, check that the data "3_MotorSpeed_P30.bmp" is
Scan finished when

13-22
H Open "Motor sending adjustment" of "MSC Adjustment" of the scanner adjustment tool.
Make the tool calculate the adjustment values of images 1 and 2 scanned so far at 60 mm/s.
Press the [Calc] button and after a while, the adjustment parameters at 60 mm/s will be
displayed. Take a note of these values.
Do not check
Press this button to open the

MotorSpeed adjustment dialog box
Choose the scanned image

1_MotorSpeed_L60.BMP
Choose the scanned image

2_MotorSpeed_P60.BMP
Execute the calculation !
Result is displayed here
[Reference] As a method for taking a note of parameters, the Print screen (Snap
shot) will be convenient.
[Reference] Utilize the "Scanner Adjustment Results Memorandum" attached. (See

13.10 Scanner Adjustment Results Memorandum)
13-23
I Set the scanned images 1 and 3 to the tool, and make the tool calculate the adjustment values
at 30 mm/s.
Set the scanned image

1_MotorSpeed_L60.BMP
Set the scanned image

3_MotorSpeed_P30.BMP
Result is displayed here

When the calculation finished, press [OK] or [Cancel] button to close the dialog box.
13-24
J Switch the device to the "PRINT" mode again.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
K On the "Scanner Parameter" page, enter respective parameter values at 60 mm/s and 30 mm/s
taken a note of lately, and press [SetParam] button to execute.
Parameter setting for monochrome
Same value is enter

in two boxes
Results at 60 mm/s (1 and 2)

Results at 30 mm/s (1 and 3)
After enter the values,
press this button to execute
13-25
Parameter setting for color
After enter the values, Do not change this parameter. It is used to feed the original
press this button to backward.
execute
Set the following value.

MSC167: Results at 60 mm/s (1 and 2)
MSC169: Two-thirds of the results at 60 mm/s (1 and 2)
(Round off to the whole number.)
MSC171: Results at 30 mm/s (1 and 3)
MSC173: Two-thirds of the results at 30 mm/s (1 and 3)
(Round off to the whole number.)
* After the setting finished, be sure to execute “REFRESH TO LATEST

INFORMATION” or “REFRESH” by the Web browser.
13-26
13.7.2 Connection Adjustment in Main and Sub Scan Directions (CIS Connection)
Following the feed adjustment, execute the connection adjustment in main and sub scan
directions of the sensors (60 mm/s, 30 mm/s).
This adjustment is executed semi-automatically.
Parameter of connection adjustment in main scan direction
ISI - 16 Dot 1 to 5152 1st dot position of CIS (A) in the main scan direction
ISI - 17 Dot 5153 to 10304 1st dot position of CIS (B) in the main scan direction
ISI - 18 Dot 10305 to 15456 1st dot position of CIS (C) in the main scan direction
ISI - 19 Dot 15457 to 20608 1st dot position of CIS (D) in the main scan direction
ISI - 20 Dot 20609 to 25760 1st dot position of CIS (E) in the main scan direction
ISI - 21 Dot 1 to 5152 End dot position of CIS (A) in the main scan direction
ISI - 22 Dot 5153 to 10304 End dot position of CIS (B) in the main scan direction
ISI - 23 Dot 10305 to 15456 End dot position of CIS (C) in the main scan direction
ISI - 24 Dot 15457 to 20608 End dot position of CIS (D) in the main scan direction
ISI - 25 Dot 20609 to 25760 End dot position of CIS (E) in the main scan direction
Note: Specify the range (5152 dots) of CIS (A to D) to be used for scan.
Sensors are laid out in alphabetical order (A to E) from the right toward the device.
Parameter of connection adjustment in sub scan direction (for monochrome)

Displacement between the reference points B
ISI - 8 Line -5 to 35
and A at motor speed 60mm/s (by line)
Displacement between the reference points C
ISI - 9 Line 620 to 660
and B at motor speed 60mm/s (by line)
ISI - 10 Line 620 to 660
and D at motor speed 60mm/s (by line)
Displacement between the reference points D
and E at motor speed 60mm/s (by line)
ISI - 13 Line 620 to 660
ISI - 14 Line 620 to 660
13-27
Parameter of connection adjustment in sub scan direction (for color)

ISI-158 Line -5 to 35
ISI-159 Line 620 to 660
ISI-160 Line 620 to 660
ISI-163 Line 620 to 660
ISI-164 Line 620 to 660
Note: In reference to Position 15 of the CIS (C), specify the displacement (by lines) of the
sensors A, B, D, and E in sub scan direction.
Parameter of connection fine adjustment in main and sub scan direction

Fine-adjustment value of the end dot point
MSC - 38 Dot -10 to 10
of CIS (A) (lateral direction)
MSC - 39 Dot -10 to 10
of CIS (B) (lateral direction)
MSC - 40 Dot -10 to 10
of CIS (C) (lateral direction)
MSC - 41 Dot -10 to 10
of CIS (D) (lateral direction)
Fine-adjustment value between CIS (A) and
MSC - 42 Dot -10 to 10
CIS (B) (longitudinal direction)
Fine-adjustment value between CIS (B) and
MSC - 43 Dot -10 to 10
CIS (C) (longitudinal direction)
Fine-adjustment value between CIS (C) and
MSC - 44 Dot -10 to 10
CIS (D) (longitudinal direction)
Fine-adjustment value between CIS (D) and
MSC - 45 Dot -10 to 10
CIS (E) (longitudinal direction)
Supplement: Used to fine-adjust the adjustment value in main and sub scan directions. Enter
0 to redo the adjustment.
13-28
1 Check that the scan speed is 30 mm/s.
Check that scan speed

is 30 mm/s (01).
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
13-29
3 Press [4_CISConnection_30] button of the scanner maintenance tool.
adjustment (orientation 4).
Original
orientation 4, 5
13-30
5 After the original scanning finished, check that the data "4_CISConnection_30.bmp" is
Scan finished when

6 Switch the device to the "PRINT" mode.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
7 Set the scan speed to 60 mm/s.
Choose 60 mm/s
Set the scan speed
* After the setting finished, be sure to execute "REFRESH TO LATEST

INFORMATION" or "REFRESH" by the Web browser.
13-31
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
9 Press [5_CISConnection_60] button of the scanner maintenance tool.
adjustment (orientation 5).
Original
orientation 4, 5
13-32
A After the original scanning finished, check that the data "5_CISConnection_60.bmp" is
Scan finished when

13-33
B Open "Sensor connector adjustment" of "MSC Adjustment" of the scanner adjustment tool.
Make the tool calculate the adjustment values of images 4 scanned so far at 30 mm/s.
Press the [Calc] button and after a while, four adjustment parameters at 30 mm/s will be
Remove a check from Sensor

connector adjustment
Press this button to open the CIS

Connection adjustment dialog box
Set the scanned image (BMP)

4_CISConnection_30.BMP
Results are displayed here

13-34
C After taking a note of the calculation results, press [Cancel] button to return to the previous
dialog box once, and again open the "Sensor connector adjustment" dialog box.
D Set the scanned image 5 to the tool and make the tool calculate the adjustment values at 60
mm/s.
Set the scanned image (BMP)

5_CISConnection_60.BMP
Results are displayed here

E Switch the device to the "PRINT" mode again.
MENU COPY PRINT
POWER
13-35
F On the "Scanner Parameter" page of the Web browser, enter the parameter values displayed in
steps B and D, and press [SetParam] button to execute. (Parameter setting for monochrome)
* For the adjustment values (ISI 16-25) in the main scan direction, use the values at 60
mm/s.
After entering
values, press this
button to set.
Enter the calculation Enter the calculation

results at 30 mm/s results at 60 mm/s

13-36
G On the "Scanner Parameter" page of the Web browser, enter the parameter values displayed in
steps B and D, and press [SetParam] button to execute. (Parameter setting for color)
After entering
values, press this
button to set.
Enter the calculation Enter the calculation

results at 30 mm/s results at 60 mm/s

13-37
H If the side registration is not adjusted, re-set the MSC parameter 122 value of the "Scan
Information Print" to the "Regist: Side" (MSC122).
After entering the value, Enter the value

press this button to set.

13-38
13.8 Registration Adjustment Procedure
Adjust the registration at 60 mm/s and 30 mm/s respectively. The adjustment items are as
follows:
- Side registration (common to monocrome, clor, and scanning speed)
- Top edge registration
- Bottom edge registration (synchronous scanning mode)
13.8.1 Description for registration adjustment parameter
Parameter for monochrome

Range
No. Unit Description
(initial value)
Scan start time (top edge) at motor speed =
-
MSC-46 msec 60 mm/s, CIS = A4-size x 5 sensors,
(1090)
reference = CIS (C).
-
MSC-47 msec 30mm/s, CIS = A4-size x 5 sensors,
(2180)
The number of lines to be scanned beyond
-
MSC-48 line the regist sensor at motor speed = 60mm/s,
(1460)
synchro-scan mode, reference = CIS (C).
-
(2935)
Set offset value between the scanner glass
MSC-122 1/10mm 4 to 94 and CIS unit. Use 0 during adjustment.
Initial value is 47.
Parameter for color
Range
No. Unit Description
(initial value)
-
MSC-127 msec 60 mm/s, CIS = A4-size x 5 sensors,
(1090)
-
(1635)
-
(2180)
-
MS-130 msec 20mm/s, CIS = A4-size x 5 sensors,
(3270)
-
(487)
-
(730)
-
(978)
-
(1460)
13-39
Note: The relationship between the registration value R [msec] and the number of lines N
[dot] are as follows:
N[dot]=60 [mm/sec] x (R[msec] / 1000) x (600[dpi] / 25.4[mm/inch])
Use the formula below to obtain the value R [msec] to displace the registration by N [dot].
R[msec]=1000 / 60[mm/sec]] x (25.4[mm/inch] / 600[dpi]) x N[dot]

=25.4 / 36 x N[dot]
* at motor speed = 60mm/s
13.8.2 Adjusting the Side Registration
Adjust the side registration when an image is scanned in the shifted position even if an original is
set meeting the line on the scanner glass.
Set value unit is 0.1 mm.

Setting range is 4 to 94 (0.4 mm to 9.4 mm; design value is 4.7 mm)
- If the left edge of original is skipped

→ Set smaller value.
- If large margin is generated at the left edge of original
→ Set larger value.
13.8.3 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration Value
Adjust the top edge registration when large margin is generated at the top edge of original, or
reversely the top edge of original is skipped from scan. The registration value can be set for
monochrome, color and scanning speed respectively.
The unit of set value is time.
- If the top edge of original is skipped from the image

- If large margin is generated at the top edge of original and top edge of image
13-40
13.8.4 Adjusting the Bottom Edge Registration Value
Adjust the bottom edge registration when large margin is generated at the bottom edge of
original, or reversely the bottom edge of original is skipped from scan. The registration value can
be set for monochrome, color and scanning speed respectively.
The unit of set value is line.
- If the bottom edge of original is skipped from the image

- If large margin is generated at the bottom edge of original and bottom edge of image
After entering the values, Enter values for monochrome Enter values for color adjustment.
press this button to set. adjustment. Value from left: 60 mm/s, 40 mm/s, 30
Value at 60 mm/s in left block mm/s, and 20 mm/s
Value at 30 mm/s in right block

13-41
13.9 Checking Adjustment Results
After the adjustment finished, copy the "Copy/Scan Standard Chart" to check the adjustment
results.
The following shows the "Copy/Scan Standard Chart."
13.9.1 Checking the Copy Results of Original Type = Text/Line
Take a copy three times under the following conditions. (Number of copies = 3 is meaningless.
Do not set this.)
[Copy conditions]
Original type: Text/Line
For other items, set default values.
Original size : Auto
Density : Normal
Background removal :4
Sharpness : Weak
Contrast : Normal
Negative/positive reversal : OFF
Scale, Margin, Move, etc. are not used at all.
13-42
[Check point, check item, and criteria]

1 Grid chart, top edge and bottom edge in sub scan direction (8 points)
Check item: Connection of sensors (60 mm each from top edge and bottom edge of original)
Checking method and criteria:
A horizontal line must not be broken at a joint.
The part marked with ▲ on the original is a joint of CIS sensors.
The copy result where even one part of a line is completely broken is NG, but the copy
result is OK if the line on even one of three copies is connected fully.
Note:
Corrective measure in case of NG: T.B.D
A B C D E
13-43
2 Grid chart, central area in sub scan direction (4 points)
Check item: Connection of sensors (central area of original)
The part marked with ▲ on the original is a joint of CIS sensors.
The copy result is OK if a horizontal line is not broken.
Note:
A B C D E
13-44
3 Line chart in main scan direction (one point)

Check item: Dot deletion (dot deletion or dust deletion of CIS sensor itself)
The copy result is OK if a line on the chart is not broken. NG if a line is broken.
Note:
A B C D E
13-45
13.9.2 Checking the Copy Results of Original Type = Text/Photo
Take a copy under the following conditions.
[Copy conditions]
Original type: Text/Photo
For other items, set default values.
Original size : Auto
Density : Normal
Background removal :4
Sharpness : Weak
Contrast : Normal
Negative/positive reversal : OFF
Scale, Margin, Move, etc. are not used at all.
[Check point, check item, and criteria]

4 Black patch (5 points)
Check item: White deletion (many deleted dots)
Check each black patch for evidence of white deletion.
The copy result is OK if no white deletion is found, or NG in case of white deletion.
Note:
A B C D E
13-46
5 Gradation chart (5 points)

Check item: Thin density patch, and a difference in density between sensors
For thin density, the copy result is OK if the density 2 chart (given on the original) is
drawn even a little.
NG if the density 2 chart (given on the original) disappears completely.
For a difference in density between sensors, compare graduation charts of adjacent
sensors.
The copy result is OK if a difference in density between adjacent sensors is within one
(2 for numeric value given on the original).
NG if a difference in density exceeds one.
(Example: NG if 2 in block A is thicker than 4 in block B, or 4 in block B is thicker
than 6 in block C.)
Note:
This checking is affected by a difference in density of LED head of the plotter.
A part marked with g on the original is a joint of LED head.
Before this check, make sure the tendency of density difference of the plotter engine
pattern 5.
A B C D E
Compare gradation charts of adjacent sensors
13-47
13.10 Scanner Adjustment Results Memorandumg
* Copy this page for use.
Motor Speed
60 mm/s MSC 67 - 68 60 mm/s (1, 2) results
30 mm/s MSC 69 - 70 30 mm/s (1, 3) results
CIS Connection
1st dot ISI 16 - 20
End dot ISI 21 - 25 60 mm/s results
60 mm/s ISI 8 - 11
30 mm/s ISI 12 - 15 30 mm/s results
13-48
Chapter 14 Operational Description
Chapter 14 Operational Description (Plotter)
This chapter gives fundamental information to understand mechanical operations of this device,
as well as the information on the controller that performs data communications with the
computers.
14.1 through 14.8 describe the information concerning the engine:

14.1 Features
14.2 Engine Specifications
14.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part
14.4 Fundamental Operation (Overall Operation)
14.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation
14.6 Drive and Feed System Operation
14.7 Control System
14.8 Controller
14-1
14.1 Features
This device is an intelligent plotter that uses a magnetic one-component developing system plus
600 dpi wide LED head as a developer so that it can realize excellent printing quality and
quietness suitable for LAN environment.
Main features are as follows:
1 Easy operation-first user interface design
- All operations (paper feed, drawing output) are performed at the front.
- 2-drawer type roll paper feed
2 Lightweight, compact-size, and high cost-performance engine
3 Stabilized printing by use of a one-component developing system
14-2
14.2 Engine Specifications
1 Type: Floor type

2 Recording method : Dry electrophotographic method
Photosensitive : OPC drum (φ 60)
Charging : Scorotron (negative charge applied, grid control)
Exposure : LED (36 inches, 600 dpi)
Development : One-component development
Transfer : Corona transfer
Separation : AC corona
Cleaning : Blade cleaning
Fusing : Heat roll fusing (halogen lamp)
Toner : 9µ magnetic one component (cartridge 500 g)
3 Recording density : 600 × 600 dpi
4 Process speed : 800 mm/sec
5 Process cartridge capability: about 5 km
6 Paper: Media : Normal paper (high quality paper)/Recycled paper/
Tracing paper/Mat film
Paper feed : 2-roll auto paper feed with cutter/A0, front paper feed
Paper ejection : Faceup, front ejection, tray/bucket (OP)
Effective recording width : 926.48 mm (A0), guaranteed area inside 5 mm from top
and trail edges and 3 mm from both side edges
Long size printing : 2.5 m (in use of A0 paper roll), or 10 m for L type
7 Print quality : Density : 1.0 or more
Density uniformity : 0.3 or less
Jam rate : 1/3000 or less (normal paper)
8 MTBF : 2000 h (not including consumable parts)
9 Weight : 190 kg or less (main unit + photosensitive drum)
0 Power consumption : 1350 W
Warming up time : within 4 minutes (at 23°C)
A Operating environment : Temperature ; 15 - 35°C
Humidity : 20 - 80%RH
B Noise : During operation : 61 dB or less
During standby : 53 dB or less
C Device life : S model is 80 km and L model is 200 km
14-3
14.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part
A sectional view of the internal mechanism of the device is shown in Figure 14-1 to show the
paper flow and name of each part.
Process cartridge (6 LED head and B Charge eliminator are

not included.)
D A B 5 6 C
E 7
F 8
G
4
0 1 Roll 1
H 2 Roll 2
9 3 Slitter cutter
I 4 Register roller
3 5 Primary charger
1 6 LED head
7 Developer
8 Developing sleeve
9 Transfer/separator
0 Finger
A Cleaner
2 B Charge eliminator
C Photosensitive drum
D Suction feeder
E Fixation
F Heat roller
G Backup roller
H Roller (manual feed 1)
I Roller (manual feed 2)
Figure 14-1 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part
14-4
14.4 Basic Operation (Overall Operation)
14.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration
This device consists of the four main blocks: paper feed and feed system; electrophoto process;
controller, and interface systems.
Controller Electrophoto process system
Charge Primary Exposure

elimination charge (LED)
Control panel
Engine
control Cleaner Drum Development
circuit
(board)
Transfer
separation
Data
Feed
controller Raster controller Fixation Registration
system
circuit
Paper
Paper cutter
ejector
Roll paper
External
Interface circuit Roll paper
equipment
Paper feed and feed mechanism
feed system
Figure 14-2 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration
14-5
14.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration
OPERATION PANEL BL03 R/C/L

MS04
GM01
BL02,BL06 MS08 INT1 LEDH
TH03
BM01 CC
TH01 TS02 EL
TH02
TH04 DEVELOPER
MS06-1 FUSER
DBD
DRUM DBA
MS05 CLEANER TS01
FL01
MS06-2 FL02
HM01 CL04 TM01
PS06 DC TC REGIST
ROLLER
PS07 PS05
INT3
BL06 BL01
PM01 PMFG
MS07
PS15
CL06
BL05-1 to 3 AC IN
CUTM
MRC2 HDD MEC LVPS HV-PS CUTTER
RE01/02
PF ROLLER 1 PS30
PS31
PS32
ROLL-1 PS04
PS21 PS11
FM01
PF ROLLER 2
PS22 PS12 ROLL-2
FM02
Figure 14-3 Overview of Device Configuration Drawing
14-6
Table 14-1 Symbol Table
Name SYMBOL
Develpment DP
Transfer TC
Separation DC
Charge CC
Charge elimination EL
Process motor PM01
Developer pulse motor GM01
Paper feed pulse motor TM01
Heat roller pulse motor HM01
Paper feed pulse motor 1 FM01
Paper feed pulse motor 2 FM02
Cutter motor CUTM
Registration roller clutch CL04
Manual feed roller clutch CL06
Suction fan BL01
Fixation upper center blower BL02
Charger blower BL03 R/C/L
Fixation upper (both side fan) BL06
Fixation halogen lamp 1 FL01
Fixation halogen lamp 2 FL02
Paper detection sensor (for judgment of A0 width) PS30

Paper detection sensor (lower cutter) PS04
Paper detection sensor (register) PS05
Paper detection sensor (suction) PS06
Paper detection sensor (fuser) PS07
Roll 1 (upper tray) flange detection sensor PS11
Roll 2 (middle tray) flange detection sensor PS12
Manual feed paper detection sensor PS15
Roll 1 drawer open/close sensor PS21
Roll 2 drawer open/close sensor PS22
Toner door open/close switch MS04

Waste toner bottle detection switch MS05
Fixation device door open/close switch MS06-1, MS06-2
Upper left door open/close switch MS08
Upper door open/close interlock switch INT1
Cutter door open/close interlock switch INT3
Cutter blade (right end) detection micro switch RE01
Cutter blade (left end) detection micro switch RE02
Toner sensor TS01

Waste toner sensor TS02
Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (center) TH01

Fixation overheat detection thermistor TH02
LED head temperature measurement thermistor TH03
Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (edge) TH04
14-7
14.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram
The mechanical controller receives signals sent from external devices, and drives the LED head
and controls actuators to print operation. The controller also creates test patterns by means of the
internal board to print those sheets without signal input from external devices.
USB Parallel interface Ethernet interface

PCB-ASSY-MRC2
RIP
controller
Switches and
sensors
Blowers
Sensors
Clutch
Pulse motors
Motor driver (TM01, FM01,
Charge eliminator FM02)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Engine Charger cleaning

motor Cutter motor
controller
Pulse motors
(GM01)
Primary charger
LED head
Developer
Transfer
Separator
Control panel
DC servo motor High voltage
(PM01) power unit
control
Heater
+24V
+24V
HDD
+24V
+5V
+5V
+12V +5V
+24V
Sub
Low voltage power unit power unit
+5V
AC100V
AC100V
Fusing heater
Main power switch
Figure 14-4 Configuration Block Diagram
14-8
14.4.4 Outline of Operations
(1) Warm-up operation
1 Section
- From heater ON until the fusing roller temperature reaches the specified temperature.
2 Purpose
- Warms the fusing roller up to the specified temperature.
3 Operation
- The process motor rotates to uniform the temperature of fusing roller.
- Paper detection operation (whether paper is present or not/size/head positioning) is
performed.
(2) Standby status
1 Section
- After the end of warm up until the print data reception finished.
- After the end of paper ejection until the next print data are received.
2 Purpose
- Controls the fusing roller to the specified temperature to retain the device in standby status.
3 Operation
- For the temperature control, the fuser temperature control thermistor is sampled to control
the heater activation. Also, the process motor rotates to uniform the surface temperature of
fusing roller.
(3) Pre-rotation
1 Section
- After the end of print data reception until the LED head writing (exposure) starts.
2 Purpose
- As the preparation for printing, eliminates residual charges on the photosensitive drum and
stabilizes the sensitivity of photosensitive drum.
3 Operation
- The drum starts to rotate by the drum motor and at the same time, the primary charger,
transfer corotron, and charge elimination are turned on, and in this state the drum rotates by
one or two turns. Also, after one turn, the developing bias turns on.
In addition, the main motor rotates to feed the paper up to the point before register roller.
(4) Printing
1 Section
- From start of LED head writing until the transfer finished.
2 Purpose
- Based on the print data transmitted from a computer, forms an image on the photosensitive
drum and transfers the toner image on the printing paper.
3 Operation
- After LED head writing, the separating corotron and the pre-transfer exposure turn on in
this order.
14-9
(5) Post-rotation
1 Section
- After transfer OFF until the main motor stops.
2 Purpose
- Removes residual toner and potential on the drum, and ejects the paper.
3 Operation
- After an image was transferred on the paper, the drum rotates by about one turn to stabilize
the drum surface.
14-10
14.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation
14.5.1 Primary Charging
As the first step for forming an electrostatic image, the primary charging process is provided to
charge the photosensitive drum surface uniformly.
This device uses the proven corona charging system (scorotron system excellent in negative
charging performance).
(1) Function of primary charger
1 Photosensitive drum surface potential applying function (corona discharge function +

discharge stabilizing function)
: Arranges the charges discharged from the charging wire by the grid electrode and applies
them to the photosensitive drum surface.
(2) General description of scorotron charging system
1 Principle
Corona discharge (negative corona)
: As the electrodes, a pointed conductor such as a needle and wire is used, and as the opposed
electrode, a flat plate is used, and then if the voltage applied between them is gradually
increased, a pointed part slightly sparks and the current of several micron ampere flows.
This phenomenon is called the corona discharge.
Negative corona
: If negative voltage is applied to the corona electrode wire (negative pole) and the voltage is
increased, the electric filed on negative pole surface increases, and electrons are emitted by
the field emission, which are the initial electrons. These electrons are accelerated in high
electric field and form the primary electron avalanche. Further, positive ions in the
avalanche flow into the negative pole and the secondary electrons are emitted, thus
generating the secondary avalanche. The avalanche continues in the same manner.
The electrons at the leading edge of these avalanches attach to the gas in the air and become
negative ions, and then they attach to the drum surface to charge.
Principle of scorotron charger
: The scorotron charger provides amplification effect by the principle of triode. This utilizes
the fact that the electrons move in the electric field, and it amplifies the entire charged
electric field. A salient electric field generated from the charged electric field flows into this
grid, but a large salient electric field does not propagate down to the drum from the grid.
Normally, the power supply is not connected to the grid electrode but the varistor (Zener
diode) is connected. The varistor is a semiconductor of which resistance value varies
according to the voltage, and it discharges when the voltage is high and does not discharge
when low.
2 Configuration
: A wire electrode as a conductor, and a shield electrode that covers the wire electrode are
arranged, and also a grid electrode is installed at the opening.
14-11
14.5.2 Photosensitive Drum
As an electrophotographic photosensitive material, this device uses the OPC (organic

photosensitive) material.
(1) Function of photosensitive drum
1 Charge retaining function

2 Electrostatic image holding function
3 Toner transfer function
(2) General description of OPC photosensitive drum
1 Principle
Carrier generation (optical exciter)
: In an organic molecular crystal, exciters are generated by the light exposure. These exciters
diffuse up to the crystal surface and lattice defects, and they interact with electrostatic
potential that exists there and push out electrons and positive holes.
As for the exciters, the exciting state from specific molecules in organic molecular crystal
run over the entire crystal as exciting waves to excite the entire crystal with the same phase.
At this time, the quantized exciting waves are called the exciters.
Ion pairs separated into electrons and positive holes are evaded from one-molecular
recombination and thermally dissociated, generating carriers of electrons and positive
holes. At this time, if no charges exist on the photosensitive surface, the Coulomb’s force
that separates the carriers does not work, allowing them to recombine each other.
Carrier transport
: In the non-crystal carrier transport layer, carriers move by hopping between molecules of
the carrier transport material.
The carriers are trapped if adjacent molecules have structural defects that take specific
orientation at close range.
2 Configuration
: Almost OPC photosensitive drums practically used at present are the layered type
consisting of the separated carrier generation and carrier transport which are fundamental
processes of photosensitivity.
3 Surface potential of photosensitive drum
- Charge : -420 to -390 V → -400 to -370 V (dark decay)
- Exposure : -20 to -60 V
- Development : -230 to -300 V (developing toner)
- Transfer : -40 to -80 V
- AC separation : 0 ± AC → 0 V ± Unstable positive and negative surface potential and
unstable charged toner remain.
14-12
14.5.3 Exposure
This device uses LED head for digital exposure process.
(1) Functions of LED head
1 Exposure function
: Irradiates light to the photosensitive drum to form a latent image.
2 Optical path length automatic correcting function
: Corrects the focal depth automatically (butt roller, etc.) if sufficient focal depth cannot be
ensured.
3 Head/machine internal temperature measuring function
: Thermistors are installed inside the head unit to measure the machine internal temperature
and the head temperature.
4 Line width adjusting function
: The line width can be changed by adjusting the light emitting time of LED.
(2) General description of LED head
LED array
1 Principle (light emitting principle)
: The Hall current applied to the LED array is blocked by the hetero barrier in the "pn"
junction (hetero junction), and the injection current flows toward there (recombination of
carriers), causing the light (hv) to be emitted.
SELFOC lens
1 Principle and manufacturing method
: The glass element wire is formed by the materials having the composition containing
graded index forming components such as Cs, Li, and Tl, and it is soaked in the fused salt
that contains calcium nitrate or kalium nitrate to form the refractive index by exchanging
the ions in glass that takes part in refractive index and the ions in the fused salt.
2 Configuration
: Many bar-shaped lenses called the SELFOC (optical converging glass fiber) lens are
arranged (SLA is the trademark of Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.).
3 Features
: Individual lenses have excellent resolving power and focus a uniform normal standing real
image in real size. However, in total their performance disperses and thus the performance
should be checked strictly.
As the 1:1 image is formed, the focus must be adjusted finely.
LED head unit
1 Principle
: This optical unit converges the light emitted from the LED array onto the photosensitive
surface by means of the SLA.
2 Configuration
: LED chip, IC, and board are subjected to the die bonding and wire bonding, and adjusted
and inspected, and then assembled with a heat sink, lens, etc.
14-13
14.5.4 Development
The development is a process in which the toner is put on an electrostatic image on the
photosensitive drum surface to make the image visible. When the toner charged in advance
touches the photosensitive drum, whether the toner attaches to the drum depends on the charging
status of the photosensitive surface.
To assist the toner attachment and to prevent the toner from attaching to the portions other than
the image, this device adds DC and AC biases.
(1) Functions of developer
1 Toner transfer (development)/bias adding function

: Transfers the toner to an electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum to make the image
visible. A thin film is formed for easy toner transfer.
2 Toner collecting function
: Adds AC bias to collect the toner not used for the development.
3 Toner supply function
: Supplies the toner from the toner cartridge.
Supplies the toner to the sleeve by means of the agitator.
4 Low toner detecting function
: Detects the toner empty state by the toner sensor (piezoelectric sensor).
5 Density adjusting function
: Adjusts the development density by varying the developing bias.
6 Toner agitating function
: Agitates the toner by rotating the agitator to prevent the soft block.
7 Development gap retaining function
: Retains the development gap by pushing the butt roller against the photosensitive drum.
(2) General description of magnetic one-component developing system
1 Principle
: The toner made of magnetic powders of 0.1 to 0.5 µm in size that disperse in the resin
binder added with carbon black is transported by the developing sleeve around the
magnetic roll.
In general, the toner layer of 40 to 50 µm in thickness is formed on the sleeve surface, and
when it is transported up to the photosensitive surface, the charge (AC+DC) is applied to
the toner, and when electrostatic attraction between the latent image and the toner becomes
larger than the magnetic binding force, the toner attaches to the latent image to develop.
2 Configuration
: The sleeve made of non-magnetic materials such as stainless steel and aluminum material
rotates in the forward direction relative to the photosensitive drum. Its rotating speed is one
to three times the surface speed of the photosensitive drum.
The magnetic roll is fixed in the sleeve so that it does not rotate, and six magnetic poles are
arranged where the main pole having the strongest magnetic force is arranged in opposition
to the photosensitive drum. This main pole is located at the rotational upstream side (1 - 5°)
from a line connecting the center of sleeve and the center of photosensitive drum.
A rubber blade is forcibly pushed against the sleeve in the counter direction of the sleeve
rotation, and the toner is charged while its layer is thinned by being scraped by this rubber
blade. Also, AC+DC bias voltages are supplied to the sleeve to assist the toner movement
during the development.
14-14
14.5.5 Transfer
The transfer process (so-called electrostatic transfer) moves the toner attaching to the
electrostatic image which is developed on photosensitive drum by the Coulomb force to the final
support such as paper, acting against the Coulomb's force.
In the electrostatic transfer system, the charged toner of 5 to 15 µm in particle diameter forms
one to three layers that attach to the electrostatic image on the photosensitive surface, and then
charges are given from the back of transfer paper to move the toner to the transfer paper by the
Coulomb's force in the electric field generated in relation to the photosensitive drum and to
retain the toner on the paper.
This device uses the previously proven corona transfer system.
(1) Functions of transfer unit
1 Paper charging function

: Performs the corona discharge from the back of paper to charge the paper so that the toner
is transferred to the paper.
2 Paper jam preventive function
: Prevents the leading edge of paper from entering the transfer unit along the paper guide,
resulting in paper jam.
(2) General description of corona transfer
1 Principle
: For the principle of discharge, see the primary charger.
In the state where the photosensitive drum is charged negatively and the toner in negative
pole is developed, to transfer this toner to the transfer paper, positive charges are supplied
from the back of transfer paper by the corona discharge.
The positive charges that reached the back of paper transfer the toner having negative
polarity to the paper and further induce negative charges in the photosensitive and the
photosensitive layer. At this time, the potential of the paper becomes several hundreds to
1,000V relative to the photosensitive substrate, causing the paper to be closely stuck to the
photosensitive drum. The intensity of electric field at this time reaches 100,000 V.
(Though the air withstands 30,000 V, when a gap is small, discharge does not occur
because of the Paschen's law.)
As the gap increases when the paper is separated, the potential of the paper increases and
the dielectric breakdown occurs following the Paschen's law, causing the discharge. As a
result, positive and negative charges remain at random on the photosensitive surface. At
this time, the toner sticking force to the paper is given by an electrostatic force and the Van
der Waals' force.
2 Configuration
: Though the configuration is similar to the primary charger, in many cases the transfer unit
is integrated with the AC separator. Also, the paper guide is provided to prevent the
separated paper from entering the unit. The transfer unit itself does not touch directly the
toner and the transfer paper, and thus no cleaning is required.
14-15
14.5.6 Separation
To separate the paper after transfer, a system that uses both general AC discharge separation and
finger separation is employed.
(1) Function of separator
1 Paper discharging function

: Eliminate charges from the paper and photosensitive drum.
(2) General description of AC discharge separation system
To separate the paper appropriately, the AC discharge separation system discharges the paper
after transfer using an AC charger and a discharge needle.
If the OPC photosensitive drum is used, the recording paper is positively charged by the transfer
charger and attracted to the photosensitive drum surface by electrostatic force. Accordingly, the
separating charger discharges AC corona to remove electrostatic attractive force between the
recording paper and the drum so as to separate the recording paper.
In general, thin paper having small stiffness may result in a separation failure, and therefore the
AC discharge voltage value and a range of permissible value must be determined from the image
quality and separation performance.
The separation guide prevents the print paper from entering the charger. Also, the separation
guide surface is coated with conductive paint so that the potential on the paper feed surface and
the recording paper becomes the same in order to prevent the toner from splashing.
14.5.7 Cleaning
If the toner is not transferred completely and remains or paper powder is present on the
photosensitive drum, it will obstruct the next process or enter the developer, causing a problem.
The cleaning process removes these residuals on the photosensitive surface.
This device uses a blade cleaning system that scrapes off the residuals mechanically.
(1) Functions of cleaning
1 Photosensitive drum surface residual toner removing function

: Using the blade, removes the toner and paper powder remaining on the photosensitive drum.
2 Photosensitive drum surface polishing function
: Pushes the blade against the drum to polish the photosensitive drum surface, so that the
deterioration of drum surface such as a filming can be prevented.
3 Waste toner transport function
: Transports waste toner by the auger screw.
4 Splash preventive function
: Prevents the toner from splashing by the toner receiver (film).
(2) General description of blade cleaning (blade cleaning method)
The abrasion resistant blade such as polyurethane scrapes off the residual toner on the drum
surface.
14-16
14.5.8 Charge Elimination
Residual potential on the photosensitive drum after transfer shows uneven value by the action
receiving from each process. Under this condition, if the next process is performed, an after-
image of the previous print may appear, and therefore residual potential on the photosensitive
drum must be uniform by the charge elimination before the primary charging.
This device uses the LED discharging system by means of the light.
(1) Function of charge elimination
1 Residual potential removing function

: Removes residual potential on the photosensitive drum surface by irradiating the light with
the LEDs.
(2) General description of LED charge elimination
In general, red LEDs are used. To adjust the LED light emitting quantity to the drum sensitivity,
the number of LEDs and LED driving voltage must be controlled by PWM.
Emitting the discharging light at the drum while performing the charging (primary charging),
check whether the drum charged voltage is stable to determine the LED light quantity.
14.5.9 Fusing
The fusing fixes the toner on the paper.

This device uses already proven thermal fusing (heat roll) from the viewpoint of image quality
and fixation.
(1) Functions of fuser
1 Heating function
: Heats the aluminum heat roller by using a halogen lamp.
2 Temperature detection and control function
: Temperature detection range 160°C - 190°C
(Type: Temperature detection by thermistor,
heater ON/OFF)
Overheat detection 200°C (Type: Thermistor)
Overheat prevention Overheat prevention by thermal fuse
3 Power saving function
4 Paper feed function
5 Paper compression/nip release function
: Releases the nip of fusing rollers by interlocking with the fuser unit opening/closing.
6 Cooling air flow
: Exhausts the air on the sides of the device using the blowers.
7 Offset prevention
: Prevents the toner offset by using a Teflon roller.
8 High temperature protective function
14-17
(2) General description of heat roll fusing system
1 Principle
: The toner fixation is attained through five processes of 1) toner particles are semi-fused by
the heat, 2) combined, 3) deformed (spread) to wet the paper, 4) the fused toner penetrates
(anchors) between the paper fibers, and 5) solidifies by being cooled to adhere to the paper.
The main component of toner, polymer resin, changes its state from glass to rubber and then
viscous fluid through glass transition state according to the temperature change.
2 Configuration
: The upper heat roll heats the aluminum metallic core from the inside using a halogen lamp
heater. Also, the metallic core surface is coated with the resin such as Teflon to improve the
parting performance in relation to the toner. The lower backup (pressure) roll made from a
metallic core coated with thermosetting silicone rubber excellent in oil resistance, weather
resistance, and compression restorable performance is pushed against the upper heat roll to
ensure the nip width.
14-18
14.6 Operation of Drive and Feed Systems
14.6.1 Drive System
The drive system of this device consists of a paper feed drive motor, cutter upper roller drive
motor, process drive motor, and fuser drive motor. The developer and cutter drive motors are also
installed and these motors can be operated individually.
(1) Process drive motor
This motor drives the register roller, drum, cleaner auger, and manual feed roller. The register
roller and the manual feed roller are equipped with the drive force transmission clutch, so that the
paper feed drive can be turned on or off according to the operational requirements.
(2) Cutter upper roller drive motor
This motor drives the cutter upper roller.
(3) Paper feed motor
This motor feeds or rewinds the rolled paper.
(4) Developer drive
The developer is driven by the developer motor (GM01) installed on the developer. As a drive
motor, the stepping motor is used to drive the agitator and the sleeve through the gear
transmission.
(5) Fixation drive motor
The fuser is driven by the fuser motor installed on the fuser. As a drive motor, the stepping motor
is used to drive the heat roller and the backup roller through the gear transmission.
14.6.2 Paper feed system
(1) Paper feed unit
1 Structure of paper feed unit

: The paper feed unit is composed of the two drawers arranged vertically where paper rolls
can be fed respectively.
14-19
2 Paper feed/print operation
First print
: The first sheet (immediately after powering on, or first sheet of intermittent print) needs the
pre-rotation of the photosensitive drum, and therefore the print does not start for about 7.4
seconds (pre-rotation time) after the print request is made from the controller until the
exposure starts.
Intermittent print (paper switching print)
: The paper switching operation is inserted if the paper size is different between the first data
and the next data.
Continuous print (copy)
: In a continuous print (copy), the leading edge of the next paper is gripped by the register
roller before the paper of the first data printing is ejected to shorten the printing interval.
Continuous print (if there is a spool and the controller processing is in time)
: Despite different data, if the paper size is the same and the controller processing is in time,
the print is possible at the similar print interval to that of copy print.
(2) Cutter
The paper is cut by a slitter type cutter. At the time of cutting, the buffer is given to the paper in
advance to prevent the image quality from being reduced due to a change of paper movement.
The paper cutting time is about one second and the paper buffer is given for about one second (80
mm).
(3) Suction unit
The suction unit feeds the paper by means of belts while sucking the paper by fans in order not to
disturb unfixed toner image transferred to the paper.
This device uses a system that transports the paper while sucking the entire surface of the paper
by sirocco fans. The exhaust air is led to the sides of the device.
The drive force of suction belts is supplied from the process motor via the gears.
(4) Paper unfeed unit
The paper unfeed unit is part of the fuse unit and it is driven by the same drive system as that of
the fuse roller.
The paper unfeed roller rotates at high speed relative to the fuse roller so that it applies tension to
the paper fed from the fuser. This tension is required to prevent a wrinkle of the paper.
At the paper ejection outlet, a bucket or stacker can be installed as an option.
(5) Register roller
The register roller made of a metallic shaft having a concave-convex surface provides the largest
paper transport force among all paper feed rollers to ensure the paper feed accuracy.
14-20
14.7 Control System
14.7.1 Process Control
(1) Drum surface potential control
As the scorotron charge system is used as a charge system, fundamentally the drum surface
potential is not controlled.
(2) LED head write control
The LED head write timing is controlled on the basis of pulse signals from the engine control
board. By adjusting finely this base pulse signals, the print timing is varied and the print accuracy
can be adjusted.
(3) Development density control
The development density is determined from correlation of a difference between the dark
potential and the light potential of the photosensitive drum and a development bias (DC). Here, it
is hard to control a difference between the dark potential and the light potential, but the
development density control of this device controls the line width change by controlling the LED
head light emitting time (STB width) and controls the development bias.
(4) Fuse roller temperature control
The fuse roller temperature is controlled within the set temperature range by controlling the on/
off of the fuser lamp based on the temperature value detected by the thermistor.
The fuser lamp turns on when the temperature dropped below the preset value on the low
temperature side, or it turns off when the temperature reached the preset value on the high
temperature side.
14.7.2 Paper Feed Control
As for the paper feed control, the feed amount of the main motor is controlled by controlling the
paper cut timing.
To control the paper feed speed, the motor rotation speed is controlled as mentioned in the motor
section.
14-21
14.8 Controller
14.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications
1 Data format
: HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP RTL, TIFF, CALS
2 Setup function
: SETUP, DEVICE, PAPER, FUNCTION, PROTOCOL, RESET, SYSTEM
3 Memory configuration (see the table below)
System Memory System

Spool Page memory
configuration configuration operation
Standard 256MB 84MB 12M 160M Equivalent to 2.5 m
Equipped with HDD 256MB 96MB 2G 160M Equivalent to 2.5 m*
* L model allows long printing up to 10 m.
4 Input interface
: Ethernet interface (ftp/xpt/lpr)
- 100Base-TX and 10Base-TX are supported.
(Half/full duplex)
: USB interface (port B)
- USB2.0 is supported (HI SPEED / FULL SPEED)
: Parallel interface (conforming to IEEE1284 (compatibility mode))
- IEEE1284 (conforming to compatibility mode)
- Maximum cable length: 10 m
14-22
14.8.2 Hardware Configuration
Figure 14-5 shows the overall hardware block diagram.
PCB-MRC2
BOOT ROM Flash memory

+5V +3.3V, +2.5V (1 MB) (16 MB)
CPU
Power +3.0V, +1.2V MPC8245
Supply 400MHz SO_DIMM
CPU_VCORE RTC, PIO
(256MB)
PCI BUS
Debug Slot Option Slot

CF card Engine interface & LAN
PCB-USB2
controller Scanner interface & controller
Panel controller
PCI-PCI
bridge
CF card Scanner interface Engine interface 10/100Base-Tx
Centronics USB HDD

controller controller controller
Centro USB I/F

interface
3.5-inch
HDD
Figure 14-5 Controller Block Diagram
14-23
14.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart
The flowchart in Figure 14-6 shows how the data sent from the computer is processed in the
device.
Computer
Communication driver:
Communication driver - Sends the received data to the spool driver.
- Processes the protocol control command sent from the computer.
Spool driver:
Spool driver - Opens the memory when receiving the data from the communication
driver.
Spool memory:
Spool memory - Stores the received data.
PDL:
PDL - A process controlled under the OS. After the main data judgment block
judges the received data, the PDL connected to the resulted data format
works.
- Reads the received data from the spool memory, analyzes the read
data, and pastes the raster data to the page memory.
- Requests printout to the engine driver.
- Plots drawings only in response to the data print command.
Page (raster) memory:

Page (raster) memory - Saves the date processed with the PDL.
Engine driver:
Engine driver - Receives the print request from the PDL and commands the engine to
start printing.
Engine
Figure 14-6 Data Processing Flowchart
14-24
Chapter 15 Operational Description (Scanner)
15.1 Features
This device uses five A4 contact image sensors ("CIS") and features high cost performance, and
compact and lightweight design. The scanner is well compatible with the plotter engine and
provides higher operability, allowing the operator to control the device using the front panel.
15.2 Scanner Specifications
Table 15-1 Specifications of Scanner

(1/2)
Item Specifications
Design Integral type
Read resolution 600dpi
Read speed 60 mm/s (approx. 3.0 SPM in vertical direction of A0 paper)
Original feed method Face down and centering
Copy magnification (variable) 25 to 400 %. Any value can be selected at a step of 0.1 %.
Output graduation 1 bit (binary value)
Driver Network TWAIN
Scanner interface Ethernet
Multi copy Up to 20 sheets for one copy task
Top and bottom registration correction 0 to 100 mm (actual measurement of original), unit: 1 mm
FrameErase 0 to 50 mm for top, bottom, right, and left edges, unit: 1 mm
Min. width: 210 mm × 210 mm, Max. width: 914 mm,
Original size
Scan width: 914.4 mm (36° )
Max. original pass-through length 10 m *Not guaranteed. Only standard size is guaranteed.
Max. original thickness 0.05 to 0.2 mm
Cutting method Standard cutting and synchronized cutting
15-1
Table 15-1 Specifications of Scanner
(2/2)
Item Specifications
Startup time 0s
Image memory The page memory is also used as image memory (via controller memory) *
Top and bottom edge 60 mm: ±4 dots
Sub scanning accuracy
Central area: ±3 dots
Dimensions 1154 mm (W)× 552 mm (D)× 1240 mm (H)
Weight 208 kg, max. (3R model)
120 V AC, 15 A, 50/60 Hz (at 120-V rating)
Power supply
230 V AC, 15 A, 50/60 Hz (at 230-V rating)
Power consumption Operation mode: 1400 W, max., Standby mode: 60 W, max.
Temperature range - operation : 15 to 35° C
- storage : -5 to 40° C
Environmental conditions
Humidity range - operation : 20 to 80 % (No condensation is permitted.)
- storage : 10 to 90 % (No condensation is permitted.)
* When your scanner is standard model and you want to read the original long size exceeds 2.5 m, an option is
needed.
Table 15-2 Outline of Copy Function
Function Description
Image quality of original Select the image quality according to the original type.
Density Adjust the density.
Sharpness Specify the sharpness of the image to be copied.
Contrast Adjust the contrast.
Reversal Copy the image through reversal development.
When you want to reduce the image size, you can specify whether the line
Line guarantee
guarantee will be executed.
Memory save/restore Save frequently used settings to the memory and call them whenever necessary.
Original eject direction Specify whether the original scanned will be fed forward or backward.
Copy count Specify the desired number of copies through the control panel.
Specify the magnification of the image to be copied. Alternatively, the
Scale magnification can automatically be determined according to the roll paper
size used.
Background removal Adjust background if the original has uneven density.
Margin Add margins to top and bottom of the image before the roll paper is cut.
Move Move the image lengthwise or widthwise to ensure binding margin.
FrameErase Takes a copy by erasing the outside of an original.
Mirror Copies the mirror and image.
When you want to copy multiple sheets, you can read and store all the data
Sort
and then sort and output a part of them. (Option)
Select the roll paper to which the scanned image will be printed. Alternatively,
Paper selection
the roll paper can automatically be selected according to the image size.
15-2
Table 15-3 Outline of Scanner Delivery Function
Function Description
Image quality of original Select the image quality according to the original type.
Density Adjust the density.
Sharpness Specify the sharpness of the image to be copied.
Contrast Adjust the contrast.
Reversal Copy the image through reversal development.
When you want to reduce the image size, you can specify whether the line
Line guarantee
guarantee will be executed.
Save frequently used settings to the memory and call them whenever
Memory save/restore
necessary.
Original eject direction Specify whether the original scanned will be fed forward or backward.
Acquisition of delivery list Get the information list of scanned image destination hosts on line.
Selection of destination Select the destination of the scanned image from the list.
Resolution Specify the read resolution of the original.
15-3
15.3 Basic Operation
15.3.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration
Figure 15-1 shows the overall configuration of the device.
Control panel
Scanner
mechanism
Scanner sliding
CIS unit
Scanner controller Engine
Host computer Raster controller Engine controller
For detailed descriptions of the engine, refer to Section 14.1 "Basic Operation (Overall
Operation)."
Figure 15-1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration
15-4
15.3.2 Outline of Machine Configuration
Figure 15-2 Outline of Machine Configuration
Table 15-4 Symbol List
Name SYMBOL
Feed pulse motor SM01
Original sensor (A4) PSS01
Regist sensor PSS06
Skew sensor (left) PSS07
Skew sensor (right) PSS08
Cover open/close sensor (left) PSS09
Cover open/close sensor (right) PSS10
15-5
15.3.3 Circuit Diagram
After the original is inserted into the device, five CIS reads the image data, and the ISI3 board
digitalized the analog data and transfers the digital data to the MSC2 board.
The MSC2 board connects the data read with five CIS so that the resulted data will be fit into A0
paper size in the main scanning direction. The processed data is transferred to the RIP controller.
The RIP controller transfers the data to the engine to copy the image (copy function) or to the
host computer via network (scan-to-file function).
Figure 15-3 shows the circuit diagram of the device.
Plotter
Scanner
Low-voltage CIS unit

power supply
Host Raster ISI3 board

interface controller
MSC2
board
Functional blocks
Engine
controller
Pulse motor
Sensors
Control panel
* For the detailed plotter circuit diagram, refer to Section 10.4.3 "Circuit Diagram."
Figure 15-3 Circuit Diagram
15-6
15.3.4 Brief Description of Operation
(1) Standby
1 Duration:
- From power-on and startup of device to insertion of original by user.
2 Objective:
- To monitor the original loading and maintain the standby condition.
3 Operation:
- Paper width and regist sensors monitor the original loading.
- The machine detects the paper width.
(2) Original feed (front)
1 Duration:
- From insertion of original to arrival at CIS unit.
2 Objective:
- To transport the original to the top of the CIS unit to prepare for scanning.
3 Operation:
- The motor and front rollers coupled to it are rotated to transport the original.
- Skew sensors detect the original to judge whether the skew is acceptable. Excessively large
skew results in original jam.
(3) Scan
1 Duration:
- Until the image on the original is completely scanned.
2 Objective:
- To scan the original.
3 Operation:
- LEDs, which are light source of CIS, are lit while the original is being transported. When
light beams from LEDs are irradiated onto the original, CIS receives reflected beams and
outputs analog signals. Analog signals are transferred to the ISI3 board and converted into
digital signals. Digitalized signals are sent to the MSC2 board. The MSC2 board connects
the data read with five CIS so that the resulted data will be fit into A0 paper size in the main
scanning direction. The processed data is transferred to the RIP controller. The RIP
controller transfers the data to the engine to copy the image (copy function) or to the host
computer via network (scan-to-file function).
(4) Original feeding (rear)
1 Duration:
- From top of scanning to completion of original reject.
2 Objective:
- To feeding the original until its rear edge is completely exit from bottom of both CIS unit
and device.
3 Operation:
- The motor and rear rollers coupled to it are rotated to transport the original.
- Skew sensors detect the paper to judge whether the skew is acceptable.
15-7
(5) Print (copy function)
1 Duration:
- To transfer the image data from MSC2 board to RIP controller to completion of printing.
The data print is initiated after the original passes through the rear end of the CIS unit.
2 Objective:
- Refer to Section 14.4.4 (4) "Print."
3 Operation:
- Refer to Section 14.4.4 (4) "Print."
(6) Data transmission to host (scan-to-file function)
1 Duration:
- To transfer the image data from MSC2 board to RIP controller. The data is transmitted to
the host computer from the RIP controller after the original passes through the rear end of
the CIS unit.
2 Objective:
- To transfer the image data from MSC2 board to RIP controller and then to host computer.
3 Operation:
- To transfer the image data from MSC2 board to RIP controller and the data equivalent to
one page is accumulated in the controller, the data is - To transferred the image data from
MSC2 board to RIP controller to the host computer.
- The data is accumulated in the hard disk drive connected to the RIP controller and then
sorted.
15-8
15.4 Scanner Controller (MSC2 Board)
Mechanical interface
Power interface
Motor
driver DC power
control
Address
Temperature
monitoring decoding
Sensor circuit
circuit
interface
Chip-to-chip Shading
interpolation
offset
Chip-to-chip Shading Line Skew

interpolation
offset correction correction
Multi
values
Single
binary
value
Shading Magnification γ Serial-

Reversal
change
Edge Dither parallel
development conversion
correction correction
Error
enlargement
Optimization
Figure 15-4 Scanner Controller Block Diagram
15-9
15.5 CIS Unit (ISI3 Board and CIS)
ANALOG
FOR CYCLONE
ANALOG FILTER FILTER

CONNECTOR
SENSOR A
CONNECTOR REGULATOR
FILTER
IC
CONSTANT FILTER
CURRENT REGULATOR
CIRCUIT IC
OSCILLATOR
CONFIG PART
TO MSC BOARD
SENSOR B
CONSTANT
CURRENT
CIRCUIT
SENSOR C
CONSTANT
CURRENT
CIRCUIT
SENSOR D
CONSTANT
CURRENT
CIRCUIT
SENSOR E
CONSTANT
CURRENT
CIRCUIT
SENSOR A to E
Figure 15-5 CIS Unit Block Diagram
15-10
Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication
SW3 ON
ON
1 8 1 2 1 8
SW4 LED
SW2 (both bits must be ON)
Appendix A describes how to set the DIP switches and how to see the LED indication on the
MEC board.
A.1 Setting the DIP Switches
A.1.1 Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4)
The setting of the DIP switch (DIP SW) on the MEC board is listed below.
If the DIP switch setting is changed, reboot the power.
DIPSW-5 is normally set to OFF, and set to ON only when the console is used.
Normal
Bit Meaning of ON position Meaning of OFF position
position
DIPSW-1 – – OFF
DIPSW-2 – – OFF
DIPSW-3 – – OFF
DIPSW-4 – – OFF
DIPSW-5 Console is used Console is not used OFF
DIPSW-6 – – OFF
DIPSW-7 – – OFF
DIPSW-8 Long size (10 m) LP-1020L Standard (2.5 m) LP-1020 –
(All bits must be set to normal position when the machine is delivered)
A-1
A.1.2 Setting DIP Switch SW2 on MEC Board
For setting DIP switch SW2, both bits must be set to ON position.
1
2
O
F
F
A.1.3 Setting DIP Switch SW3 on MEC Board
For setting DIP switch SW3, the revisions of the MEC board have already been set.
Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4

1
2
3
4
Rev. A ON ON ON ON
Rev. B OFF ON ON ON
Rev. C ON OFF ON ON
O
F
F
Rev. D OFF OFF ON ON
A-2
A.2 LED Indication
The following shows how to see the LED indication on the MEC board.
The LED ON/Flashing/OFF are expressed as follows:

: ON
✫ : Flashing
● : OFF
✕ : Indeterminate
_ : Don't care
A.2.1 LED indication on MEC board
(1) LED indication immediately after powering on
The LED immediately after powering on indicates that the power on check is in progress or that
an error was detected during check.
At the start of check, the corresponding LED turns on, and at successful termination of check, the
corresponding LED of the next check item turns on.
If an error is detected, the corresponding LED of the check item continues flashing.
LED indication in LED indication at

Step Check item Corresponding LED normal state error detection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Engine firmware operation
1 LED8 ●●●●●●● –
start
Program checksum in flash
2 LED7 ●●●●●●● ●●●●●●✫●
memory (or IC card)
CPU built-in RAM read/write
3 LED6 and LED7 ●●●●●● ●●●●●✫✫●
check
4 Board matching check LED5 and LED8 ●●●●●● ●●●●✫●●✫
5 SRAM read/write check LED6 ●●●●●●● ●●●●●✫●●
6 NVRAM presence check LED5 ●●●●●●● ●●●●✫●●●
7 Program copy to SRAM LED5 and LED7 ●●●●●● ●●●●✫●✫●
(Go to (2), (3), or (4))
A-3
(2) LED indication in usual operation
Upon successful termination of the check at powering on, the indication of respective LED is as
follows:
LED1 and LED2 : Ongoing task ID

LED3 : (Indeterminate because of use for firmware debugging)
LED4 - LED7 : Engine status
LED8 : Presence of print request
LED indication
LED Description of function
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
Indicate the low-order two bits of ongoing task ID.
LED1 and LED2 ✫ ✫ ✕ _________ LEDs are flashing when the task is switched
normally.
LED3 ____✕ _________ (Reserved)

Used for debugging. Applications not specified.
LED4 and LED7 Indicate the engine status.
(LED4/5/6/7 all OFF)

____✕ ● ● ● ●__ Power saving
(LED7 ON, LED4/5/6 OFF)

____✕ ● ● ● __ Warming up

____✕ ● ● ●__ Standby status
(LED6/7 ON, LED4/5 OFF)

____✕ ● ● __ Printing

____✕ ● ● ●__ Recoverable error occurring
(LED4/5 ON, LED6/7 OFF)

____✕ ● ●__ Unrecoverable error occurring

____✕ ● ● ●__ Initialized state (clock input mode)
NVRAM is not initialized.
LED8 Indicates whether the print request is present or not.
Turns on when the print request is accepted, and turns

____✕_________
off when the requested print finished.
____✕_________● Turns off when no print request is present.
A-4
(3) LED indication in case of other errors
Flashing of LED4 to LED8 indicates the following errors.
LED indication
Description of error
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
_____✫ ✫ ✫ ✫ ● Unexpected interruption occurred.
_____✫ ✫ ✫ ● ✫ NMI interruption occurred.
_____✫ ✫ ● ✫ ✫ Interruption nest under error
_____✫ ● ✫ ✫ ✫ Interruption nest over error
(4) LED indication when power is turned off
When the main power switch is turned off, the circuit interrupts the firmware.
After that, for more than 10 msec, the 5 V power supply is retained for CPU operation and the
firmware can operate.
The firmware accepts this interruption, saves the system parameters such as total print distance in
the NVRAM within 10 msec, and also turns on the LED4/5/6/7/8.
Afterwards, the 5 V power supply shuts down and all LEDs turn off.
LED indication
Description of firmware processing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Interruption occurs when the power is turned off.
______
The saving of information such as total print distance in NVRAM finished.
If LED4 through LED8 do not turn on when the main power switch is turned off, the interruption
from the circuit failed, or saving of system parameters in NVRAM has not finished yet.
In this case, "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error will occur when the power
is turned on next time.
A-5
A.3 Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board
Pressing the reset switch SW1 causes the circuits of MEC board to be reset, and also the firmware
to be reset (restart).
However, unlike powering off and on operation, the system parameters such as total print
distance are not saved and therefore do not use this switch usually.
Using the switch causes "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error.
Instead, turn off and then on the power switch.
A-6
Appendix B Setup RFU Board
Appendix B RFU Board Setup
SW1
1 4
A DIP switch is mounted on the RFU board. This appendix describes how to set up this switch.
B.1 Setup of DIP Switch
B.1.1 DIP Switch on the RFU Board
Set DIP switch SW1 according to the roll paper configuration of the roll paper feed unit.
1
2
3
4
O
F
F
Bit Meaning of ON (up) position Meaning of OFF (down) position
1 Roll 1 is loaded. Roll 1 is not loaded.

Paper feed mechanism specifically Paper feed mechanism specifically
4
used for roll flanges (S) used for roll flanges (L).
B-1
Appendix C Setup MRC2 Board
Appendix C MRC2 Board Setup
SW7
SW1
SW3
SW2
The following describes the setting of DIP switches on the MRC2 board.
C.1 Setup of DIP Switches
C.1.1 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7)
For setting DIP switch SW7, the revisions of the MRC2 board have been set.
Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4

1
2
3
4
Rev.A OFF OFF OFF OFF

Rev.B ON OFF OFF OFF
Rev.C OFF ON OFF OFF
O
F
F
Rev.D ON ON OFF OFF
C.1.2 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2)
For setting DIP switch SW2, all bits are set to OFF position.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
O
F
F
C-1
C.1.3 DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board
See "Table 1-2 Other version up list" in "1.5.3 Other Version Up."
C.1.4 DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board
For setting DIP switch SW1, the CPU clock mounted on the MRC2 board has been set.
The setting of this switch is fixed, therefore do not change it.
6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1

OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
C-2
Appendix D MSC2 Board Setup and LED Indication
SW4 SW5 LED
DIP switches and LEDs are mounted on the MSC2 board. This appendix describes how to set up
these switches and read machine statuses from LEDs.
D.1 Setup of DIP Switches
D.1.1 DIP Switch on MSC2 Board (SW4)
All bits of the SW4 must be set to OFF position.
D.1.2 DIP Switch on MSC2 Board (SW5)
Revisions and versions of the MSC2 board are set to bits of the SW5.
Bit0-2:REV
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2

Rev. A ON ON ON
Rev. B OFF ON ON
Rev. C ON OFF ON
Rev. D OFF OFF ON
Rev. E ON ON OFF
Rev. F OFF ON OFF
Rev. G ON OFF OFF
Rev. H OFF OFF OFF
D-1
Bit3-4:REV
Bit3 Bit4
00 ON ON
01 OFF ON
02 ON OFF
03 OFF OFF
Bit5-7:REV
All bits must be set to OFF position.
D.2 LED Indication
This section describes how to read machine conditions from LED statuses on the MSC2 board.
LED statuses are as follows.

: ON
✫ : Blinking
● : OFF
D.2.1 LED Indication of MSC2 Board
(1) Normal condition
1 8
●●●●●●●● MPU device initialization
● ● ● ● ● ● ● Firmware validity check
● ● ● ● ● ● ● FPGA operation check
● ● ● ● ● ● Memory operation check
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ISI board operation check
● ● ● ● ● ● RI10 initialization check
● ● ● ● ● ● OS boot
D-2
(2) Abnormal condition
1 8
● ● ● ● ● ● ✫ Firmware validity error
● ● ● ● ● ● ✫ RIP communication error
● ● ● ● ● ● ✫ Data write error
D-3
Appendix E ISI3 Board Setup and LED Indication
Appendix E ISI3 Board Setup and LED Indication
LED
SW4 SW5
DIP switches and LEDs are mounted on the ISI3 board. This appendix describes how to set up
these switches and read machine statuses from LEDs.
E.1 Setup of DIP Switches
E.1.1 DIP Switch on ISI Board (SW4)
All bits of the SW4 must be set to OFF position. These setting may not be changed.
E.1.2 DIP Switch on ISI Board (SW5)
Revisions of the MEC board are set to bits of the SW3.
Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4

1
2
3
4
Rev. A ON ON ON ON
Rev. B OFF ON ON ON
Rev. C ON OFF ON ON
O
F
F
Rev. D OFF OFF ON ON
E.2 LED Indication
Respective LEDs blink in the normal operation and terminate blinking upon completion of
operation. (All LEDs may be turned off.)
E-1
Appendix F Menu Structure
This appendix describes the menu structure of the device. It also includes specific menus for
maintenance people that they can select on the control panel.
F-1
Menu Structure
This section describes how to read the menu structure using "SYSTEM - # PARA" menu on
page D-14 as an example.
Menu hierarchy
# Para # OPERATION MODE

> NORMAL
# ACK ON TIME (30 ns)

Shipping default > 80
: The parameter indicated
beneath the menu shows a # ACK PULSE (30 ns)
shipping default. > 80
# BUSY OFF TIMING

> ACK RISING EDGE
# SELECT SIGNAL
Menu specialized for maintenance people > ON
: The item connected with broken lines (---)
shows the menu from which only the # AF SIGNAL REPORT
> INPUT
maintenance people can enter the
maintenance person mode to conduct # TIME OUT
various operations. > 30 sec
Hint: For the information on how to select individual menus, as well as user-
accessible menu functions, refer to the User's Guide.
Note: The DSCAN format listed in the menu structure are for only customers in
Japan.
F-2
F.1 LP-1020 / LP-1020L Menu Structure
SETUP MENU
ME NU Note (1) DSCAN only

# SETUP Note (2) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only
Note (3) Double or triple rolls model only
Note (4) A is displayed in the case of DSCAN.
SETUP
#PORTn_HPGL #PARAMETER MODE (1)
>DATA FIRST *DATA FIRST
*PANEL FIRST
PAPER SERIES (2)
>A *A
SETUP *9"
#PORTn_DSCAN *8.5"
*30 ✕ 42
SETUP *MAP
#PORTn_TIFF *DIN
*CHINA
SETUP #AUTO SUPPLY
#PORTn_CALS >CONT MODE *CONT MODE
*OPTIMAL MODE
SETUP *ROLL 1 MODE
#PARA_HPGL *ROLL 2 MODE (3)
*ROLL 3 MODE (3)
SETUP *MANUAL FEED
#PARA_DSCAN #FIXSIZE MODE
>FIXD SIZE *FIXED SIZE (4)
SETUP *EXTENSION A
#PARA_TIFF *REAL SCALE
#COPY COUNT
SETUP >1 *1 to 99
#PARA_CALS
#SUPPLY PARAM. #CENTERING
SETUP >OFF *OFF
#USB_HPGL *ON
#PAPER TYPE
>NON-DESIGNATED *NON-DESIGNATED
*NORMAL PAPER
*TRACING PAPER
*FILM
#SIZE MARGIN (mm)
A >2 *0 to 30
F-3
Note (5) TIFF, CALS only
A
Note (6) HP-GL only.
Note (7) When the CUSTOM
(PDTF CHOICE) of the
system custom is ON.
#DRAWING PARAM. #OFFSET MODE
>MARGIN *MARGIN
*VARIABLE SIZE
*FIXED SIZE
#MARGIN (mm)
>0 *0 to 100
#X-OFFSET (mm)
>0 *-9999.99
to 9999.99
#Y-OFFSET (mm)
>0 *-9999.99
to 9999.99
#WRITE MODE
>OR WRITING *OR WRITING
*OVER WRITING
#MIRROR
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#REVERSE (5)
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#ERROR MEMO
>ON *ON
*SPECIAL (6)
*OFF
#PlotDataToFile
>OFF *OFF
*ON+Print
*ON (7)
#SCALING PARAM. #SCALE MODE
>MANUAL SCALE *MANUAL SCALE
*REDUCE
#SCALE X (%)
>100.00 *0.01 to 100.00
#SCALE Y (%)
>100.00 *0.01 to 100.00
#PEN WIDTH SCALE

>ON *ON
*OFF
B B'
F-4
Note (8) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.

B B'
#FIX SCALE A #A4
>A4 *A4
*A3
*A2
*A1
*A0
#A3
>A3 *A3
*A2
*A1
*A0
*A4
#A2
>A2 *A2
*A1
*A0
*A4
*A3
#A1
>A1 *A1
*A0
*A4
*A3
*A2
#A0
>A0 *A0
*A4
*A3
*A2
*A1
#FIX SCALE 9" (8) #A

>A *A
*B
*C
*D
*E
#B
>B *B
*C
*D
*E
*A
C C' C"
F-5
C C' C"
#C
>C *C
*D
*E
*A
*B
#D
>D *D
*E
*A
*B
*C
#E
>E *E
*A
*B
*C
*D
#FIX SCALE 8.5" (8) #A
>A *A
*B
*C
*D
*E
#B
>B *B
*C
*D
*E
*A
#C
>C *C
*D
*E
*A
*B
#D
>D *D
*E
*A
*B
*C
D D"
F-6
Note (9) HP-GL, DSCAN only

Note (10) HP-GL only. D"
D
Note (11) When the CUSTOM (PLOT
POINT) of the system #E
>E *E
custom is ON.
*A
HP-GL only.
*B
*C
*D
#FORMAT PARM. (9) #PRT DRIVER (10)
>ENABLE *ENABLE
*DISABLE
*CHINA
#GRAPHIC LANG. (10)
>AUTO *AUTO
*HP-GL
*HP-GL/2
#TERMINATOR (10) #PG1;

>ON *ON
*OFF
#NR;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#SP0;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#ESC.)
>ON *ON
*OFF
#AF;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#AH;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#FR;
>ON *ON
#PLAN SIZE (10) *OFF
>ON (PS) *ON(PS)
*ON(IP)
*ON(IW)
*OFF
#PLOT POINT (11)

>ON( PS) *ON
*OFF
E E'
F-7
E E'
#DRAWING (12)
>NOP *NOP
*EOP
#PAPER NO. (12)
>PAPER SOURCE *PAPER SOURCE
*PAPER TYPE
*OFF
#PEN PARAMETER (13) #PEN PAR.MODE
>DATA PRIORITY *DATE PRIORITY
*PANEL PRIORITY
#PEN0 #WIDTH (mm)

to >n *0.00 to 16.00
N (14)
#DENSITY (%)
>n *0 to 100
#CORNER
>ROUND *ROUND
*BUTT
#JOINT
>ROUND *ROUND
*MITERED
#PEN ADJUST (mm)
>-0.00 *-0.99 to 0.99
#LINE DISPOSAL
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#RASTER PARAM #IMAGE SCALE
>LINE DRAW.MODE *LINE DRAW.MODE
*PICTURE MODE
#SCREENING (15)
*GRAPHICS MODE
*PICTURE MODE
Note (12) DSCAN only

Note (13) HP-GL,DSCAN only
Note (14) HP-GL is 0 to 15 DSCAN is
1 to 32
Note (15) HP-GL,DSCAN,TIFF only.
F-8
DEVICE MENU
MENU
#DEV I CE .
#POWER SAVE
>15min *15min
*30min
*60min
*90min
*235min
#EDGE CUT TIMER
>OFF *OFF
*30min
*1hour
*2hour
*4hour
*1min
*5min
*10min
#DOOR OPEN CUT
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#DENSITY
>NORMAL *THIN
*RATHER THIN
*NORMAL
*RATHER THICK
*THICK
#TRACE MODE
>NORMAL *NORMAL
*WETTY
#BOTTLE MAINT.
>AUTO *AUTO
*MANUAL
#SPECIAL SET2
>00 *00 to FF
#SPECIAL SET3
>OFF *OFF
*ON
F-9
MENU
# PAPER .
PAPER
>ROLLn #PAPER KIND
>NORMAL *NORMAL
*TRACE
*FILM
#PAPER SERIES
>A *A
*9"
*8.5"
*30x42
*MAP
*DIN
*CHINA
F-10
FUNCTION MENU
MENU
# F UNC T I ON .
#MENU PRINT
>SYSTEM *SYSTEM
*PORTn
*PARA
*USB
*ALL
#HPGL SELF PLOT
>PORT1 *PORTn
*PARA
*USB
#DSAN SELF PLOT
>PORT1 *PORTn
*PARA
#ERROR LOG
>PAGE COUNT 1 *PAGE COUNT 1
*PAGE COUNT 5
#JOB LOG
*PAGE COUNT 5
#ENGINE LOG
> OK?
#SYSTEM DATE
>aa:bb:cc
#SYSTEM TIME
>aa:bb:cc
# FORMAT HDD
> OK?
# FORMAT NVRAM
> OK?
#VERSION UP Note (16): Applicable choices vary depending on the

>lp1020.img (16) contents of the CF card specialized for
#INIT CHARG.INF maintenance person's.
> OK?
#PRINT CHARG.INF
> OK?
#MAINTE INFO
>FAX PRINT
#DATE DUMP
> OK?
F-11
MENU
# PROTOCO L .
PROTOCOL
#PORT1: XPT #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
#XPT PORT
>9100
PROTOCOL
#PORT2:LPD #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
#PRINTER NAME
>LP02
PROTOCOL
#PORT3:FTP #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
○
○
○
#USER NAME
○
>FTP03
○
PROTOCOL
#PARALLEL #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
F-12
RESET MENU
ME NU
#RESET .
#SYSTEM RESET
>
#PORT RESET
>PORT1
F-13
SYSTEM MENU
MENU
# S Y S T EM .
SYSTEM
#COMM.PARAM COMM.PARAM
#ETHERNET I
COMM.PARAM
#PARALLEL #TIMING MODE
>NORMAL *NORMAL
*FAST
*SLOW
*MANUAL
#ACK ONTIME (30ns)
>80 1 to 127
#ACK PULSE (30ns)

>80 1 to 127
#BUSY OFF TIMING

> ACK RISING EDGE * ACK RISING EDGE
* ACK RISING EDGE
#SELECTSIGNAL
>ON *ON
*OFF/ON
#AF SIGNAL DIRECTION
>INPUT *INPUT
*OUTPUT
#TIME OUT (100msec)
>300 *1 to 18000
COMM.PARAM
#USB #TIME OUT (sec)
>10 *0 to 99
#CHANGE INTERFACE
>OFF *OFF
COMM. PARAM *ON
#PlotDataToFile #PDTF HostIP Adress
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to 255.255.255.255
#PDTF PORT
>33000 *0 to 65535
#PDTF Timeout(sec)
>05 *1 to 75
COMM. PARAM
#Terioplot #Terioplot
>OFF *ON
#WEB LOCK *OFF
>OFF *OFF #Terioplot
*ON >000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to 255.255.255.255
F-14
SYSTEM
#ENABLE #A
SERIES >ON *ON
*OFF
#9"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#8.5"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#30✕42
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#MAP
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#DIN
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#CHINA
>ON *ON
*OFF
SYSTEM
#APPLY ROLL APPLY ROLL
#A SERIES #USE A0
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE A1
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE A2
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE A3
>ON *ON
APPLY ROLL *OFF
#9" SERIES #USE 36"
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE 24"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 18"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 12"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
G G'
F-15
G G'
APPLY ROLL
#8.5" SERIES #USE 34"
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE 22"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 17"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 11"
>OFF *ON
APPLY ROLL *OFF
#30✕42 SERIES #USE 30"
>ON *ON
*OFF
APPLY ROLL
#MAP SERIES #USE B1-MAP
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE B2-MAP
>OFF *ON
*OFF
APPLY ROLL
#DIN SERIES #USE B1-DIN
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE B2-DIN
>OFF *ON
*OFF
APPLY ROLL
#CHINA SERIES #USE CHINA A0
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE CHINA A1
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE CHINA A2
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE CHINA A3
>OFF *ON
*OFF
F-16
SYSTEM
#CHINA SIZE #CHINA A0
>914mm *914mm
*910mm
*900mm
*880mm
#CHINA A1
>620mm *620mm
*610mm
#CHINA A2
>450mm *450mm
*440mm
#CHINA A3
>310mm *310mm
#INITIAL SET *297mm
>STANDARD *STANDARD
*CHINA
#FACTORY SET
> OK
#LANGUAGE
>JAPANESE *JAPANESE
*ENGLISH
#LENGTH UNITS
>MILLIMETERS *MILLIMETERS
*INCHES
#ADMIN PASSWORD
>00000000 *00000000 to 99999999
#SERIAL NUMBER
>00000 to 65535
#SYSTEM CUSTOM
> CUSTOM (PLOT POINT)
>*OFF *OFF
*ON
CUSTOM (PDTF CHOICE)
>*STANDARD *STANDARD
*EXPANSION
F-17
I #PORT SELECT 1-10
>XLF------------ *X
*L
*F
*-
#DHCP
>DISABLE *DISABLE
*ENABLE
#IP ADDRESS
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#SUBNET MASK
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#ROUTING TABLE #GATEWAY ADDR01

>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR01
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#SETUP DETAILS #ROUTING TABLE2 #GATEWAY ADDR02

>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR02
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
to
#GATEWAY ADDR10
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR10
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#METRIC
>064 *1 to 255
#ETHERNET ADDR
>0800832Annnn
#CONNECTION SPD.
>AUTO *AUTO
*100
J *10
F-18
J
#CONNECTION TYPE
>AUTO *AUTO
*FULL
*HALF
#HTTP PORT
>00080 *0 to 65535
#PORT TIME OUT

>30min *OFF
*5min
*10min
*15min
*30min
#FTP DATE TYPE
>ASCII/BIN *ASCII/BIN
*BIN
#SNMP
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#SNMP VERSION
>V1 *V1
*V2
#TRAPnn #MANEGER
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#ERROR
>ON *ON
*OFF
#JOB
>OFF *OFF
*ON (IP ADDR)
*ON (PORT)
#IP ADDR
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#PORT
>ALL *ALL
*PORT01 to 10
#SNMP TRAP NUM.

>2 *1 to 20
F-19
F.2 LP-1020-MF / LP-1020L-MF Menu Structure
SETUP MENU
MENU MODE Note (1) DSCAN only.

MENU Note (2) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.
#SETUP
Note (3) Double or triple rolls model only.
Note (4) A is displayed in the case of DSCAN.
SETUP
#PORTn_HPGL #PARAMETER MODE (1)
>DATA FIRST *DATA FIRST
*PANEL FIRST
PAPER SERIES (2)
>A *A
SETUP *9"
#PORTn_DSCAN *8.5"
*30 × 42
SETUP *MAP
#PORTn_TIFF *DIN
*CHINA
SETUP #AUTO SUPPLY
#PORTn_CALS >CONT MODE *CONT MODE
*OPTIMAL MODE
SETUP *ROLL 1 MODE
#PARA_HPGL *ROLL 2 MODE (3)
*ROLL 3 MODE (3)
SETUP *MANUAL FEED
#PARA_DSCAN #FIXSIZE MODE
>FIXD SIZE *FIXED SIZE (4)
SETUP *EXTENSION A
#PARA_TIFF *REAL SCALE
#COPY COUNT
SETUP >1 *1 to 99
#PARA_CALS
#SUPPLY PARAM. #CENTERING
SETUP >OFF *OFF
#USB_HPGL *ON
#PAPER TYPE
>NON-DESIGNATED *NON-DESIGNATED
*NORMAL PAPER
*TRACING PAPER
*FILM
#SIZE MARGIN (mm)
A >2 *0 to 30
F-20
A Note (5) TIFF, CALS only.

Note (7) When the CUSTOM (PDTF
CHOICE) of the system
custom is ON.
#DRAWING PARAM. #OFFSET MODE
>MARGIN *MARGIN
*VARIABLE SIZE
*FIXED SIZE
#MARGIN (mm)
>0 *0 to 100
#X-OFFSET (mm)
>0 *-9999.99
to 9999.99
#Y-OFFSET (mm)
>0 *-9999.99
to 9999.99
#WRITE MODE
>OR WRITING *OR WRITING
*OVER WRITING
#MIRROR
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#REVERSE (5)
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#ERROR MEMO
>ON *ON
*SPECIAL (6)
*OFF
#PlotDataToFile
>OFF *OFF
*ON+Print
*ON (7)
#SCALING PARAM. #SCALE MODE
>MANUAL SCALE *MANUAL SCALE
*REDUCE
#SCALE X (%)
>100.00 *0.01 to 100.00
#SCALE Y (%)
>100.00 *0.01 to 100.00
#PEN WIDTH SCALE

>ON *ON
*OFF
B B'
F-21
B B'
#FIX SCALE A #A4
>A4 *A4
*A3
*A2
*A1
*A0
#A3
>A3 *A3
*A2
*A1
*A0
*A4
#A2
>A2 *A2
*A1
*A0
*A4
*A3
#A1
>A1 *A1
*A0
*A4
*A3
*A2
#A0
>A0 *A0
*A4
*A3
*A2
*A1
#FIX SCALE 9" (7) #A

>A *A
*B
*C
*D
*E
#B
>B *B
*C
*D
*E
*A
C C' C"
F-22
C C' C"
#C
>C *C
*D
*E
*A
*B
#D
>D *D
*E
*A
*B
*C
#E
>E *E
*A
*B
*C
*D
#FIX SCALE 8.5" (8) #A
>A *A
*B
*C
*D
*E
#B
>B *B
*C
*D
*E
*A
#C
>C *C
*D
*E
*A
*B
#D
>D *D
*E
*A
*B
*C
D D"
F-23
Note (9) HP-GL, DSCAN only.
D Note (11) When the CUSTOM
D"
(PLOTPOINT) of the #E
system custom is ON. >E *E
HP-GL only. *A
*B
*C
*D
#FORMAT PARM.(9) #PRT DRIVER(10)
>ENABLE *ENABLE
*DISABLE
*CHINA
#GRAPHIC LANG.(10)
>AUTO *AUTO
*HP-GL
*HP-GL/2
#TERMINATOR(10) #PG1;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#NR;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#SP0;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#ESC.)
>ON *ON
*OFF
#AF;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#AH;
>ON *ON
*OFF
#FR;
>ON *ON
#PLAN SIZE (10) *OFF
>ON( PS) *ON(PS)
*ON(IP)
*ON(IW)
*OFF
#PLOT POINT (11)

>ON(PS) *ON
*OFF
E E'
F-24
E E'
#DRAWING (12)
>NOP *NOP
*EOP
#PAPER NO. (12)
>PAPER SOURCE *PAPER SOURCE
*PAPER TYPE
*OFF
#PEN PARAMETER (13) #PEN PAR.MODE
>DATA PRIORITY *DATE PRIORITY
*PANEL PRIORITY
#PEN0 #WIDTH (mm)

to >n *0.00 to 16.00
N (14)
#DENSITY (%)
>n *0 to 100
#CORNER
>ROUND *ROUND
*BUTT
#JOINT
>ROUND *ROUND
*MITERED
#PEN ADJUST (mm)
>-0.00 *-0.99 to 0.99
#LINE DISPOSAL
>OFF *OFF
#RASTER PARAM *ON
#IMAGE SCALE
*PICTURE MODE
#SCREENING(15)
*GRAPHICS MODE
*PICTURE MODE
Note (12) DSCAN only.

Note (13) HP-GL, DSCAN only.
Note (14) HP-GL is 0 to 15.
DSCAN is 1 to 32.
Note (15) HP-GL,DSCAN,TIFF only.
F-25
DEVICE MENU
MENU MODE
MENU
#DEV I CE .
#POWER SAVE
>15min *15min
*30min
*60min
*90min
*235min
#EDGE CUT TIMER
>OFF *OFF
*30min
*1hour
*2hour
*4hour
*1min
*5min
*10min
#DOOR OPEN CUT
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#DENSITY
>NORMAL *THIN
*RATHER THIN
*NORMAL
*RATHER THICK
*THICK
#TRACE MODE
>NORMAL *NORMAL
*WETTY
#ORIGINAL SET
>1 *1 to 3
#BOTTLE MAINT.
>AUTO *AUTO
*MANUAL
#SPECIAL SET2
>00 *00 to FF
#SPECIAL SET3
>OFF *OFF
*ON
F-26
MENU MODE
MENU
#PAPER .
PAPER
>ROLLn #PAPER KIND
>NORMAL *NORMAL
*TRACE
*FILM
#PAPER SERIES
>A *A
*9"
*8.5"
*30 × 42
*MAP
*DIN
*CHINA
F-27
FUNCTION MENU
MENU MODE
MENU
#FUNCT I ON .
#MENU PRINT
>SYSTEM *SYSTEM
*COPY
*SCANNER
*PORTn
*PARA
*USB
*ALL
#HPGL SELF PLOT
>PORT1 *PORTn
*PARA
*USB
#DSAN SELF PLOT
>PORT1 *PORTn
*PARA
#ERROR LOG
to
*PAGE COUNT 5
#JOB LOG
to
*PAGE COUNT 5
#ENGINE LOG
> OK?
#SCANNER LOG
> OK?
#SYSTEM DATE
>aa:bb:cc
#SYSTEM TIME
>aa:bb:cc
# FORMAT HDD
> OK? Note (16) Applicable choices vary depending on
the contents of the CF card specialized
# FORMAT NVRAM
for maintenance engineers.
> OK?
#VERSION UP
>lp1020.img (16)
#INIT CHARG.INF
> OK?
#PRINT CHARG.INF
> OK?
#MAINTE INFO
>FAX PRINT
#DATE DUMP
> OK?
F-28
MENU MODE
MENU
#PROTOCOL .
PROTOCOL
#PORT1: XPT #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
#XPT PORT
>9100
PROTOCOL
#PORT2:LPD #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
#PRINTER NAME
>LP02
PROTOCOL
#PORT3:FTP #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
○
○
○
#USER NAME
○
>FTP03
○
PROTOCOL
#PARALLEL #PDL SELECT
>HDTC
F-29
RESET MENU
MENU MODE
MENU
#RESET .
#SYSTEM RESET
>
#PORT RESET
>PORT1
F-30
SYSTEM MENU
MENU MODE
MENU
#SYSTEM.
SYSTEM
#COMM.PARAM COMM.PARAM
#ETHERNET I
COMM.PARAM
#SCANNER #DERIVELY PORT ADDRESS
>000.000.000000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
# DERIVELY PORT
>31000 0 to 65535
# DERIVELY TIME OUT

>5 *1 to 75
#TWAIN TIME OUT

>30min *30min
*60min
*90min
COMM.PARAM
#PARALLEL #TIMING MODE
>NORMAL *NORMAL
*FAST
*SLOW
*MANUAL
#ACK ONTIME (30ns)
>80 1 to 127
#ACK PULSE (30ns)

>80 1 to 127
#BUSY OFF TIMING

> ACK RISING EDGE * ACK RISING EDGE
* ACK RISING EDGE
#SELECTSIGNAL
>ON *ON
*OFF/ON
#AF SIGNAL DIRECTION
>INPUT *INPUT
*OUTPUT
#TIME OUT (100msec)
>300 *1 to 18000
F F'
F-31
F F'
COMM.PARAM
#USB #TIME OUT(sec)
>10 *0 to 99
#CHANGE INTERFACE
>OFF *OFF
*ON
COMM. PARAM
#PlotDataToFile #PDTF HostIP Adress
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to 255.255.255.255
#PDTF PORT
>33000 *0 to 65535
#PDTF Timeout(sec)
>05 *1 to 75
COMM. PARAM
#Terioplot #Terioplot
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#WEB LOCK #Terioplot
>OFF *OFF >000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
*ON to 255.255.255.255
SYSTEM
#ENABLE SERIES #A
>ON *ON
*OFF
#9"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#8.5"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#30 × 42
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#MAP
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#DIN
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#CHINA
>ON *ON
*OFF
F-32
SYSTEM
#APPLY ROLL APPLY ROLL
#A SERIES #USE A0
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE A1
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE A2
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE A3
>ON *ON
APPLY ROLL *OFF
#9" SERIES #USE 36"
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE 24"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 18"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 12"
>OFF *ON
APPLY ROLL *OFF
#8.5" SERIES #USE 34"
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE 22"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 17"
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE 11"
>OFF *ON
APPLY ROLL *OFF
#32 × 42 SERIES #USE 30"
>ON *ON
*OFF
H H'
F-33
H H'
APPLY ROLL
#MAP SERIES #USE B1-MAP
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE B2-MAP
>OFF *ON
APPLY ROLL *OFF
#DIN SERIES #USE B1-DIN
>ON *ON
*OFF
#USE B2-DIN
>OFF *ON
*OFF
APPLY ROLL #USE CHINA A0
#CHINA SERIES >ON *ON
*OFF
#USE CHINA A1
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE CHINA A2
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USE CHINA A3
SYSTEM >OFF *ON
#CHINA SIZE #CHINA A0 *OFF
>914mm *914mm
*910mm
*900mm
*880mm
#CHINA A1
>620mm *620mm
*610mm
#CHINA A2
>450mm *450mm
*440mm
#CHINA A3
>310mm *310mm
*297mm
#SCAN START
>ORIGINAL SET *START BUTTOM
*ORIGINAL SET
#MODE TIMEOUT
>30sec *OFF
*30sec
*1min
*2min
*3min
F-34
SYSTEM
#COPY SETTING #ACCOUNT
>OFF *ON
*OFF
#USER01
>00000000 *00000000 to 99999999
to
#USER20
>00000000 *00000000 to 99999999
#INITIAL SET
>STANDARD *STANDARD
*CHINA
#FACTORY SET
> OK
#LANGUAGE
>JAPANESE *JAPANESE
*ENGLISH
*CHINESES
*GERMAN
*ITALIAN
*FRENCH
*SPANISH
*PORTUGUESE
#LENGTH UNITS
>MILLIMETERS *MILLIMETERS
*INCHES
#ADMIN PASSWORD
>00000000 *00000000 to 99999999
#SERIAL NUMBER
>00000 to 65535
#KEY CODE1
>0000000000000000 *0000000000000000
to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
#KEY CODE2
>0000000000000000 *0000000000000000
to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
#KEY CODE3
>0000000000000000 *0000000000000000
to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
#SYSTEM CUSTOM
> CUSTOM (PLOT POINT)
>OFF *OFF
*ON
CUSTOM (PDTF CHOICE)
>OFF *STANDARD
*EXPANSION
F-35
I #PORT SELECT 1-10
>XLF------------ *X
*L
*F
*-
#DHCP
>DISABLE *DISABLE
*ENABLE
#IP ADDRESS
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#SUBNET MASK
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#ROUTING TABLE #GATEWAY ADDR01

>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR01
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#SETUP DETAILS #ROUTING TABLE2 #GATEWAY ADDR02

>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR02
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
to
#GATEWAY ADDR10
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR10
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#METRIC
>064 *1 to 255
#ETHERNET ADDR
>0800832Annnn
#CONNECTION SPD.
>AUTO *AUTO
*100
K *10
F-36
K
#CONNECTION TYPE
>AUTO *AUTO
*FULL
*HALF
#HTTP PORT
>00080 *0 to 65535
#PORT TIME OUT

>30min *OFF
*5min
*10min
*15min
*30min
#FTP DATE TYPE
>ASCII/BIN *ASCII/BIN
*BIN
#SNMP
>OFF *OFF
*ON
#SNMP VERSION
>V1 *V1
*V2
#TRAPnn #MANEGER
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#ERROR
>ON *ON
*OFF
#JOB
>OFF *OFF
*ON(IP ADDR)
*ON(PORT)
#IP ADDR
>000.000.000.000 *000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#PORT
>ALL *ALL
*PORT01 to 10
#SNMP TRAP NUM.

>2 *1 to 20
F-37
Appendix G Electrical Connection Diagram
Appendix G Electrical Connection Diagram (Plotter)
This appendix shows electrical connection diagrams of the device.
G-1
G-2
SW01:
Main power switch
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
: Low voltage power unit - [1/4]
L1: Inductor (AC100V)

Inductor (AC220/230V)
Fuser unit
HTR1- ASSY (center)
FL01: Halogen lamp (600W)
HTR2- ASSY (side)
LVPS (PSU-LSP(S) 3.5' HDD

: Low voltage power unit (for HDD) : Option unit - [1/2]
Box (electric)
[Note] [Symbol]
For the harnesses for which the UL No. Male Female
is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector Crimped terminal
･ UL1007 (crimped connector) Electrical connection diagram Page
･ UL1061 (crimped connector) Disconnected Flat terminal
LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 1 1/13
Box (electric)
BL05-1:Sirocco fan Cooling controller 1 (board cover)
BL05-2:Sirocco fan Cooling controller 2
BL05-3:Axis flow fan HDD cooling
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
: Low voltage power unit - [2/4] BL05-4:Axis flow fan HV-PS cooling
INT5:MS06-2 Fixation door open/close - [1/2]
INT3:Interlock SW Cutter cover open/close - [1/2]
INT1:Interlock SW Top cover open/close - [1/2]
LEDH
: LED head - [1/2]
[Note] [Symbol]
is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector Crimped connector Disconnected
･ UL1007 (crimped connector) relay Electrical connection diagram Page
･ UL1061 (crimped connector) Flat terminal Butt 2/13
LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 2
G-3
G-4
Box (electric)
HV-PS
: High voltage power unit - [1/2]
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
: Low voltage power unit - [3/4] PM01
: DC servo motor - [1/2]
Paper feed unit

PCV-ASSY-RFU
: Paper feed unit - [1/4]
Fuser unit
FUS01:Temp. fuse Over protect
Connector color : Yellow
PCB-ASSY-MEC
: Engine controller board - [1/8]
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
: RIP board - [1/3]
[Note] [Symbol]
is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector Crimped connector
･ UL1061 (crimped connector) Crimped connector Disconnected
relay LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 3 3/13
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Guide (insertion/lower) unit

PS15: Reflection type photo
Manual feed detection 1 (3:VCC.1:GND PS15)
INT4-5V: Drawer connector
Paper transfer (suction part) PS06: Lever type photo 2

(1:VCC.3:GND)
Paper top edge pass (registration) PS05: Lever type photo 2

(1:VCC.3:GND)
Fuser unit
Paper ejection (fixation) PS07: Lever type photo 2

(1:VCC.3:GND)
Fixation temp. (center) TH01: Thermistor
Fixation temp. (width) TH04: Thermistor
Over heat protect TH02: Thermistor
Suction duct BL01: Sirocco fan
B side connector: Yellow
[Note] [Symbol]
･ UL1007 (crimped connector) Electrical connection diagram
･ UL1061 (crimped connector) Crimped connector Page
Drawer connector
relay PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 1 4/13
G-5
G-6
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC PNL
: Engine controller board - [3/8] : PL Control panel
PCB-ASSY -PSCS
: Process cartridge board
Process cartridge
[Note] [Symbol]
For the harnesses for which the UL No.
is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
TS02: Magnetic sensor Waste toner
MS05: Micro SW Waste toner bottle
MS07: Micro SW Manual tray open/close
BM01: DC motor Waste toner bottle vibration
EL01: LED Alley Discharge LED ON/OFF
BL03R: Axis flow fan Discharger upper right
BL03C: Axis flow fan Discharger upper center
BL03L: Axis flow fan Discharger upper left
BL02: Sirocco fan Discharger upper (center)
BL06-1: Sirocco fan Discharger upper (left)
BL06-2: Sirocco fan Discharger upper (left)
[Note] [Symbol]
is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector Flat terminal Crimped connector
Butt Disconnected 6/13
relay PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 3
G-7
G-8
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
HM01: Pulse motor Heat roller rotation

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
Developer unit
MS04 : Micro SW Toner cartridge
TS01 : Reflection sensor Development presence

or not
GM01: Pulse motor Developer toner stirrer

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
CL04: Magnetic clutch Register roller ON/OFF
CL06: Magnetic clutch Manual feed ON/OFF
TH03 : Thermistor LED head temperature
MS08 : Micro SW Top cover open/close (L)
[Note] [Symbol]
･ UL1007 (crimped connector)
･ UL1061 (crimped connector) Crimped connector Electrical connection diagram Page
PCB-ASSY-MEC PM01
: Engine controller board - [6/8] : DC servo motor - [2/2]
PCB-ASSY-RFU Paper feed unit

: Paper feed board - [2/4]
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
: Low voltage power unit - [4/4]
HV-PS
: High voltage power unit - [2/2]
Process cartridge
Discharge
Development
Transfer
Separator
Box (electric)
High voltage wire : Use the UL3239 AWG#22.
[Note] [Symbol]
For the harnesses for which the UL No.
is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector Crimped terminal
･ UL1061 (crimped connector) Crimped connector
Page
relay Flat terminal PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 5 8/13
G-9
G-10
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC PCB-ASSY-MRC2
: Engine controller board - [7/8] : RIP board - [2/3]
[Symbol]
Male Female
Crimped connector
Electrical connection diagram Page
PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 6 9/13
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC LEDH
: Engine controller board - [8/8] : LED head - [2/2]
[Symbol]
Male Female
Crimped connector Electrical connection diagram Page
PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 7 10/13
G-11
G-12
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
: RIP board - [3/3]
PCB-ASSY-USB2 3.5' HDD

: Optional board : Optional unit - [2/2]
[Symbol]
Male Female
Crimped connector
Electrical connection diagram Page
PCB-ASSY-MRC2 : RIP board 11/13
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-RFU
: Paper unit board - [3/4]
Slitter cutter right home RE01 : Micro switch

Slitter cutter left home RE02 : Micro switch
Cutter motor CUTM : DC motor
Paper width (A3) detection PS04 : Lever type photo 1

(1:VCC. 3:GND)
PS32 : Lever type photo 1

Paper width (A2) detection (1:VCC. 3:GND)

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

(1:VCC. 3:GND)
[Note] [Symbol]
Crimped connector Crimped connector
is not specified, use the following:
･ UL1061 (crimped connector) Crimped connector
relay PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper unit board 1 12/13
G-13
G-14
Paper feed unit
PCB-ASSY-RFU
: Paper feed unit board - [4/4]
PS21 : Transparent type photo Door 1 ( top tray) open/close

(1:VCC. 3:GND)
PS11 : Transparent type photo Roll 1 presence or not

(1:VCC. 3:GND)
FM01 : Pulse motor Roll 1 paper feed/rewind

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
PS22 : Transparent type photo Door 2 ( middle tray) open/close

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
PS23 : Transparent type photo Door 3 ( bottom tray) open/close

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

(1:VCC. 3:GND)

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
Motor side connector : 04KR-6S

Relay connector : BU04P-TR-P-H
TM01 : Pulse motor Paper transfer on cutter

(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
[Note] [Symbol]
Crimped connector Crimped connector
is not specified, use the following:
relay Drawer connector 13/13
PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper unit board
Appendix H Electrical Connection Diagram
Appendix H Electrical Connection Diagram (Scanner)
This appendix shows electrical connection diagrams of the device.
H-1
H-2
Main power switch
LVPS (PSU - LSP)

:Low voltage
power unit - [1/4]
L1:Inductor (AC100V)
Inductor (AC220V/230V)
Fuser unit
HTR1- ASSY (center)
FL01- ASSY (side)

LVPS (PSU - LSP(S)

:Low voltage 3.5' HDD
power unit (for HDD) :Option unit - [1/2]
Box (electric)
[Note] [Symbol]
For the harnesses for which the UL
Male Female
No. is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector Crimped terminal
• UL1007 (crimped connector) Electrical connection diagram
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector) Disconnected Flat terminal
LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 1
Box (electric)
BL05-1:Sirocco fan Cooling controller 1 (board cover)
BL05-2:Sirocco fan Cooling controller 2
BL05-3:Axis flow fan HDD cooling
LVPS (PSU - LSP)

BL05-4:Axis flow fan HV-PS cooling
:Low voltage power unit - [2/4]
PCB-ASSY-MSC2
:Scanner controller board - [1/4]
PCB-ASSY-ISI3
:Image interface board - [1/5]
PNL
:MF operation panel - [1/2]
LEDH
:LED head - [1/2]
[Note] [Symbol]
Pressure-jointed Male Female
No. is not specified, use the following: connector relay Crimped connector Disconnected
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector) Flat terminal Butt LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 2
H-3
H-4
Box (electric)
HV-PS
:High voltage power unit - [1/2]
LVPS (PSU - LSP)

PM01
:DC servo motor - [1/2]
Paper feed unit

PCB-ASSY-RFU
:Paper feed unit - [1/4]
Fuser unit
FUS01:Temp. fuse Over protect
Connector color
: Yellow
PCB-ASSY-MEC
:Engine controller board - [1/8]
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
:RIP board - [1/4]
[Note] [Symbol]
For the harnesses for which the UL Pressure-jointed Male Female
No. is not specified, use the following: Crimped connector
connector
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector) Pressure-jointed Disconnected
connector relay LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 3
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Guide (insertion/lower) unit

Manual feed PS15: Reflection type photo
detection 1 (3:VCC, 1:GND PS15)
INT4-5V: Drawer connector
Paper transfer PS06: Lever type photo 2

(suction part) (1:VCC, 3:GND)
Paper top edge pass PS05: Lever type photo 2

(registration) (1:VCC, 3:GND)
Fuser unit
Paper ejection PS07: Lever type photo 2
(fixation) (1:VCC, 3:GND)
Fixation temp. TH01: Thermistor

(center)
Fixation temp.
(edge) TH04: Thermistor
Over heat protect TH02: Thermistor
Suction duct BL01: Sirocco fan
[Note] [Symbol]
No. is not specified, use the following: connector Crimped connector
• UL1007 (crimped connector)
Pressure-jointed Electrical connection diagram
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector) Drawer connector
connector relay PCB-ASSY-MEC: Engine controller board 1
H-5
H-6
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC PNL:
:Engine controller board - [3/8] Control panel - [2/2]
PCB-ASSY-PSCS:
Process cartridge board
Process cartridge
[Note] [Symbol]
For the harnesses for which the UL Pressure-jointed
No. is not specified, use the following: connector
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector) Pressure-jointed
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
TS02: Magnetic sensor Waste toner
MS05: Micro SW Waste toner bottle
MS07: Micro SW Manual tray open/close
INT5: MS06-1 Fixation door open/close - [2/2]
INT3: Interlock SW Cutter cover open/close - [2/2]
INT1: Interlock SW Top cover open/close (R) - [2/2]
BM01: DC motor Waste toner bottle vibration
EL01: LED Alley Charge elimination LED ON/OFF
EL01R: Axis flow fan Discharger upper right
EL01C: Axis flow fan Discharger upper center
EL01L: Axis flow fan Discharger upper left
BL02: Sirocco fan Fixation upper (center)
BL06-1: Sirocco fan Fixation upper (left)
BL06-2: Sirocco fan Fixation upper (left)
[Note] [Symbol]
No. is not specified, use the following: connector Flat terminal Crimped connector
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector)
connector relay Butt Disconnected
PCB-ASSY-MEC: Engine controller board 3
H-7
H-8
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
HM01:Pulse motor Heat roller rotation

(1:/B, 2/B, 3:/B, 4/B)
Developer unit
MS04:Micro SW Toner cartridge
TS01:Reflection sensor
Development
presence or not
GM01 :Pulse motor

(1:/B, 2/B, 3:/B, 4/B)
Developer toner stirrer
CL04 :Magnetic clutch Register roller ON/OFF
CL06 :Magnetic clutch Manual feed roller ON/OFF
TH03 :Thermistor LED head temperature
MS08 :Micro SW Top cover open/close (L)
[Note] [Symbol]
PCB-ASSY-MEC PM01
:Engine controller board - [6/8] :DC servo motor - [2/2]
PCB-ASSY-RFU Paper feed unit

:Paper feed unit board - [2/4]
LVPS (PSU - LSP)

HV-PS
:High voltage power unit - [2/2]
Process cartridge
Discharge
Development
Transfer
Separator
Box (electric)
High voltage wire : Use the UL3239 AWG#22.
[Note] [Symbol]
For the harnesses for which the UL Pressure-jointed
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector) Disconnected
H-9
H-10
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC PCB-ASSY-MRC2
:Engine controller board - [7/8] :RIP board - [2/4]
CENTER
[Symbol]
Male Female
Crimped connector
Electrical connection diagram
PCB-ASSY -MEC: Engine controller board 5
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC LEDH
:Engine controller board - [8/8] :LED head - [2/2]
[Symbol]
Male Female Crimped
connector
PCB-ASSY-MEC: Engine controller board 7
H-11
H-12
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
:RIP board - [3/4]
PCB-ASSY-USB2 3.5' HDD

:Optional board :Optional unit - [2/2]
[Symbol]
Male Female Crimped
connector
PCB-ASSY -MRC2: RIP board
Paper feed unit
PCB-ASSY-RFU
:Paper unit board - [3/4]
Slitter cutter right home RED01 : Micro switch
Slitter cutter left home RED02 : Micro switch
Cutter motor CUTM : DC motor

Paper width (A3) detection (1:VCC, 3:GND)
PS32: Lever type photo 1



[Note] [Symbol]
connector relay PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper feed unit board 1
H-13
H-14
Paper feed unit
PCB-ASSY-RFU
:Paper unit board - [4/4]
PS21 : Transparent type photo

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Door 1 (top tray) open/close

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Roll 1 presence or not
FM01 : Pulse motor

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
Roll 1 paper feed/rewind

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Door 2 (middle tray) open/close

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
FM02 : Pulse motor

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Door 3 (bottom tray) open/close

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
FM03 : Pulse motor

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
Motor side connector: 04KR-6S

Relay connector: BU04P-TR-P-H
TM01 : Pulse motor

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
Paper transfer on cutter
[Note] [Symbol]
connector relay Drawer connector PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper feed unit board
Box (electric)
Scanner Unit
PCB-ASSY-MSC2
:Scanner controller board - [2/4]
SM01 : Pulse motor

(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
Original transfer
PSS10: Transparent type photo

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Scanner cover open/close (right)
PSS09: Transparent type photo

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Scanner cover open/close (left)
PSS08: Reflection type photo

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Original skew (right) detection

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Original skew (left) detection

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Original width (registration) detection

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
Original width (A4) detection

(1:VCC, 3:GND)

(1:VCC, 3:GND)

(1:VCC, 3:GND)

(1:VCC, 3:GND)
[Note] [Symbol]
No. is not specified, use the following: Pressure-jointed
• UL1007 (crimped connector) connector
• UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector) Pressure-jointed Electrical connection diagram
connector relay
PCB-ASSY-MSC2 : Scanner controller board 1
H-15
H-16
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MSC2 PCB-ASSY-MRC2
:Scanner controller board - [3/4] :RIP board - [4/4]
[Symbol]
Male Female Electrical connection diagram
Connector for board
Scanner Unit
PCB-ASSY-MSC2 PCB-ASSY-ISI3
:Scanner controller board - [4/4] :Image interface board - [2/5]
[Symbol]
Male Female Electrical connection diagram
Connector for board
H-17
H-18
Scanner Unit
PCB-ASSY-ISI3 CIS01
:Image interface board - [3/5] :Contact image sensor
CIS02
:Contact image sensor
[Note] Electrical connection diagram

The CBLS01A and CBLS01B are FFC cables.
PCB-ASSY-ISI3 : Image interface board 1
Scanner Unit
PCB-ASSY-ISI3 CIS03
CIS04
:Contact image sensor
[Note] Electrical connection diagram

The CBLS01C and CBLS01D are FFC cables.
H-19
H-20
Scanner Unit
PCB-ASSY-ISI3 CIS05
[Symbol]
[Note] Male Female
(1) For the harness not specified with UL No. Crimped connector Pressure-jointed connector relay
• Use the UL1061 (pressure-jointed connector). Electrical connection diagram
(2) The CBLS01E is an FFC cable.

LP1020 MM E01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LP1020 MM E01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LP-1020/LP-1020L

Black-and-White Raster Plotter

Seiko I Infotech Inc.

©Seiko I Infotech 2007, 2008

Serious personal injury or death:

Minor personal injury or product and/or peripheral

This symbol ( ) denotes items that are forbidden.

This symbol ( ) denotes items you should follow to prevent accidents or

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

2a "Caution when dealing with

1 "Caution: high temperature" label

2b "Caution when dealing with paper jam" label

2 "Caution when dealing with paper jams" label

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

4 "Gas spring expiration date" label

3 Ensure sufficient maintenance space.

9 Do not run the developing sleeve in the reverse direction.

Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure 1-1

1.2 Necessary Tools 1-3

1.3 External View and Nomenclatures 1-3

1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware 1-11

1.6 How To Enable the Color Scan Option 1-26

2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu 2-4

2.3 Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus 2-6

2.4 Message 2-76

3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus 3-3

3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web 3-6

3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions 3-6

Chapter 4 Regular Inspection 4-1

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error) 5-1

5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error 5-2

5.3 Operator Notice Warning 5-4

5.4 Warning 5-6

5.6 Error Log 5-25

5.7 Error Log Classification List 5-28

5.8 Job Log 5-29

5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board) 5-31

5.10 Serial Number Unset 5-32

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure) 6-1

6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting 6-5

6.3 Leve-2 Troubleshooting 6-7

7.3 Level 2 Troubleshooting 7-3

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure) 8-1

8.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure 8-4

8.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure 8-7

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting (Scanner Print Quality Failure) 9-1

10.2 Replacing the Parts 10-3

Chapter 11 Replacing the Part (Disassembly/Assembly of Scanner) 11-1

11.2 Replacing the Part 11-3

Chapter 12 Adjustment (Plotter) 12-1

12.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items 12-9

12.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space 12-24

12.6 Adjusting the LED Head Joint 12-25

13.2 Outline of Adjustment Work 13-2

13.3 PC for Adjustment 13-3

13.4 Originals for Adjustment and Evaluation 13-5

13.5 Preparation for Adjustment 13-7

13.6 Shading Offset Adjustment Procedure 13-10

13.7 Original Feed Speed Adjustment/Connection Adjustment in Main and

13.8 Registration Adjustment Procedure 13-39

13.10 Scanner Adjustment Results Memorandumg 13-48

Chapter 14 Operational Description (Plotter) 14-1

14.2 Engine Specifications 14-3